Get Started in App Store Connect

App Store Connect workflow

NOTICE: This documentation is no longer updated. App Store Connect Help is now located at developer.apple.com/help/app-store-connect/. Visit the guide in the new location to find the latest updates.

You use App Store Connect to submit apps to the App Store, manage your apps, distribute beta versions of your apps using TestFlight, accept legal agreements, enter tax and banking information, view trends and financial reports, and more. The App Store Connect API is also available for you to automate your workflow.

Initially, only the Account Holder (the person who joins the Apple Developer Program) can sign in to App Store Connect.

The Account Holder can invite additional users in the Users and Access section.

Step 1: Accept agreements, and enter tax and banking information

If you want to sell your apps or offer in-app purchases, visit the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section to sign the Paid Applications Agreement. Then enter banking and tax information.

Step 2: Add users and assign roles

To delegate responsibilities to others, visit the Users and Access section and add users by entering their names and email addresses. They can then perform tasks based on the roles you assign them. Learn about roles.

Step 3: Add your app and upload a build

In the My Apps section, create an app record so your app’s information, such as name, description, and keywords, is ready for the App Store. You don’t need to finish creating your app in Xcode before entering its information in App Store Connect. However, you must create an app record before you can upload a build of your app. You can upload multiple builds using one of upload tools, and then view the builds and variants in App Store Connect.

Step 4: Test and submit your app

Distribute your app for testing using TestFlight, which supports apps for iOS, iPadOS, tvOS, and watchOS. You can add internal testers and invite external testers who will use TestFlight app to install your app on their devices. When your app is ready for the App Store, choose the build you want to submit and send it to App Store Review. You can continue improving your app by creating new versions periodically.

Step 5: Monitor your apps status, usage, and sales

You can monitor the status of your app as it goes through App Store Review. Once it’s live on the App Store, you can gain insights on its performance through App Analytics, Sales and Trends, and Payments and Financial Reports. As users start posting reviews on the App Store, you can respond. The App Store Connect for iPhone and iPad also lets you view some of this information and perform other tasks.

Sign in to App Store Connect

Sign in with the Apple ID associated with your membership in the Apple Developer Program or the email address with which you were invited to App Store Connect.

Go to App Store Connect, then sign in with your Apple ID.
Click any section on the home page to access its features.

Home page overview

The home page provides access to all sections of App Store Connect. Within each section, you have access only to the functionality that’s related to your user role.

Tip: You can return to the App Store Connect home page at any time by clicking App Store Connect at the top of any page.

Section				Description
				My Apps: Add apps to your account, edit app information, create new versions, and submit your app for review. Configure features and services, such as Game Center, in-app purchase, and TestFlight.
				App Analytics: View analytics that track user app acquisition, usage, and monetization. Learn about app analytics.
				Sales and Trends: View reports that show sales and trends over time. Learn about sales and trends.
				Payments and Financial Reports: View and download your monthly financial reports and payments information, including earnings, amount owed, and last payment. Learn about payments and financial reports.
				Users and Access: Add users, delete users, and create sandbox testers. Change user roles and change user notifications.
				Agreements, Tax, and Banking: Sign agreements and download a copy of an agreement. Enter tax information and set up electronic banking information to receive earnings payments from Apple.
				Resources and Help: Get App Store Connect documentation and resources on the Apple Developer website.

App Store Connect for iPhone and iPad

App Store Connect for iPhone and iPad gives you the flexibility to use your iPhone or iPad to manage apps you’ve developed for the App Store. View app statuses, manage TestFlight beta testing, and monitor app performance and sales — all from your device. You can even receive notifications about key events, like when a user posts a review, so you can quickly respond. App Store Connect for iPhone and iPad is available on the App Store.

Newly added users in App Store Connect may have to wait up to 24 hours to access App Store Connect for iPhone and iPad.

Add, edit, and delete users

User accounts and roles overview

You can manage users, add Sandbox testers, and manage API keys in the Users and Access section of App Store Connect.

User roles determine access to sections of App Store Connect and the Apple Developer website, as well as privileges for performing tasks. In most cases, a role can be assigned to more than one user and a user can have more than one role. The person who enrolls in the Apple Developer Program is the Account Holder, which is the only user that can sign legal agreements, renew membership, submit Safari Extensions, or create developer ID certificates. There can only be one Account Holder.

Individuals enrolled in the Apple Developer Program can give additional users access to their content in App Store Connect, however, these users will only receive access to App Store Connect and aren't considered part of the team in the Apple Developer Program. They will not receive access to other membership resources or benefits.

Organizations enrolled in the Apple Developer Program can add an unlimited number of members to their organization’s team. All users receive access to App Store Connect and all other membership resources and membership benefits.

Note: Two-step verification or two-factor authentication is required to sign in to App Store Connect. Visit the Security section of your Apple ID account or the Apple ID section of Settings on your iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch to enable two-step verification or two-factor authentication for the Apple ID associated with your account.

Learn how to manage user invitations and users with the App Store Connect API.

For instructions on transferring the Account Holder role, visit the support page.

View and edit your profile

You can view and edit your App Store Connect profile. If your Apple ID is associated with more than one account, you can switch between accounts.

View your profile

Click your user name in the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, then select Edit Profile.

Set your preferred currency

Your preferred currency is the default currency that displays in App Store Connect when you select pricing for your app or in-app purchase. It's for App Store Connect display purposes only, and is not the currency that displays for customers on the App Store, or the currency you are paid in.

Click your user name in the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, then select Edit Profile.
Choose your preferred currency from the Preferred Currency menu, then click Save.

Switch to another user account

If your Apple ID is associated with more than one App Store Connect or iTunes Connect account, you can switch between accounts.

In the top-right corner, click your name, then select a different account.

Set email notifications

You can customize the account-related notifications you receive.

Click your user name in the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, then select Edit Profile.
Under Notifications, from the menu for each notification type, select the regions you want to receive notifications for. Choose World to include all regions. There are also certain notification types that do not offer the ability to select certain regions. You can receive these for all regions by selecting the corresponding checkbox.
Note: If you don't wish to receive a notification, remove all selected regions by clicking the Delete icon (x) next to the regions, or deselect the checkbox.
To remove a region from a notification type, click the Delete icon next to the region.
On the top right, click Save.

Leave a team

You can remove yourself from a team at any time. However, if you are the Account Holder, you have legal responsibility for the membership and can’t leave the team until you transfer the Account Holder role to someone else.

In the top-right corner of any App Store Connect page, click your name, then select Edit Profile. Make sure you are viewing the account associated with the team you want to leave. If not, switch to the correct account.
At the bottom of the page, click Leave Team, then confirm in the dialog.

Add and edit users

You can add and edit users in Users and Access.

If you’re enrolled in the Apple Developer Program as an individual, you can give users access to your content in App Store Connect. All users receive access only to App Store Connect and aren't considered part of your team in the Apple Developer Program. They will not receive access to other membership resources or benefits.

If your organization is enrolled in the Apple Developer Program, you can add members to your team. All users receive access to App Store Connect and all other membership resources and benefits.

Learn how to manage user invitations and users with the App Store Connect API.

For instructions on transferring the Account Holder role, visit the support page.

Add a user

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From Users and Access, under People, click the Add icon (+).
Provide the required information:
- Enter the user’s first name, last name, and valid email address. Any email address may be used to activate the account, not necessarily one that’s associated with an Apple ID.
- Assign user roles to determine the sections the user can access and tasks they can perform.
- Determine if the user should be granted access only to specific apps. Note that user roles apply to the user in general and aren't app-specific.
- If applicable, determine if the user should have access to additional permissions such as Access to Reports, Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles on the Apple Developer website, or Create Apps. Note that certain permissions will make all app information visible to the user and therefore, they cannot have their app access limited.
Click Invite.

The new user receives an email with a link to activate the account.

If the account was created with an existing Apple ID, the user is asked to sign in to App Store Connect.

If the account was created with an email address not already associated with an Apple ID, the user can create an Apple ID during account activation.

Users manage their own Apple ID names and passwords on the Apple ID page.

Change user role

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

In Users and Access, the list of users with access to your App Store Connect content appears under People.
Click the Apple ID for the user you want to edit.
Select one or more roles for the user or edit their app access.
On the top right, click Save.

Delete a single user

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

In Users and Access, the list of users with access to your App Store Connect content appears under People.
Click the Apple ID for the user you want to delete.
Click Delete User, then click Delete in the dialog that appears.

Delete multiple users

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

From Users and Access, under People, click Edit on the top right.
Select the checkbox for each user you want to delete, then click Delete.
In the dialog that appears, click Delete.
Click Done.

Change user app access

You can limit which apps users with the App Manager, Customer Support, Developer, Marketing, or Sales (without Access to Reports) roles have access to. If you don’t change their app access, they can access all apps by default.

Learn how to manage users with the App Store Connect API.

Note: Users that are part of an organization's team in the Apple Developer Program and have access to Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles can view all app information there, as app access cannot be limited in Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Change access for a single user

From Users and Access, under People, click the Apple ID for the user you want to edit.
In the Apps section, choose an option from the pop-up menu:
- All Apps: Gives the user access to all apps.
- Add an app: Choose an app, or multiple apps, you want the user to have access to.
To remove an app, click the Delete icon (x) next to the app name.
Removing all individual apps from the list gives the user access to all apps by default.
On the top right, click Save.

Edit access for multiple users

From Users and Access, under People, click Edit on the top right.
Select the checkbox for each user you want to edit, then click Edit App Access.
In the dialog, choose an option from the pop-up menu:
- All Apps: Gives the users access to all apps.
- Add an app: Gives the users access to certain apps.
To remove an app, click the Delete icon (x) next to the app name.
Click Save.
Click Done.

Create a Sandbox Apple ID

If your app offers in-app purchases or Apple Pay, you can test it in the sandbox environment by creating Sandbox Apple IDs in App Store Connect and using them to sign in to a development-signed version of your app.

Provide the following information to create a new sandbox tester:

First name
Last name
Email address
Use an email address that has never been used as an Apple ID or to purchase iTunes or App Store content. Consider creating a dedicated email address for each sandbox tester.
If your email service provider supports email subaddressing with a plus sign (+), you can use subaddresses of a sandbox-specific address for a sandbox tester. For example, if your base sandbox email is billjames2@icloud.com, you can use billjames2+UK@icloud.com, billjames2+US@icloud.com, and billjames2+JP@icloud.com as email addresses for additional testers. All communications sent to the subaddresses are also sent to the base address.
Password
Like standard Apple IDs, Sandbox Apple IDs require strong passwords. When you enter a password, recommendations will display if your password doesn't meet the requirements.
App Store country or region

Learn about managing Sandbox Apple ID settings.

Learn about testing Apple Pay apps.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. View role permissions.

Add a sandbox tester

From Users and Access, click Sandbox Testers.
Click the add button (+).
Enter the tester information, then click Create.

The tester’s name, email, and password can’t be edited once the Sandbox Apple ID is created.

Delete a sandbox tester

From Users and Access, click Sandbox Testers.
Click Edit.
Select the checkbox for each user you want to delete and click Delete Testers.
In the dialog that appears, click Delete Testers.

If you delete a sandbox tester, the associated Sandbox Apple ID can no longer be used as an App Store Connect user, to test in the sandbox environment, or to make purchases on the iTunes Store or App Store.

Generate an API key

If your access to the App Store Connect API is approved, you can generate an API key to configure, authenticate, and use App Store Connect services.

View details on managing and securing your keys.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

Generate an API key

From Users and Access, click on Keys. The page opens with App Store Connect API selected.
Click Generate API Key.
If you already have an Active API key generated, you will click the Add (+) icon to add more.
Enter a name for the key. The name is used for your reference only and is not part of the key itself.
Under Access, select the role permissions to determine what the API can be used for. API keys are applied across all apps so it is not possible to limit app access for an API key.
Click Generate.

Once you generate an API key, you won't be able to edit its name or access level. If you need to make changes, revoke the API key and generate a new one.

Download an API key

API keys are private and can only be downloaded once. After downloading the key, store it in a safe place. Remember to revoke a key immediately if it becomes lost or compromised.

From Users and Access, click Keys. The page opens with App Store Connect API selected.
Navigate to an API key under the Active section, then click Download API Key for the key you want to download.
In the dialog, click Download.

Revoke an API Key

If you no longer want to use an API key to authenticate into App Store Connect services, you can revoke the key.

From Users and Access, click on Keys. The page opens with App Store Connect API selected.
On the top right, click Edit.
Select the API Keys you want to revoke.
On the top right, click Revoke Key, then click Revoke in the dialog.

An API key cannot be reinstated once it’s been revoked. Any revoked keys from the past 30 days appear under the Revoked section of the App Store Connect API page.

Generate keys for in-app purchases

Generating an in-app purchase key allows Apple to authenticate and validate client-to-server or server-to-server requests related to in-app purchases, including App Store server APIs and promotional offers for auto-renewable subscriptions. In-app purchase keys are created for your account, and can be applied to multiple apps, individual apps, or individual in-app purchase products. You can have a maximum of 10 active subscriptions keys at a time. Keys don’t expire but can be modified once created.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

Generate an in-app purchase key

From Users and Access, click on Keys and select In-App Purchase.
Click Generate In-App Purchase Key.
If you already have an Active In-App Purchase key generated, you will click the Add (+) icon to add more.
Enter a name for the key. The name is used for your reference only and is not part of they key itself.
Click Generate.

Once you generate an in-app purchase key, you won't be able to edit its name. If you need to make changes, revoke the key and generate a new one.

Download an in-app purchase key

In-app purchase keys are private and can only be downloaded once. After downloading the key, store it in a safe place. Remember to revoke a key immediately if it becomes lost or compromised and ensure that offers using this key are updated.

From Users and Access, click on Keys and select In-App Purchase.
Navigate to a key under the Active section, then click Download Key for the key you want to download. Keep in mind that keys can be downloaded only once.
In the dialog, click Download.

Revoke an in-app purchase key

If you no longer want to use an in-app purchase key to validate your offers, you can revoke the key.

From Users and Access, click on Keys and select In-App Purchase.
On the top right, click Edit.
Select the keys you want to revoke.
On the top right, click Revoke Key, then click Revoke in the dialog. You won't be able to reinstate a key after it's been revoked.

If you revoke a key, be sure to update the offers using that key since customers won't be able to redeem offers associated with it. Any revoked keys from the past 30 days appear under the Revoked section of the In-App Purchase page.

Manage apps and versions

Add a new app

Before you can upload a build of your app to App Store Connect, you must first create an app record in your App Store Connect account.

If you would like to offer an app with multiple platforms together as a single purchase for customers, create it as a single record in App Store Connect. All platforms will share the same bundle ID, but information specific to each platform is added separately.

Note: You can’t add an app to your account until the Account Holder user signs the latest agreement in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section.

Required role: Account Holder, App Manager, or Admin. View role permissions.

From My Apps, click the Add button (+) on the top left.
The My Apps page is blank until you create your first app record.
From the pop-up menu, select New App.
In the New App dialog, select one or more platform and enter the app information.
If you're registered as a company you'll have the option of setting your developer name.
Note: Watch-only apps are considered part of the iOS platform in App Store Connect.
Under User Access, choose Limited Access or Full Access. If you choose Limited Access, select the users you’d like to access this app.
Users with the Account Holder, Admin, Finance, and Access to Reports roles can view all apps because those roles can’t have their app access limited.
Click Create, and look for messages that indicate missing information.

After you create an App Store Connect record for an app, the app appears in My Apps, and the app status is Prepare for Submission. You can select the app on this page to view and edit app information.

Can I deliver my app information using the App Store Connect REST API?

Yes, you can manage in-app purchases, subscriptions, metadata, and app pricing via the App Store Connect REST API, which makes it easy to customize and automate your workflows.

How do I offer an app that runs on multiple platforms as a single purchase?

You can add a platform to an app to create a universal purchase.

What can I do if the app name I want is unavailable?

An app name can be used for one app per localization.

If an app in your account already uses the app name, you can either submit an update to the existing app to change the name or remove an app from App Store Connect to allow the name to be used in a new app record.

If the app name is in use by another developer and you have trademark rights to the name, you can submit a claim.

Set your developer name on the App Store

Your developer name appears under your app's name on your app's App Store product page. By default, your legal name is used. If you enrolled in the Apple Developer Program as an organization, you may set a different developer name if it's a registered trade name, DBA, or fictitious business name. For example, if your legal name is “Apps Company LLC”, your trade name may simply be “Apps Company”, which can be used on the App Store.

If you’re enrolled as an individual, this option is not available to you and the developer name is the same as your legal name.

You can set your developer name only when adding an app to your account the first time. It cannot be edited or updated later, so it is important to add it correctly.

From My Apps, click the Add button (+).
The My Apps page is blank until you create your first app.
From the pop-up window, enter your developer name into the Company Name field.
Fill in the other required details and click Create.

Once your app is approved for the App Store, your developer name displays under your app name on your app’s product page.

See alsoAdd a new app

Enter app information

View and edit app information

After you add an app to your account, you can view and edit the app information and platform version information in the My Apps section.

Some information is required before you upload a build or submit your app for review. You can edit some properties anytime and other properties only when the app status is editable. In addition, you can localize App Store information that appears on the App Store. Learn about required, localizable, and editable properties for your app and app version.

Learn how to manage app metadata with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
Tip: If you have several apps, you can use the toolbar controls to find an app.
In the sidebar, select the app version under the platform you wish to edit.
You can localize the information that appears under Version Information. The information under General App Information is shared across localizations. To learn more about a property, click the question mark next to the field, or go to Platform version information.
To update information that is shared across platforms, select App Information under General from the sidebar. To learn more about a property, click the question mark next to the field, or go to App information.
Click Save.

I updated my app information. Why isn’t it displaying in some app store territories?

When you update your app’s metadata, it can take up to 24 hours to appear in the App Store.

How is my app searchable on the App Store?

Your app is searchable by app name, app subtitle, keywords, and your company name. Learn more about discovery on the App Store.

Set app age rating

An age rating is a required app information property used by the parental controls on the App Store. App Store Connect provides a list of content descriptions and you identify how frequently each content type appears in your app. Your selections are converted into an App Store age rating, as well as additional region-specific age ratings.

Some regions have more specific rating guidelines than others. When you describe your app’s content, App Store Connect notes these details and the region-specific age rating to help you understand the impact of including certain types of content in your app.

Learn how to manage app age ratings with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Set app age rating

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click App Information.
On the right, below Age Rating, click Set Age Rating Across All Platforms.
Select level of frequency for each content description, and click Next.
Select whether or not your app contains unrestricted web access or instances of gambling, and click Next.
View your age rating result and click Done.

To edit the age rating, click App Information in the sidebar, then click Edit next to the age rating.

If your app’s age rating is 12+ or lower but you believe its content may not be suitable for users under 17, you can manually select Restrict to 17+ under Advanced. Your app's age rating will display as 17+ on the App Store, but the content descriptions will still reflect your selections in App Store Connect.

If your app’s age rating is 4+ or 9+ and you want your app to display in the Kids category on the App Store, select Made for Kids under Advanced and specify the age range appropriate for your app. You cannot change this selection once your app is approved by App Review. The app and all subsequent updates will need to follow the Kids category guidelines.

View region-specific ratings

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click App Information.
On the right, below Age Rating, click Rating in Other Countries/Regions.
A dialog appears showing the age rating in other regions, which displays alongside Apple's age rating on your app's product page in these specific regions.

Provide a custom license agreement

Apple provides a standard EULA (End-User License Agreement) that applies in all territories. If you don’t provide a custom license agreement, the standard Apple EULA is applied to your app and the license agreement link won’t be shown on your App Store product page.

For information about creating a EULA, visit Instructions for Minimum Terms of Developer’s End-User License Agreement. For the text of the standard agreement, visit Licensed Application End User License Agreement.

Learn how to manage your EULA with the App Store Connect API.

Edit the license agreement

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar click App Information under General.
On the left, in the General Information section, click Edit next to License Agreement.
In the dialog that appears, select “Apply a custom EULA to all chosen countries or regions.”
In the Custom License Agreement field, enter your custom end-user license agreement as a plain text document.
All HTML tags are stripped and escaped, and only line break characters are accepted.
Tip: To add localized text or specify a country or region for your license agreement, add each language and enter the translated text after the previous one, so that your license agreement includes multiple languages.
In the Countries or Regions section, select each country or region where you want to apply your custom license agreement.
Click Done.
On the top right, click Save.

Localize App Store information

After you add an app to your account, you can add languages and localized metadata on the App Information page. View a list of supported languages and a list of localizable properties.

For example, if the primary language you select for your app in App Store Connect is English and it’s the only language you provide, your app metadata in all App Store territories appears in English. If you localize your app metadata in French, the French localization displays to users whose language setting is French. The French localization also displays to users in territories where the App Store supports French but not English. Users can search for your app using localized keywords in all territories where the App Store supports French. If there’s no localization available that matches the language setting, the next most relevant localization is used. In other App Store territories, your metadata displays in the primary language (English in this example.)

Languages on the App Information page in App Store Connect are part of your app’s metadata. This is different than adding languages to your app in Xcode when you localize your binary. Learn about localizing your app binary.

Learn how to manage the localization with the App Store Connect API.

Important: You can manage languages only when the app status is editable.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Add a language

When you add a language to your app, screenshots and the properties for the new language default to those for the primary language, except for the description and keywords. When you add a localization from the platform version section, it will automatically be added to the shared metadata under App information and to other platforms.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
On the top right, click the primary language to display the language pop-up menu.
Below Not Localized, hold the pointer over the language (and locale) you want to add, then click the Add button (+) that appears.
Enter localized metadata — such as descriptions and keywords — for the platform, then click Save.
View descriptions of these properties.
To enter information that is shared across platforms, click App Information under General
On the top right, click the primary language to display the language pop-up menu.
Hold the pointer over the language (and locale) you want to add, then click the Add button (+) that appears.
Enter the app name and privacy policy URL for the language or locale, then on the top right, click Save.
View descriptions of these properties..

Edit localizations

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
On the top right, choose the language from the pop-up menu.
Edit the localized information, then on the top right, click Save.

Delete a language

When you delete a language, the App Store territories that display app information in that language revert to showing the information you entered for the primary language.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
On the top right, click the primary language to display the language pop-up menu.
In the Localized section, hold the pointer over the language you want to delete and click the Delete button (–).

Change the primary language

You can change the primary language for an app. In order for a language to be selectable as a primary language:

You must already have added the language to a previous version.
The new language must be approved by App Review. If the language hasn’t been approved, submit a version with this localized metadata to be approved. Then, select it as your primary language on a subsequent update.
You must already have uploaded screenshots in the language that were approved by App Review. If the screenshots for that localization are being derived from another localization’s screenshots, you must first manually add screenshots for that language and submit a version with these screenshots to be approved. Then, change the primary language on a subsequent update. Learn more about adding screenshots and previews.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
Click App Information under General in the sidebar.
From the Primary Language pop-up menu, choose the new primary language.
On the top right, click Save.

Add watchOS app information

You can use watchOS 6 SDK to create apps for Apple Watch. These can be either iOS apps with a watchOS app or watch-only apps.

To prepare watchOS apps for distribution on the App Store, simply add an iOS app to App Store Connect, then add additional information specific to your app.

Make sure your description includes the app’s functionality on Apple Watch. You also need to provide screenshots for Apple Watch and an App Store icon. Your screenshots and icon will be reviewed by App Review after you submit your new app version.

For details on how to prepare watchOS metadata, go to Preparing Your watchOS App for Submission.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Add watchOS app information

From My Apps, click the Add button (+) in the top left corner.
From the pop-up menu, choose New App.
In the New App dialog, check the box next to iOS and enter the app information.
Click Create.
Scroll down to the Apple Watch section and if necessary, click the disclosure triangle to reveal the icon and screenshot well.
Drag either Apple Watch Series 3, Series 4, or Series 5 screenshots to the well.
View Screenshot specifications. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your App Store icon.
On the top right, click Save.
Note: iOS screenshots are also required for apps with an iOS component, but not required for watch-only apps.

Note: For details on uploading your App Store icon, view add an App Store icon.

Add iMessage app information

You can use the Messages framework to create sticker packs or iMessage apps that will be available on the App Store for iMessage. These can be standalone apps or app extensions within a containing iOS app. For more information, view iMessage Apps and Stickers.

If your app is an iMessage app, sticker pack, or an extension of one of the two, create an app record in App Store Connect, then add additional information specific to your iMessage app or sticker pack. Keep in mind that you must also submit an App Store icon in addition to the iMessage app icon.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Add iMessage screenshots

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the version under the platform you wish to edit.
Scroll down to the iMessage App section and if necessary, click the disclosure triangle to reveal the well.
Drag the screenshots to the well.

Change iMessage app type

If you want to change the type of iMessage app you offer, you may need to create and submit it as a new app. Currently, sticker packs or iMessage apps can be offered as either:

Standalone apps: the app is only accessible within iMessage
Extensions to an iOS app: there is a containing iOS app with additional functionality outside of iMessage

You may rebuild your standalone iMessage app as a standalone sticker pack and vice versa, or rebuild your iMessage extension as a sticker pack extension and vice versa, and submit it as a version update to the same app record in App Store Connect. To rebuild your app from a standalone app to an extension of an iOS app or vice versa, you will need to create it as a new app.

Manage app privacy

You are required to explain your data handling practices in App Store Connect to let users know what data may be collected through your app and how it may be used. Additionally, you are required to provide a privacy policy URL for your iOS app platform and privacy policy text for your tvOS app platform. Providing a privacy choices URL is optional.

Your responses to the app privacy questions will be used to help inform customers about your app’s data practices. Based on your submitted responses, your App Store product page will be updated to include information about the app’s data collection and usage.

Responses are provided at the app level and should represent your app’s data practices across all platforms. If the app collects more data on one platform than another, answer in the most comprehensive and inclusive way. You’ll need to provide information about your app’s privacy practices, as well as the practices of third-party partners whose code you integrate into your app.

Note: You’re responsible for keeping your responses accurate and up to date. If your practices change, update your responses in App Store Connect.

For more information on privacy and data, view User Privacy and Data Use.

For more information on responding to app privacy questions, view App privacy details on the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Answering app privacy questions

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select App Privacy.
On the right, click Get Started.
In the dialog that appears, indicate whether you or your third-party partners collect data from your app.
If the answer is no, select No, we do not collect data from this app and click Save.
You will not need to answer any further questions.
If the answer is yes, select Yes, we collect data from this app and click Next.
Select all of the data you or your third-party partners collect from this app and click Save.
If your app is currently available on the App Store, make sure your responses reflect the data collected only from that app version.
The different data types will appear below the Data Types section.
Click into each data type and answer the questions that follow. Do this for every data type you selected.
Click Save when finished.
If at any point you want to update your data types, click Edit next to Data Types.
After you've finished answering the questions for each data type, your summarized responses will appear under each data type section.
You can preview how this information about your app’s data collection and usage will look on the App Store, below the Product Page Preview section. To view product page preview details, click See Details.
On the top right of the page, click Publish.
In the dialog that appears, confirm that you agree that your responses are accurate, in compliance with App Store Review Guidelines and applicable law, and that you will promptly update your responses if your data practices change, and click Publish.
If your app is not yet live on the App Store, these responses will be published once your app goes live. If your app is live, clicking Publish will publish your responses to your app’s product page.

Adding and removing data types

Updates to data types will be published after you click Publish. If you select new data types, you’ll need to finish setting them up by responding to the questions in each data type section before publishing.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select App Privacy.
To update your data types, click Edit next to Data Types.
Update your selections for all of the data you or your third-party partners collect from this app.

If your app is currently available on the App Store, make sure your responses reflect the data collected only from that app version.

If you removed an existing data type, click Publish. Your responses to this data type will be removed from your app’s product page.
If you added a new data type, click Continue and complete setup for the newly added data type by clicking into the new data type and responding to questions that follow. Once you have completed responding to the questions, click Publish. Your responses to the newly added data type will appear on your app’s product page after publishing.
If you added a new data type and removed an existing data type, click Publish and Continue. Your responses to the removed data type will be removed from your app’s product page. You will need to complete setup for the newly added data type by clicking into the new data type and responding to questions that follow. Once you have completed responding to the questions, click Publish. Your responses to the newly added data type will reflect on your app’s product page after publishing.

Updating app privacy responses

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select App Privacy.
To edit existing responses, on the right, click on the data type you would like to update your responses for.
Update your responses and click Publish. Your updated responses will be published on your app’s product page after you click Publish.

You can preview how this information about your app’s data collection and usage will look on the App Store, below the Product Page Preview section. To view product page preview details, click See Details.

Entering privacy policy information

You can enter privacy policy and privacy user choices URLs for your iOS app and macOS app platform, and privacy policy text for your tvOS app platform in App Store Connect. A privacy policy is required for all apps and a user privacy choices URL is optional. The URLs for your iOS app and macOS app platform and the text for your tvOS app platform can be updated if your app is in an editable app status. View required, localizable, and editable properties.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select App Privacy.
Next to Privacy Policy, click Edit.
Enter in the privacy policy URL and optionally, the user privacy choices URL. If your app has a tvOS platform, enter the text of your privacy policy in the Apple TV Privacy Policy field.
Note: You can localize the privacy policy URLs and text in all of the languages your app is available in.
Click Save.

Any changes to the URLs will be released with your next app version.

Add export compliance information

Export compliance overview

If your app uses, accesses, contains, implements, or incorporates encryption, and you intend to upload, test, and distribute your app through the App Store, you’ll need to determine your export compliance requirements in App Store Connect.

Examples of apps requiring an export compliance determination include, but aren’t limited to, apps that use:

Standard encryption algorithms.
Crypto functionality within Apple’s operating system.
Proprietary or non-standard encryption algorithms. The U.S. Government defines "non-standard cryptography" as any implementation of "cryptography" involving the incorporation or use of proprietary or unpublished cryptographic functionality, including encryption algorithms or protocols that have not been adopted or approved by a duly recognized international standards body(e.g., IEEE, IETF, ISO, ITU, ETSI, 3GPP, TIA, and GSMA) and have not otherwise been published.

It’s your responsibility to review the Export Administration Regulation to determine if your app’s use of encryption requires a formal classification (Commodity Classification Automated Tracking System or CCATS) from BIS. All liabilities associated with misinterpretation of the export regulations or claiming exemption inaccurately are your responsibility. To learn more about encryption export controls, visit the U.S. Department of Commerce Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) website and search for encryption policy. The Government of France also controls the import and export of encryption apps distributed in France. The main items of control for France are Secure Storage, Secure Communications and Security Anti-Virus applications. Exemptions include Banking and Medical applications. For more information about these French controls, visit the Agence nationale de la sécurité des systèmes d’information (ANSSI) website.

When you submit a new version of your app, you’ll be required to answer questions in App Store Connect about your app's use of encryption. Follow the steps below before submitting your app to App Review to ensure that you’re submitting the right documentation and to bypass these questions if your app doesn’t use encryption.

Determine your export compliance requirements.

App Store Connect provides a simple way for you to determine your export compliance requirements by presenting you with a set of questions about your app and where you plan to make it available. Proceed based on the scenarios below:

Scenario	Next Steps
No export compliance documentation required	Update your app’s information property list (Info.plist) file in Xcode so that you don’t need to answer encryption questions with each app submission.
Export compliance documentation required	Use App Store Connect to submit your export compliance documentation. Once the documentation is approved, attach it to yourbeta build or App Store build. Update your app’s information property list (Info.plist) file in Xcode so that you don’t need to answer encryption questions with each app submission.

Determine your export compliance requirements

App Store Connect provides a set of questions to help you determine if export compliance documentation is required from you, and which forms are needed.

View export compliance documentation for encryption to understand what documentation you may need to provide.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
Click the Services tab, and in the sidebar, click Encryption.
Click the add button (+) and answer the questions that display in the dialogs.
Alternatively, you can click Manage next to the build that’s missing compliance information on the App Store tab or the TestFlight tab to answer the required questions.

If export compliance documentation is required, upload your file using the dialog. Once your documentation is approved, Apple will provide you with a key value to enter in Xcode.

If no documentation is required, update your app’s information property list(Info.plist) file in Xcode to let us know that your app doesn't use encryption or is exempt from providing documentation.

Upload export compliance documentation

If you are required to upload export compliance documentation, you can use the App Store Connect Encryption section to do so before you submit a build to App Review or TestFlight App Review. Before you provide this documentation, populate certain app information—app description and territories where you intend to distribute your app—in order to avoid delays in approving your documents. Without this information, Apple can’t determine whether the export compliance documents are sufficient.

To understand what documentation you may need to provide, view Export compliance documentation for encryption.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
Click the Services tab, and in the sidebar, click Encryption.
Click the add button (+) and answer the questions in the dialogs that display.
When prompted, Choose File to upload your document.
Click Save.

Apple evaluates export compliance reviews on a case-by-case basis. If complete information is provided, Apple expects to be able to review and clear apps in approximately two business days. Once your documentation is approved, Apple will provide you with a key value to enter in Xcode so you won’t need to answer encryption questions with each app submission. You can view this key value next to your approved documentation on the Encryption page in App Store Connect.

If you have specific questions about Apple's export process, contact us.

Create a new version

When you’re ready to distribute a new version of your app, you create a version using the same app record you created for the original version. The new version will be available free to customers who purchased a previous version. You can only create a new version if the current version status is Ready for Sale or Developer Removed from Sale.

Keep in mind that it's not possible to revert to a previous version on the App Store if you have an issue with your app. You must create and submit a new version.

Learn about creating a new version using App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the Add button (+) next to the desired platform.
In the New Version dialog, enter an incremental App Store version number, and click Create.
Review and enter metadata about the new version.
When you create a new version, the metadata from the current version is transferred to the new version automatically.
For a description of the version properties, go to Platform version information. For the required and localizable properties, refer to Required, localizable, and editable properties.
On the top right, click Save.
Upload your new build to App Store Connect.
In Xcode, increment the build string before you upload your build to App Store Connect, as described in Set the version number and build string.
When you are ready to submit your build, add it to your latest App Store version, then submit your app to app review.

Add a platform

You can add platforms to an app to create a universal purchase. For example, add the macOS and tvOS version of your app to an existing iOS app to distribute the iOS, macOS, and tvOS apps together.

Similar to creating a new version, the macOS app and tvOS app uses the same Apple ID (an app identifier), SKU, and bundle ID as the iOS app.

When adding macOS and tvOS platforms to an existing iOS app, you must upload the macOS and tvOS builds from a separate Xcode target. In the Xcode project set the bundle IDs to match the iOS app’s bundle ID. However, the macOS app and tvOS app may have different version numbers and build strings than the iOS.

Note: A watchOS app with an iOS companion app is already included in the same Xcode project as the iOS app, so you don't need to add it to a universal purchase. Learn how to add watchOS app information.

Watch-only apps cannot be part of universal purchase.

Learn about adding a platform using App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click either Add iOS App, Add tvOS App, or Add macOS App for the platform you wish to add.
A version for the platform appears selected in the sidebar with the version number 1.0. You can change the version number in the Version section under General App Information.
Review and enter metadata about the new platform version.
When you add a platform, metadata from the existing platform version is transferred to the new platform version, except for the promotional text, description, and screenshots.
For a description of the version properties, go to Platform version information. For the required and localizable properties, refer to Required, localizable, and editable properties.

The Account Holder or an Admin can delete a platform if a build has never been uploaded for the platform you want to delete and at least one existing platform version is in an editable app status. Hold the pointer over the platform you want to delete and click the delete button (–) that appears to the right of the platform.

Transfer an app

App transfer overview

You transfer an app when you’ve sold the app to another developer or you want to move it to another App Store Connect account or organization.

You can transfer the ownership of an app to another developer without removing the app from the App Store. The app retains its reviews and ratings during and after the transfer, and users continue to have access to future updates. Additionally, when an app is transferred, it maintains its Bundle ID — it's not possible to update the Bundle ID after a build has been uploaded for the app.

Step 1: Verify that the app can be transferred

The app must meet specific criteria to be transferable. For example, at least one version of the app must have been released to the App Store. For more criteria, visit App transfer criteria.

Step 2: Back up all app information

Because an app is removed from your account after an app transfer, you should back up all information about the app before you transfer it.

Step 3: Initiate the app transfer

The Account Holder user in your organization initiates the app transfer. Go to Initiate an app transfer.

Step 4: Accept the app transfer

The Account Holder in the recipient organization accepts the app transfer. Go to Accept an app transfer.

Apps using auto-renewable subscriptions

Apps that offer auto renewable subscriptions must use an app-specific shared secret.

Initiate an app transfer
Before initiating a transfer for an app that offers auto-renewable subscriptions, generate an app-specific shared secret. Then, share the code with the user of the developer account you are transferring the app to. After sharing the code, initiate the app transfer.
Accept an app transfer
Before you accept an app transfer for an app that offers auto-renewable subscriptions, obtain the app-specific shared secret from the initiator, so that you can update your servers to use the code to verify auto-renewable subscriptions. Once the app transfer is complete, generate an app-specific shared secret so that users outside of your organization no longer have access to it.

Apps using keychain sharing

Keychain sharing continues to work only until the app is updated. Therefore, the keychain needs to be rebuilt when submitting an update. If the keychain group is defined in the Xcode project, it must be replaced with a keychain group created by the recipient (that includes the recipient's Team ID) for the app to continue using keychain sharing. After users update their app, it will not find an authentication token in the keychain and will ask for a one-time re-login.

Apps using push notifications

Associated client SSL certificates, TLS certificates, and authentication tokens for push notifications aren’t transferred. If the app uses Apple Push Notifications service (APNs), the recipient needs to create a client SSL certificate using the recipient’s developer account to reenable it.

Apps using Apple Pay

If you transfer an app that uses Apple Pay, the merchant ID is not transferred along with the app. Transactions continue to be successful as long as the original certificates are valid. However, when you submit an update, a new merchant ID must be created on the recipient’s account.

Apps using Sign in with Apple

As part of preparing your data for the recipient before the transfer, you will need to generate a transfer identifier for each user in your database. You can do this via a REST service endpoint provided by Apple.

If you have grouped your apps for Sign in with Apple, you will need to ungroup them before initiating the transfer.

The Services ID associated with an app that has configured Sign in with Apple will also be transferred. If you don’t want the Service ID to be transferred, remove its association before initiating the transfer.

Apps created with Mac Catalyst

To transfer apps created with Mac Catalyst that don’t offer universal purchase, both the iPad app (primary app ID) and the Mac app (Mac Catalyst app ID) need to be transferred.

Initiate the transfer of your iPad app first, and then the associated Mac app. It’s important to transfer the Mac app as well, as the transfer recipient won’t be able to use Mac Catalyst to create a new Mac app based on the iPad app.

Apps Using Wallet

If your app distributes Wallet passes that require ongoing updates from your app or web service, the passes will eventually need to be reissued using a new identifier after transfer is complete so they can be signed with certificates issued from your Apple Developer account. To minimize user confusion and avoid interruption, we recommend providing a message in your app to let users know that their previously issued pass will become inactive and to download a new pass from your app or web service.

Learn about distributing, updating, and accepting passes.

Learn about best practices for setting alerts.

Apps Using iCloud

If your app uses any of the following, it will be transferred to the transfer recipient after they accept the app transfer.

iCloud to store user data
iCloud containers
KVS identifiers associated with the app

If multiple apps on your account share a CloudKit container, the transfer of one app will disable the other apps’ ability to read or store data using the transferred CloudKit container. Additionally, the transferor will no longer have access to user data for the transferred app via the iCloud dashboard. Any app updates will disable the app’s ability to read or store data using the transferred CloudKit container.

If your app uses iCloud Key-Value Storage (KVS), the full KVS value will be embedded in any new provisioning profiles you create for the transferred app. Update your entitlements plist with the full KVS value in your provisioning profile.

Learn about building apps using CloudKit.

Game apps

Apps that are part of a cross-app Multiplayer Compatibility Matrix are no longer compatible with or appear in the other app’s matrix.
Apps that are part of a Game Center group are removed from the group during the transfer. After the transfer, all leaderboards and achievements revert back to their original status. Leaderboards that were originally a group leaderboard retain the grp. prefix in their identifier.
Leaderboards that were originally single leaderboards but were merged into a group lose the grp. prefix. They also revert back to the original leaderboard IDs they had before the merge. Make sure you update the app build with the new leaderboard IDs so that scores are posted correctly.

App bundles

When you transfer an app that is part of an app bundle, you can no longer view your app bundle’s history. It is important to make a record of your app bundle information before you transfer the app.

What happens during and after an app transfer

After an app is transferred, its associated App ID is also transferred to the recipient’s developer account. If the transferor’s App ID was a wildcard App ID, it’s converted to an explicit App ID that exactly matches the app’s bundle ID.

The transferor is responsible for exchanging the actual code set and build assets directly with the recipient. Be sure to inform the recipient about any capabilities or App Store configuration added to the app, such as keychain sharing, Game Center, or push notifications, so these are maintained in future updates.

Keep in mind that regardless of app ownership status, new or additional promo codes do not become available after an app has been transferred. Only 100 promo codes can be generated per app version, and are valid for four weeks from the day they are generated.

Data for Sales and Trends and Payments and Financial Reports

If you transfer your app, you will continue to have access to information for payments and sales that occurred prior to the transfer. You will not be able to access information for sales after the transfer has been completed. The recipient of the transferred app will only receive payment and sales information for transactions that occurred after the transfer.

Data for App Analytics

When you transfer an app from your account to someone else, you will no longer have access to the app's data in App Analytics. You can find the historical data of the app in Sales and Trends. If someone transfers an app to you, you'll get access to all analytics data as of April 1, 2015, or since the app was first made available on the App Store, whichever occurred later.

App transfer criteria

The app must meet the following criteria to be transferable:

Both the transferor and recipient accounts can’t be in a pending or changing state, and the latest version of their paid and free agreements in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section must be accepted.
The App must have had at least one version that has been released to the App Store.
The app should have one of the following app statuses:
Ready for Sale
Prepare for Submission
Ready for Review
Developer Removed from Sale
Invalid Binary
Developer Rejected
Rejected
In-app purchase products can have one of the following statuses:
Approved
Ready to Submit
Developer Removed from Sale
Rejected
In-app purchase product IDs on the app can’t be the same as product IDs on any apps in the recipient’s account.
TestFlight beta testing should be turned off for all beta versions of the app. You must remove all builds and testers from the app you want transferred, remove all localizations, and clear each information field below Test Information.
All Xcode Cloud related data from the app you want transferred must be removed. Remove all Xcode Cloud data from Settings under the Xcode Cloud tab in App Store Connect.
Sandboxed Mac apps that share the Application Group Container Directory with other Mac apps cannot be transferred.

Initiate an app transfer

Before you begin, you’ll need the Apple ID for the Account Holder in the receiving organization and your app must meet the criteria for an app transfer.

Note: Because an app is removed from your account after an app transfer, you should back up all information about the app for your records. It’s a good idea to keep a record of your appʼs metadata and pricing, note dates the app was available on the App Store, and save sales and download information.

Required role: Account Holder. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click App Information under General in the sidebar and scroll to the Additional Information section.
Click Transfer App.
You may be prompted to enter a two-factor authentication verification code in order to proceed. Learn how to get a verification code.
If all criteria have been met, click Continue. Otherwise, click Cancel and resolve the issues.
For details on how to resolve common issues, view App transfer criteria.
Enter the Apple ID for the recipient’s Account Holder and Team ID for the account, and click Continue.
Read the terms, select “I have read and agree to the agreement presented above,” then click Request Transfer.
Click Done to return to the App Information page.

After you initiate the transfer, the app stays in its previous status, with the Pending App Transfer status added, until the recipient accepts it or the transfer expires after 60 days.

While the app is in the Pending App Transfer state, you (the transferor) can’t edit the app metadata, rights, pricing, and in-app purchases. Any open App Review communications are closed. If the app is part of a Game Center group, the recipient can’t make changes to the group.

The transferor and the recipient can cancel an app transfer in Agreements, Tax, and Banking while it is still in the Waiting for Recipient state. To cancel the transfer, the transferor must click Cancel Transfer next to the app in the App Transfers section of the Agreements tab.

Accept an app transfer

You must accept the transfer within 60 days of its initiation.

Required role: Account Holder. View role permissions.

Sign in to App Store Connect.
A notice indicates that an app is ready to be transferred.
Go to the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section of App Store Connect. An app transfer alert will display in the Agreements section.
Under App Transfers on the right, click Review.
Enter the new metadata:
- Support URL
- Marketing URL (required if the app previously had a marketing URL)
- Privacy policy URL (required if the app previously had a privacy policy URL)
- CCATS (a new CCATS form is required for apps that use export compliance)
- App Review contact information
- App Store contact information
In the User Access section, indicate whether you want to give all users on your App Store Connect team access to the app or limit access to just Admin and Finance roles. Once the transfer is complete, you can limit access to specific people.
In the App Privacy section, if the previous owner already disclosed what data the app collects and how it may be used, review the privacy details they entered by clicking View Existing Details. If you choose to delete the existing responses or if the previous owner of the app didn’t disclose what data the app collects and how it may be used, complete the App Privacy section before submitting a new app version.
Read the terms, select “I have read and agree to the agreement presented above,” then click Accept.

It can take up to two business days for the app transfer to complete, during which the app status is Processing App Transfer.

While the app is in this state, the transferor can’t edit the app metadata, rights, pricing, or in-app purchases. Any open App Review communications are closed. If the app is part of a Game Center group, you can’t make changes to the group.

When the transfer is complete, both Account Holders are notified and the app no longer appears in the transferor’s App Store Connect account.

You can cancel an app transfer in Agreements, Tax, and Banking while it's still in the Waiting for Recipient state. In the App Transfers section, click Review. Then, on the App Transfer page, click Decline. The transferor can also cancel the transfer.

Remove an app

To remove an app from your main view in My Apps, it must be first removed from the App Store and any associated in-app purchases must be removed from sale.

Additionally, you can only remove apps if all versions of that app are in one of the following states:

Prepare for Submission

Invalid Binary

Developer Rejected

Rejected

Metadata Rejected

Developer Removed from Sale

Removed from Sale

Apps can’t be removed if they are in an app bundle, currently available on the App Store, associated with in-app purchases available for sale, or if they're being actively transferred to another account.

If the app is part of an app bundle and hasn't been approved yet, it must be removed from the bundle before it can be removed from your main view in My Apps. App bundles cannot be removed.

WARNING: If you remove an app, you will lose ownership of the app name. Removed apps can only be restored if the name is not currently in use by another developer account. In addition, the SKU can’t be reused in the same organization and if you’ve uploaded a build, your bundle ID can’t be reused.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin. View role permissions.

Remove an app

From My Apps, select the app you want to remove. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
Click App Information under General in the sidebar.
Scroll to the Additional Information section, then click Remove App. The Remove App option is only available to Account Holders or Admins, and if an app is in a state which allows removal.
In the dialog that appears, click Remove.

Restore an app

From My Apps, click the arrow next to All Statuses in the upper right-hand corner.
From the menu, choose Removed Apps.
Select the app you want to restore.
Click App Information under General in the sidebar.
Scroll to the Additional Information section and click Restore App.
In the dialog that appears, choose Limited Access or Full Access. If you select Full Access, all users will have access to the app. Users with the Admin, Finance, and Access to Reports roles will always have access to all apps. Then click Restore.

If the app name is no longer available, the app cannot be restored. If you believe an app is preventing you from using your trademark as an app name on the App Store, you can submit a claim.

Edit an app's user access

You can limit app access to specific people within your App Store Connect account if they have the App Manager, Customer Support, Developer, Marketing, or Sales (without Access to Reports) roles.

Learn about managing app’s user access using App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
Click App Information under General in the sidebar, then scroll to the Additional Information section and click Edit User Access.
Choose Limited Access or Full Access. If you select Full Access, all users will have access to the app. Users with the Admin, Finance, and Access to Reports roles will always have access to all apps.
Select the users that should have access to the app, then click Save.

Add app icon, app previews, and screenshots

App Store icon, app preview, and screenshots overview

You can provide an App Store icon, three app previews, and 10 screenshots of your app for your App Store product page.

App Store icon

You can provide an App Store icon, which is used to represent your app in different sections of the App Store. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your App Store icon. For details, visit Add an App Store icon.

Screenshots and app previews

Use screenshots and app previews to visually communicate your app’s user experience through images or a short video captured from your app that will display on your App Store product page. You must upload at least one screenshot of your app, and uploading an app preview is optional. For marketing guidelines, visit Creating Your Product Page or Show More with App Previews.

There are two ways to upload your screenshots and app previews to the App Store. You can upload them on the platform section of your app’s page in App Store Connect, or you can use the App Store Connect REST API, which makes it easy to customize and automate your workflows.

For screenshot specifications, visit Screenshot specifications or App preview specifications.

App Preview requirements

You can upload app previews for macOS, iOS, and tvOS apps. To create and upload an app preview, you must have:

A Mac running macOS 10.10 or later, with Safari 8 or later
A video editor such as iMovie or Final Cut Pro X
A device running iOS 8 or later for the 5.5-Inch Display for iPhone and 12.9-Inch Display for iPad or an Apple TV

When you upload your app previews, keep this in mind:

App previews appear on the App Store before screenshots on Mac, iPhone, iPad, and Apple TV.
You set the app preview poster frame, which is the image that displays to customers on the App Store.
After you upload your app previews, they may take up to 24 hours to be processed.
App previews aren't available on the App Store for iMessage.
For iOS apps, you can upload app previews in Landscape or Portrait mode. When the customer plays the video, the app preview rotates to the original orientation. For macOS and tvOS apps, you can only provide app previews in landscape.

To create an app preview, visit Creating Videos for App Previews.

Add an App Store icon

You must provide an App Store icon, which is used to represent your app in different sections of the App Store. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your App Store icon.

To change your App Store icon after you published your app on the App Store, you must create and upload a new version and Submit for review.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. View role permissions.

Add an App Store icon in Xcode

To add your App Store icon to an asset catalog located in the Xcode project, visit Add an App Store icon in Xcode Help.
After you add icons in Xcode, upload the build to App Store Connect.

Upload app previews and screenshots

Upload up to three app previews and up to ten screenshots. If your app is the same across multiple device sizes and localizations, simply provide the highest resolution screenshots required. Screenshots and app previews can be uploaded only when the app status is editable.

For iPhone, screenshots for 6.5-inch iPhone Xs Max and 5.5-inch devices (iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8 Plus) are required. For iPad, screenshots for 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) are required.

If your app uses the Messages framework or WatchKit, additional screenshots are required. For macOS and tvOS apps, a separate set of screenshots is required.

Although you can rearrange screenshots and app previews when you edit the app record, app previews will always appear before the screenshots.

If your app doesn’t look or behave identically in all languages and on all supported devices, you can add screenshots or app previews for other device sizes and localizations. Whether you choose to use high-resolution assets to cascade down to smaller device sizes, or use an individual set of assets for every device size, you must use the same method for app previews and screenshots per localization. If the localized app preview is missing for metadata you’ve localized, the App Store uses the app preview you’ve provided in the next best available language.

Learn about uploading screenshots and app previews using the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.
Drag your screenshots and app preview in to the appropriate well.
Optionally, click View All Sizes in Media Manager to view the high-resolution screenshots scaled for the other device sizes.
If you don’t want to use the scaled screenshots or app previews, you can add screenshots for other device sizes using Media Manager.

After you submit your app for review and your app is approved, you need to create a new version to update screenshots.

Add screenshots and previews for other device sizes and localizations

If you don’t want to use scaled versions of your high-resolution screenshots or app previews for the other device sizes, you can add custom screenshots for the other device sizes and localizations using Media Manager.

Screenshots and app previews can be uploaded only when the app status is editable.

Learn about adding App Screenshots and App Previews using the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.
In the App Preview and Screenshots section, click View All Sizes in Media Manager.
On the top right, choose the language from the pop-up menu.
Click Edit for the device size where you wish to upload custom screenshots.
Drag the screenshots or app previews to the appropriate device size well.

Remove an app preview or screenshots

Screenshots and app previews can be removed only when the app status is editable.

Learn about deleting App Screenshots and App Previews using the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.
In the App Preview and Screenshots section, click View All Sizes in Media Manager.
Scroll to the device size where you want to delete the app preview or screenshots.
If you want to remove it for a specific localization, on the top right, choose the language from the pop-up menu.
Hold the pointer over the screenshot or app preview that you want to delete, and click on the Delete button (–).
Keep in mind that if a screenshot or app preview is used for other device sizes or localizations, it will be deleted in all places.

Set an app preview poster frame

An app preview poster frame can be edited only when the app status is editable.

Learn about modifying App Previews using the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.
In the App Preview and Screenshots section, click View All Sizes in Media Manager.
Scroll to the device size where you want to edit the app preview.
Hold the pointer over the app preview and click Edit Poster Frame.
Select the new poster frame or restore the default frame.
Use the playback controls to navigate to the frame of the video you want to use for your poster frame.
To select the currently displayed frame of the video as your poster frame, click Set Poster Frame.
To save the poster frame, click Done.

Manage builds

Uploading builds overview

After you add an app to your account, you can upload a build with one of several upload tools. You can upload more builds as your app changes, distribute a build for testing, or submit your app for review.

The first time you upload a build, a beta version of the app is created in your account. However, the build needs to be processed in Apple’s system before it appears in App Store Connect. You’ll receive an email when this process is complete.

Each time you upload a build, the bundle ID and version number (located in the app bundle) are used to associate the build with the app and version record in App Store Connect. The build string is used to uniquely identify the build throughout the system.

You can also create and upload your build with Xcode Cloud, which lets you adopt continuous integration and continuous delivery (CI/CD), a standard practice that helps you monitor and improve software quality over time while ensuring that your app or framework is always in a releasable state. For details, view Xcode Cloud documentation.

View builds and build metadata

You can view all the builds you upload for an app and metadata for each build, including the size of variants created by the App Store. Some builds may not appear after the app is released on the App Store.

Learn how to get build information with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. View role permissions.

View build metadata

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab to view all builds.
In the sidebar, select the platform you want to view build metadata for.
Note: Builds are organized by version number. View the builds you uploaded for each version by clicking the Versions tab and then the disclosure triangle next to the version number. To view build groups, click the Build Groups tab.
To view the build metadata, click the app icon or build string that appears in the Build column.
From the build page, click the Build Metadata tab.
The Build Metadata page shows the file sizes of a build, such as the compressed file size, essential content size, additional in-app content size, and other build-related information.

View the file sizes of a build

After you upload a build to App Store Connect, it goes through a process called app thinning, which creates variants of your app for different devices and operating system versions. You can view the size of the variants—the amount of space the app takes on the customer’s device—directly in App Store Connect.

Note: When your app is approved for the App Store, it’s encrypted with Digital Rights Management (DRM) and recompressed. App Store file size for your binary may be larger than it is for the binary you uploaded in App Store Connect. The exact final size for your app cannot be determined in advance.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab to view all builds.
In the sidebar, select the platform you want to view builds for.
On the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build you want to view.
From the build page, click the Build Metadata tab.
Below General Information, click App Store File Sizes.
A table appears showing the different variant sizes.
- The device type is the target device for the variant. Universal refers to the variant that runs on all supported operating systems and target devices that are delivered to customers running iOS 8 and earlier, apps purchased in volume through Apple School Manager and Apple Business Manager or through Mobile Device Management (MDM), or apps downloaded using iTunes 12.6 or earlier.
- The install size is the amount of disk space the app consumes on the customer’s device. The install size also appears on your app’s product page in the Information section.
- The download size is the compressed size of the app that is downloaded over the air, using cellular bandwidth or Wi-Fi.

If any of the device variant sizes exceed the 200 MB over-the-air download limit, a yellow warning appears next to the build string in the Builds table and next to the variant size in the App Store File Sizes table. Click the warning icon to read the full warning. Apple will also send you an email with this information.

View the device requirements for a build

The App Store uses your build settings to calculate the the minimum version of the operating system required for your app to run. You can verify a build’s device requirements on the Build Metadata page.

Device Requirements section in the Builds page

The Minimum iOS Version is the MinimumOSVersion provided in your build.
The Minimum macOS Version is the minimum version of macOS required for your app to run, as determined by the App Store.
The App Store automatically calculates the minimum macOS version using the LSMinimumSystemVersion provided in your build, if applicable, and the closest related macOS for the MinimumOSVersion provided in your build. If you’ve selected a minimum macOS version in Pricing and Availability and the value is higher than the LSMinimumSystemVersion or the closest related macOS for the MinimumOSVersion, this version will be shown instead.
The LS Minimum System Version is the optional LSMinimumSystemVersion provided in your build.

Download dSYM files

If you include bitcode when you upload your app to App Store Connect, the App Store generates dSYM files, which you’ll need to download in Xcode or App Store Connect before you can view logs in Xcode.

Learn how to analyze crash reports using dSYM files.

To download dSYM files for a build in App Store Connect:

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab to view all builds.
In the sidebar, select the platform you want to view build metadata for.
Note: Builds are organized by version number. View the builds you uploaded for each version by clicking the Versions tab and then the disclosure triangle next to the version number. To view build groups, click the Build Groups tab.
To view the build metadata, click the app icon or build string that appears in the Build column.
From the build page, click the Build Metadata tab.
Under General Information, click Download dSYM.

Choose the build before you submit to review

Before you submit an app to App Review, you choose which build (from all the builds you uploaded for a version) that you want to submit. You can associate only one build with an App Store version. However, you can change the build as often as you want until you submit the version to App Review.

Learn how to submit builds for review with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Add a build to a version

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.
On the right, scroll down to the Build section, then click the Add button (+) next to Build.
The add button (+) appears if you’ve uploaded builds and haven’t selected a build yet. If a different build is selected than the one you want to submit for review, remove the build.
In the Add Build dialog, select the build you want to submit.
If an earlier version of your app has the Ready for Sale status, then the list only includes builds you've uploaded since that version was released on the App Store. Learn how to view available builds.
Click Done.
In the Build section, the app icon, build string, and upload date and time appears.
On the top right, click Save.
Note: If you've selected a build with the Missing Compliance status, you’ll need to answer the export compliance questions before you can submit for review. Click Manage or Choose File next to the build and answer the questions, or follow the steps to upload export compliance documentation.

Remove a build from a version

Removing a build from an App Store version doesn’t remove the build from your account.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select.
On the right, scroll down to the Build section.
Hold the pointer over the build and click the Delete button (–) that appears to the right of the upload date.
On the top right, click Save.

Test a beta version

TestFlight beta testing overview (iOS, macOS, tvOS, watchOS)

TestFlight lets you distribute beta builds of your app to testers and collect feedback. You can enable TestFlight for up to 100 apps at a time in your App Store Connect account. Learn more.

Make improvements to your app and continue distributing builds until all issues are resolved before you submit your app to the App Store.

Note: Your macOS apps must be built with Xcode 13 or later to use TestFlight for Mac.

If your app includes an App Clip, you can invite testers to test the App Clip experience on its own. Testers who are invited to test your app can test both the app and the App Clip. Either the app or the App Clip can be installed on a device at a time, but testers can choose to switch between the two at any time.

Learn how to manage beta testing with the App Store Connect API.

Step 1: Enter your test information

Enter test information about your app, such as a description and feedback email. You will need this if you plan to distribute your build to external testers (persons outside your team).

Step 2: Upload your build

Upload your build to the App Store. Read Cryptography and U.S. Export Compliance to determine if you need to provide export compliance documentation for your app. After builds are uploaded, they are available for testing for 90 days.

Step 3: Invite internal and external testers

You can create groups for internal and external testers, then assign specific builds to them. After you've added builds to a group, you can add external testers (up to 10,000 people) and internal testers (up to 100 App Store Connect users with access to your content) to test your app. If you invite external testers, the build needs to be approved by TestFlight App Review before testing can begin. Learn more about internal and external testers.

Step 4: Testers download TestFlight and accept your invitations

Testers install the free TestFlight app on their devices. Then they use their invitation email or a public link to accept invitations, install your app, send feedback, and get updates. Testers download and install thinned variants of your app.

Step 5: View tester and build information

Track your tester engagement and your app’s performance by viewing build status and metrics in App Store Connect—such as numbers of sessions and crashes. You can also resend email invitations to testers who have not yet accepted their invitation.

Step 6: Collect feedback from testers

Testers running TestFlight for iOS, version 2.3 or later and iOS 13 or iPadOS 13 or later, can send feedback through the TestFlight app or directly from your beta app by taking a screenshot. This is also available in TestFlight for Mac. You can view this tester feedback in the Feedback section in App Store Connect. Testers running tvOS or earlier versions of iOS can send feedback to the email address you specified in step 1.

Step 7: Stop testing

When you are done testing, you can optionally expire a build to stop testing it, and then go to Overview of publishing an app for the process of submitting your app to the App Store. If you don’t expire your build and submit it to the App Store, testers that have received an invite to test will still be able to test your build even after it goes live on the App Store. Your build will become unavailable in TestFlight after 90 days.

Do I need to get approval to start testing beta builds?

To make your beta builds available to members of your App Store Connect team, your app doesn’t need review by TestFlight App Review. To make your beta builds available to external users, your beta build may require review. When you add the first build of your app to a group, the build gets sent to TestFlight App Review to make sure it follows the App Store Review Guidelines. A review is only required for the first build of a version and subsequent builds may not need a full review. Testing can begin once a build is approved.

Enter test information for external testing

If you distribute your app to external testers, you need to enter additional TestFlight test information about your app for TestFlight App Review. You can enter this information when you add your app to your account or before you invite external testers.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under General Information, click Test Information.
On the right, choose a language option and enter required test information.
The information you enter for your beta app can be different from the information you enter later when submitting your app to the App Store.
- In the Beta App Description text field, enter a description of your beta version.
- In the Feedback Email field, enter the email address that testers can use to contact you through the TestFlight app. This is also the reply-to address in email invitations to testers.
For descriptions of the TestFlight App Review Information properties, visit App Review information.

You can update this information anytime and the updates will display in the TestFlight app.

Test an App Clip experience

With App Clips, you can take a small part of your app and make it discoverable and quick to launch at the moment it’s needed. If your app contains an App Clip, you can add up to three invocation URLs to launch different experiences. Testers running TestFlight for iOS, version 2.7 or later, and iOS 14 beta or later can test and provide feedback on all available App Clip experiences. Testing of other invocation methods is not currently supported. Learn more about testing your App Clip’s launch experience.

Find out how to view tester feedback.

Learn how to manage App Clip experiences for testers with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Add an App Clip invocation

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, below Builds, click the iOS platform.
On the right, in the Builds column, click the app icon or build string for the build that has the App Clip you would like to test. The page opens with the Test Information tab selected.
Under App Clip Invocations, click App Clip Invocation.
In the dialog that appears, enter the title and URL for your App Clip invocation.
Note: You can localize the App Clip title for each URL based on the localizations you have added for your build in TestFlight, but the URL will be the same across localizations.
Click Add.
On the top right of the page, click Save.
Note: An App Clip experience can be launched and tested in TestFlight as long as an App Clip is added to the build, but if you want to provide defined experiences, you can add up to three invocation URLs.

Delete an App Clip invocation

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, below Builds, click the iOS platform.
On the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build that has the App Clip invocation you would like to delete. The page opens with Test Information tab selected.
Under App Clip Invocations, hold the pointer over the App Clip invocation and click the delete button (–) that appears to the right of the URL.
In the dialog that appears, click Delete.
On the top right of the page, click Save.

Manage testers

Add internal testers

Create a group and add up to 100 internal testers (App Store Connect users with access to your content) to test your app using TestFlight. You can choose to automatically distribute builds to internal groups or add them manually. Builds created by Xcode Cloud always need to be manually added to groups in App Store Connect.

Learn how to manage testers with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Create a group

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, click the Add button (+) next to Internal Testing.
In the dialog that appears, enter the name for a new internal group, then click Create. You can change the name later, if needed.

Select the “Enable automatic distribution” checkbox to allow Xcode to automatically deliver builds to everyone in the group. If automatic distribution is not enabled, all builds must be manually added to the group. Builds created by Xcode Cloud always need to be manually added to groups in App Store Connect.

Add internal testers to a group

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar next to Internal Testing, click the Add button (+).
Next to Testers, click the Add button (+).
Users that are eligible to be internal testers appear in a dialog. If a user you want to add doesn’t appear, change their user role.
Select the checkbox next to each user you want to invite, then click Add.

If you have builds available for testing, the users you select will receive an email inviting them to test the app. They’ll be directed to accept the invitation using the TestFlight app on their device or via a redemption code on Apple TV. Internal testers can download and test all builds for 90 days.

Add builds to a group

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, click the group you want to add a build to.
On the right, click the Add button (+) next to Builds.
Select the build you want to add to the group, then click Next.
Enter the What to Test information and optionally enter localized versions of test information in the fields under each language-specific section.
Note: This information will be available to testers in all groups that have access to the build.
Click Add.

If you have builds available for testing, the users you selected will receive an email inviting them to test the app. The users will be directed to accept the invitation using the TestFlight app on their device or via a redemption code. Internal testers will be able to download and test all builds for 90 days.

Invite external testers

You can invite up to 10,000 external testers (people who aren’t App Store Connect users with access to your content) per app to test your app using TestFlight once you’ve uploaded at least one build. To make your build available for external testing, create a group, add builds, and invite testers using their email address or by sharing a public invitation link.

Learn how to manage tester invitations with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Create a group

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, click the Add button (+) next to External Testing to add a new group.
In the dialog that appears, enter a group name, then click Create.
Later, you can change the name of the group if needed.

Add builds to a group

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under External Testing, select the group you want to add builds to.
On the right, click the Add button (+) next to Builds.
In the build dialog, select the platform and version from the pop-up menus.
From the table, select a build, then click Next.
Although you can add only one build at a time, you can add additional builds later.
Note: Enter test information such as Feedback Email and Contact Information if these details have not yet been provided in the Test information dialog.
In the What to Test dialog, enter what you want testers to focus on.
Optionally, enter localized versions of testing information in the text fields under each language-specific section.
Optionally, select “Automatically notify testers.”
If you leave this checkbox deselected, you will have to manually distribute the build to testers after it's approved by TestFlight App Review later.
Depending on the status of the build, click either Submit Review or Start Testing.
You can only have one build of each version in review at a time. Once that build is approved, you can submit additional builds.

After you submit your build to TestFlight App Review, Apple reviews the build and the accompanying metadata. The first build you submit requires a full review, but later builds for the same version may not.

If Apple approves your build for TestFlight beta testing, users on the App Store Connect account with the Admin role will receive an email notifying them of the approval.

If Apple rejects your build or metadata, the status of the build will be Rejected. You can click App Review from the sidebar under General to visit rejection details for your beta build.

Note: Submitting a build to TestFlight App Review doesn’t submit it to App Review for sale in the App Store.

Invite external testers

Once you have builds available to test, and you've added them to a group, you can invite testers.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Testers & Groups, select a group.
You can Invite testers using a public link, email, or both.

To invite testers using a public link:

1. Click Enable Public Link, and confirm in the dialog that appears.

Confirmation dialog for enabling public link

2. Under Tester Count, click Set Limit to limit the number of testers that can join this testing group using the public link. Enter a number between 1 and 10,000.

A dialog for setting the tester limit for the public link

3. Copy the link, and share it using social media, messages, email, or other channel.

Keep in mind that anyone can share this link, so testers may be able to join your testing group even if you don't invite them directly. If a tester joins your group using a public link, their name and email won’t be displayed in the Testers section in App Store Connect (it will display as anonymous), but their installation date, sessions, and crashes will be displayed. You can disable the public link at any time.

To invite testers using their email address:

1. Click the Add button (+) next to Testers.

2. In the pop-up menu that appears, choose an option. You can add new testers using their emails address, existing testers you've previously added, or import testers from a CSV file.

3. Testers you invite will get an invitation email to start testing. If a tester accepts an email invitation, their name, email address, installation date, sessions, and crashes, will display in the Testers section in App Store Connect.

Notify external testers after your build is approved

If you didn’t select “Automatically notify testers” when you added your build to your group, you must manually notify testers when your build is approved.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform for your app (iOS or tvOS).
Choose a version, then under Status, click Notify Testers for the build row.

The build status changes to Testing. The external testers will receive a notification directing them to accept the invitation using the TestFlight app on their device.

Remove a build from a group

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Testers &Groups, select a group.
On the right, under Builds, hold the pointer over the build you want to remove.
Click the delete button.
In the dialog that appears, confirm you want to remove the build from the group and click Remove.

If you want to remove a build from testing for all your testers, go to Stop testing a build.

How do I appeal if my beta build was rejected?

To appeal your beta build being rejected, contact TestFlight App Review.

View tester information

If you use TestFlight, you can view information about testers and measure tester engagement.

Learn how to get tester information with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under General Information, click All Testers.

In the Status column, view the status of testers. If a user was invited with an invitation email, their name and email address will display. If a user was invited with a public link, they will display as anonymous.

The possible statuses are:

Status				Description
Invited				The invite was sent to the tester.
Accepted				The tester accepted the invite. (You can resend email invites to testers who have not yet accepted.)
Installed				The tester downloaded the build.
Deleted				The tester has been deleted.

In the Sessions column, view the number of times the app has been in the foreground for at least two seconds.
If the app is in the background and is later used again, that counts as another session.
In the Crashes column, view the number of crashes for each build.
To view crash reports for TestFlight builds in the Crashes organizer in Xcode, click Open in Xcode next to each piece of crash feedback on the Crash Feedback page on the TestFlight tab.
You can also download a CSV by clicking on the download button from the top right of the page, which includes your tester’s first name, last name, and email address. Data points such as Status, Sessions, and Crashes aren't included.
Additionally, testers invited with a public link aren't included in the CSV since their first name, last name, and email address is anonymized.

Remove or delete testers

Remove testers from a group

Learn how to manage testers with the App Store Connect API.

Internal Testers

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Internal Testing, select a group.
On the right, above the table of testers, click Edit.
Select the testers you want to remove, then click Remove.
In the dialog that appears, click Remove.

Removed testers no longer have access to builds in the TestFlight app.

External Testers

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under External Testing, select a group.
Note: If you have testers that were added by both email and public link, first select the invitation type you would like to remove testers from.
On the right, above the table of testers, click Edit.
Select the testers you want to remove, then click Remove.
In the dialog that appears, choose to remove testers from the group.
Click Remove from Group.

Delete testers from TestFlight

Testers deleted from TestFight no longer have access to your app in TestFlight.

Learn how to manage testers with the App Store Connect API.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under General Information, click All Testers.
On the right, above the table of testers, click Edit.
Select the testers you want to delete, then click Delete.
In the dialog that appears, select “Delete this tester from this app” and click Delete.
Note: If a tester has a build installed, they will have access to the build until it expires.

You can view all deleted testers by using the Deleted Testers filter from the All Testers menu above the table of testers.

Manage beta builds

Add testers to builds

Learn how to add testers to builds with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Add a group to a build

You'll need to create a group before adding it to a build. All testers in the group will have access to the build.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform.
On the right, select a build by clicking the app icon or build string for the build from either the Versions or Build Groups tab.
Next to Groups, click the add button (+).
Select the group you want to add to the build, then click Add.
You will not be able to select a group to which the build was already added.
You can also quickly add a tester group to a build directly in the Versions or Build Groups tab. In the Groups column next to the build, click the add button (+), then select a group from the list of eligible groups.

Add individuals to a build

You can add individual internal or external testers to a build.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform.
On the right, select a build by clicking the app icon or build string for the build from either the Versions or Build Groups tab.
Next to Individual Testers, click the Add button (+) and choose an option from the pop-up menu.
You can add new testers, existing testers, or import testers from a CSV file.
Enter the required information for a tester, then click either Add or Invite.

Remove tester groups or individuals from a build

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform.
On the right, select a build by clicking the app icon or build string for the build from either the Versions or Build Groups tab.
Under either Groups or Individual Testers, hold the pointer over the group or individual tester you want to remove, then click the Delete button (–) that appears to the right of the table.
In the dialog that appears, click Remove.
All eligible builds are automatically available to users in the App Store Connect Users group. Learn how to remove testers from a group.
You can also quickly remove a tester group from a build directly from the builds table. Click the Add button (+) under the Groups column next to the build to view the drop down list of groups. Click the group you’d like to remove. In the dialog that appears, click Remove.

Test iPhone and iPad apps on Macs with Apple silicon

Using TestFlight, you can test iPhone and iPad apps on Macs with Apple silicon. This is set at the group level and will apply to all builds within the tester group.

To enable testing for a tester group:

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, select the group you want to enable for testing.
Under Test iPhone and iPad apps on Macs with Apple silicon, click Enable.
Minimum macOS version compatibility is set in the Apple Silicon Mac Availability section in Pricing and Availability or the LSMinimumSystemVersion key in your build if you have opted out of making your app available on the Mac App Store.

View build status and metrics

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, under Builds, click the platform.
In the table on the right, view the build status and metrics for versions and build groups.
In the Status column, view the status of a build and in the Groups column, view the tester groups that are testing the build. In the other columns, view the number of invited testers, number of installations on devices, and the total number of sessions in the last seven days across all testers. In the Crashes column, view the number of times the build crashed on tester devices. In the Feedback column, for iOS builds, view the number of feedback submissions you received from your testers.

TestFlight testers automatically share crash logs with developers. To view crash reports directly in Xcode for apps distributed using TestFlight, click Open in Xcode 13 next to each piece of crash feedback on the Crash Feedback page on the TestFlight tab.

View tester feedback

Feedback submitted by testers running TestFlight 2.3 or later on iOS 13 or iPadOS 13 or later appears in App Store Connect. This includes screenshots, comments related to crashes, and general comments.

App Clip experience feedback can be submitted by testers running iOS 14 or iPadOS 14 or later.

Testers running TestFlight 2.2.1 or earlier on iOS 12.4 or earlier can send feedback to the email address you specify in the Feedback Email field in Test Information.

Note: If a tester was invited with an invitation email, their email address displays in the detailed feedback view. If a tester was invited with a public link, they display as anonymous, unless they entered their email address when submitting feedback. The email address only displays for that particular piece of feedback. Learn more about the detailed feedback view.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

View feedback

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar below Feedback, click Screenshots. Screenshots and comments submitted by testers appear.
Click Add Filter to filter your view by platform, app version, build group, build, OS version, or device.
Click the feedback to view the full screenshot and written comments from testers. Tester, app, and device information is also available in the detailed feedback view. Learn more about tester feedback
Note: Click Open in Xcode from the detailed feedback view to view screenshot feedback in Xcode.
In the top-right, click the download icon to download the feedback as a .zip file. This file includes the screenshot and associated comments.

View crash feedback

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, below Feedback, click Crashes. The table on the right shows when feedback was submitted and other crash details.
Click Add Filter to filter your view by platform, app version, build group, build, OS version, or device.
Click the feedback to read written comments from testers. Tester, app, and device information is also available in the detailed feedback view. Learn more about tester feedback.
Note: Click Open in Xcode next to the feedback to view crash reports in Xcode.
In the top-right, click the download icon to download the feedback as a .zip file. This file includes the crash report and associated comments.
Note: Crash reports are available for download for 120 days.

Delete feedback

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, below Feedback, click Crashes or Screenshots.
Then, click on the feedback you want to delete.
From the detailed feedback view, click Delete.
In the dialog that appears, click Delete Feedback.

You can also delete the tester that submitted the feedback by clicking Delete Tester & Feedback. The tester will be removed from TestFlight. Removed testers may be re-invited to test your app.

Disable Feedback

You can disable the ability for tester groups to take a screenshot and submit feedback from your beta app and provide additional details about a crash. If you decide you want to receive feedback directly from your beta app and feedback related to a crash again, you can re-enable it. All testers will still be able to send email feedback from the TestFlight app.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, below Testers & Groups, select a tester group.
Under Tester Feedback, click Disable.
In the dialog that appears, select Disable.
To enable feedback, click Enable below Tester Feedback. In the dialog that appears, select Enable.

Why is one of my testers unable to submit feedback through my beta app even though they are part of a group that feedback is enabled for?

If a tester is a part of multiple groups, and one of the groups has feedback disabled, they will only be able to submit email feedback from the TestFlight app.

Provide export compliance for beta builds

If you haven’t specified your use of encryption for a build, the status of the beta build is Missing Compliance. You can answer the required export compliance questions or attach previously approved documentation in the TestFlight section.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, below Builds, click the platform.
In the Build column in the table on the right, click the app icon or build string for the build that’s missing compliance information.
Alternatively, you can click Manage next to the build that’s missing compliance to answer the required questions, or click Choose File to provide previously approved documentation.
Click Provide Export Compliance Information, and answer the required questions.
If export compliance documentation is required, click Go to Encryption Page to upload your file. Once your documentation is approved, Apple will provide you with a key value to enter in Xcode so you won’t need to answer encryption questions with each app submission. Learn more about uploading export compliance documentation.
If documentation isn’t required, click Save. You can specify your use of encryption directly in the app's Info.plist file in Xcode to let us know that your app doesn’t use encryption or is exempt from providing documentation, and you won’t need to answer encryption questions with each app submission.

Stop testing a build

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the TestFlight tab.
In the sidebar, below Builds, click the platform.
In the table on the right, in the Build column, click the app icon or build string for the build that is missing compliance information.
Click Expire Build.

Internal testers and external testers will no longer be able to install this build.

Publish on the App Store

Overview of publishing an app

This is the general workflow for publishing an app to the App Store.

Step 1: Choose your build

Each app can have multiple versions, and each version can have multiple builds. To publish your app on the App Store, choose which build to submit to review.

Step 2: Set pricing and availability

You must set a price and set a tax category for your app. Although your app is available in all App Stores and localizations by default, you can select specific regions for your app instead. You also have the option to publish your app as a pre-order.

Step 3: Submit your app for review

You submit your app for review to start the App Review process and to make your app available on the App Store. Before you submit an app, enter all the required metadata and choose if you want to release your app manually or automatically, or if you want to release your app in phases.

Step 5: Request promo codes

After your app is approved, you can request promo codes to distribute to users before you make your app available on the App Store. You can distribute the promo codes by email or other means, and the user enters the promo code when purchasing the app.

Step 4: View your app status and resolve review issues

After you submit the app, the app status changes to Waiting for Review. If there are any issues with your app, read and reply to App Review communications. After your app is approved, it can take up to 24 hours to go live on the App Store.

Set pricing and availability

Set a price for your app

Before you submit your app for review, you must set a price for your app, which will be used for all App Store territories. If you don’t have a Paid Applications Agreement, you can only choose a free price.

Note: You can change the pricing for your app at any time.

If you haven’t accepted the Paid Applications Agreement, you can only offer your app for free.

Learn how to set a price for your app with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
Under Price Schedule, choose a price from the menu.
To see the equivalent price in all territories, click Other Currencies.
On the top right, click Save.

What currency is used for a given territory?

Refer to Exhibit C of the Paid Applications Agreement to view the currency used by each App Store territory.

Publish your app for pre-order

Before releasing your app on the App Store for the first time, you can choose to offer it for pre-order. Customers can view your product page and order your app before it's released for download. Once your app is released, customers are notified and your app automatically download on the device on which they made the pre-order. It will also download on their other devices if they turned on automatic downloads . For paid apps, customers are charged before download.

Free and paid apps on all Apple platforms are eligible to use this feature. In-app purchases aren’t eligible for pre-order, but you can set up your in-app purchases, including promotional metadata, in App Store Connect before and during the pre-order period so that everything is ready once your app is released for download. Promoted in-app purchases don’t display on your App Store product page until your app is released for download.

To make your app available for pre-order, select the appropriate setting and submit your app, build, and metadata to App Review. After your app is approved, you can publish it as a pre-order on the App Store in all territories where your app is available.

While your app is available for pre-order, you can update your app by creating and submitting a new version. The new version must be approved before it can be published for pre-order on the App Store, so be sure to follow the App Review Guidelines. If you submit a version update during the pre-order period, customers will receive the latest version published to the App Store once your app is released for download.

You may also adjust the price of your app during the pre-order period, but keep in mind that if you change pricing, customers will be charged the price that is lower — either the price they accepted for pre-order or the price on the day of release.

Keep in mind that app bundles cannot be made available for pre-order and cannot include apps that are available for pre-order. Apps that are offered for pre-order will not be made available in new app bundles.

Learn how to manage pre-orders with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Publish your app as a pre-order

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
If your app has never been published on the App Store, a Pre-Orders section displays.
Select Make available for pre-order, choose a date to release your app for download, then click Save on the top right.
The release date must be at least two days in the future, but no more than 180 days in the future.
Making your app available for pre-order removes other Version Release options from the platform version information page.
Submit for review.
Once your app is approved and you're ready to make it available for pre-order, return to Pricing and Availability. Confirm the date your app will be released for download, and click Release as Pre-Order on the top right.
You may edit the release date during the pre-order period, but it must be within 180 days from when the app was first available for pre-order on the App Store.

Release your app to customers immediately

While your app is available for pre-order, you have the option to release your app to customers immediately.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
On the top right, click Release App Now.
In the dialog that appears, select Release.
Your app will be released to the App Store. Customers who pre-ordered your app will be notified and your app will automatically download to their device. For paid apps, customers will be charged before download.

Remove your pre-order offer from the App Store

Select “Remove from Sale” in the Pricing and Availability section, then click Save. Learn about removing an app from the App Store.

If you remove your pre-order offer from the App Store, customers who already pre-ordered your app won’t receive the app and won’t be charged unless you make it available for pre-order again before the release date. Additionally, once the release date passes, you will no longer be able to republish your app as a pre-order.

Schedule price changes

If you’ve accepted the Paid Applications Agreement and your app has been submitted for review, you can schedule price changes for your app. Price changes can have a definite start and end date, or they can be as permanent pricing changes with no end. For example, you can set a promotional price for a month, then return to the regular price.

You can also schedule price changes for in-app purchases. For details, visit Manage in-app purchase pricing and Manage pricing for auto-renewable subscriptions.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
On the right, the Price Schedule appears showing the price, start date, and end date for each price change.
Click the add button (+) next to Price Schedule.
In the dialog that appears, choose a price tier from the Price pop-up menu.
Then select a Start Date and End Date.
The start date can’t be more than a year from the current date. The default start date is the current date, and the default end date is No End Date (meaning the price remains the same indefinitely).
Click Done, then on the top right, click Save.

Select regions for your app

By default, all locations are selected, making your app available on the App Store around the world. You can deselect regions where you don’t want your app for sale and select regions again at any time. Changes will appear on the App Store within 24 hours.

Note: A customer’s Apple ID country or region setting determines which storefront they can purchase apps from on the App Store. For example, an Apple ID set to Japan can purchase apps from the App Store in Japan.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
You must set a price for your app before you can edit countries or regions.
Under Availability, click Edit.
In the dialog that appears, select the countries or regions where you want to make your app available.
- Select all countries or regions: Select All.
- Select specific countries or regions: Select the checkbox next to the countries or regions you want to include and deselect the checkbox next to the countries or regions you want to exclude.
  Note: Users who previously downloaded your app will continue to receive app updates, even if you remove their country or region.
- Add new App Store countries or regions automatically: In the upper-left corner, select the New Countries or Regions checkbox.
Click Done at the bottom of the dialog, then click Save on the top right.

Set a tax category

To calculate tax on customer transactions in the territories where we administer tax, Apple’s tax calculation service uses multiple inputs, including your tax category selection in App Store Connect, app metadata, legal entity status, tax registration status, customer attributes, and other requirements in accordance with the local laws and regulations. Set the category that best describes each app. While this category will apply to in-app purchases by default, you can also set a category for each in-app purchase. Changes to tax category settings affect future transactions.

If you choose not to make any changes, your apps and in-app purchases will be assigned the App Store software category. You can make adjustments to these settings at any time as the characterization of your app or in-app purchases change or as tax legislation changes. Make sure that the tax category settings you choose accurately represent your app’s offerings. Selecting categories or attributes that aren't appropriate for your app or in-app purchases violates your obligations under the Apple Developer Program License Agreement, the Paid Agreements, and local tax laws.

Your tax category selections may result in changes to your proceeds, as proceeds are calculated based on the price of your app or in-app purchase, minus any applicable taxes. To view your estimated proceeds at each price tier, click All Prices and Currencies from Pricing and Availability.

Note: It may take up to an hour for changes to be reflected.

Compare the categories below to determine which best describes your app. For guidance on setting the appropriate tax category, consult your tax advisor.

Category	Description
App Store software	If the primary purpose of your app is not described by any of the categories below, keep your tax category set to App Store software.
Artwork	Apps that sell digital artwork, including original or manipulated graphics, fonts, and images. If your app provides tools to create or edit artwork, keep your tax category set to "App Store software.” If your app sells photographic images, select the "Photography" category.
Audiobooks	Apps that allow users to listen to audio versions of books. If your app contains episodic series of audio content, select the "Music and other audio" category.
Books	Apps that sell electronic versions of printed books, or digital-only content that is published once, under a single title. For content published regularly, consider the "Magazines and other periodicals" category, or the "News publications" category.
Cloud media player	Apps that stream audio or visual content through the cloud.
Cloud storage	Apps that store data in remote servers that can be accessed through the cloud.
Dating	Apps that facilitate forming new interpersonal relationships by means of text, voice, photo, or video sharing.
Fitness and health	Apps that provide on-demand or live streaming of fitness classes. For other apps focused on healthy living, select the "App Store software" category.
Games	Apps that provide single or multiplayer interactive activities for entertainment purposes.
Greeting cards	Apps that create and send electronic versions of a decorative card to express good wishes for an occasion.
Magazines and other periodicals	Apps that deliver content using an issue-based strategy or are producing interactive versions of a printed periodical. If your app contains news content, consider the selecting the "News publications" category.
Music and other audio	Apps that are for listening to audio content, including music, podcasts, meditations, radio, and ringtones.
News publications	Apps that provide information about current events with regular content updates. May be a digital-first, or interactive version of a printed newspaper. If your app focuses on content about one sector, consider the "Magazines and other periodicals" category.
Photography	Apps that sell photos or assist in capturing, editing, managing, or sharing photos.
Software training material	Apps that deliver trainings on specific off-the-shelf software.
Video	Apps that stream video content. May be accessed through a subscription, pay-per-view, or purchase for permanent consumption.

Required role: Admin or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
Next to Tax Category, click Edit.
In the dialog that appears, select the tax category that best describes your app.
Depending on your selection, you may be asked to describe your app further by selecting a subcategory and/or attributes.
Click Done.

Manage availability of iPhone and iPad apps on Macs with Apple silicon

iPhone and iPad apps will be made available on the Mac App Store to users running macOS 11 or later on Macs with Apple silicon, unless you edit your apps’ availability. These apps will run natively and use the same frameworks, resources, and runtime environment as they do on iOS and iPadOS.

If your iOS app offers universal purchase and has an existing macOS platform, the option to offer the iOS app on the Mac App Store will not be available. Additionally, if your iOS app is available on the Mac App Store by using this option and you later add a macOS app by adding the macOS platform in App Store Connect, releasing it to the store will replace the iOS app on the Mac App Store. All existing users for the iOS app will be updated to the macOS app.

You can opt in and out from having your iPhone and iPad apps available on the Mac App Store for users running macOS 11 or later on Macs with Apple silicon at any point. This is set at the app level and will apply to all versions of your app.

Apple automatically chooses the minimum macOS version required for compatibility, but you can select a different version when editing availability on an individual app basis. If an LSMinimumSystemVersion is set in your app, this selection will override it.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Edit availability on an individual app basis

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
On the right, the iPhone and iPad Apps on Apple Silicon Mac section appears.
Under Apple Silicon Mac Availability, deselect “Make this app available” to opt out of offering your app on the Mac App Store. Select the checkbox if you want the app to be available on the Mac App Store.
You can change the minimum macOS version required for compatibility in the menu. This selection also applies to tester groups enabled for testing iPhone and iPad apps on Macs with Apple silicon with TestFlight.
On the top right, click Save.

Edit availability for multiple apps at a time

From My Apps, select iPhone and iPad App on Apple Silicon Mac Availability from the the ellipsis menu (…) in the top left.
In the dialog that appears, deselect the iPhone and iPad apps you do not want to make available on the Mac App Store.
Click Done.
To opt out of offering any of your iPhone and iPad apps on the Mac App Store for users running macOS 11 or later on Macs with Apple silicon, click Don’t Make Available.

Verify your app’s compatibility with Macs with Apple silicon

If your iPhone and iPad apps are compatible with Macs with Apple silicon and function as intended, you can verify them in App Store Connect to let users know they’ll receive a great experience on macOS. After your app has been verified, this option will no longer be available in App Store Connect.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
On the right, the iPhone and iPad Apps on Apple Silicon Mac section appears.
Under Compatibility with Apple Silicon Mac, click Verify.
In the dialog that appears, click Verify.
Note: At the bottom of the Compatibility with Apple Silicon Mac section, it's indicated whether your current and upcoming app versions launch on Macs with Apple silicon.

Set your app’s distribution methods

There are two options for setting your app’s distribution methods in App Store Connect:

Public: Your app will be publicly available on the App Store in the territories you selected and available to anyone for volume purchase through Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager.

If you’re offering an unlisted app, choose this option before requesting the direct link to your app. If it’s approved, the distribution method will change to Unlisted. If it’s not approved, you can keep the distribution method as Public or change it to Private before submitting your app.

Private: Your app will be available only to specific businesses and organizations you specify in App Store Connect through Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager. In-app purchases for custom apps aren't supported.

Note: Once your app is approved, the distribution method cannot be changed. To switch from private to public, or vice versa, you’ll need to create a new app record and resubmit your binary.

Make your app available publicly on the App Store and for volume purchase.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin or App Manager. View role permissions.

All apps listed on the App Store are automatically available for volume purchase for the same price in Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager, which is where businesses and educational institutions download apps for volume distribution.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
Under App Distribution Methods, select Public.
If you'd like to offer educational institutions a discount, check the box next to “Offer a reduced price on Apple School Manager for volume purchases.” Your app will be available for 50% of its listed price for educational institutions purchasing quantities of 20 or more.
On the top right, click Save.
Once your app is approved, it will be available on the App Store in the territories you selected, and in the Apps and Books section of Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager.

Make an app available only to specific businesses or organizations

Required role: Account Holder, Admin or App Manager. View role permissions.

If you don’t want individual users to be able to download your app from the App Store, you can restrict the availability of your app to only specific business or organizations. This includes the ability to distribute proprietary apps for internal use within your organization.

You can specify one or more organizations that can view and download the app in Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager. They can then distribute it through Mobile Device Management or redemption codes.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
Under App Distribution Methods, select Private.
Under Type, choose either Organization ID or Apple ID, and enter the required information. Enter the Organization ID to make the app visible in the organization's Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager account. For businesses still using the legacy Volume Purchase Program, you can assign an app to their volume purchasing Apple ID.
On the top right, click Save.

Make your app available only through a direct link

Required role: Account Holder. View role permissions.

Apps that aren’t suited for public distribution can be made discoverable as unlisted on the App Store with a direct link that anyone can use. Unlisted apps don’t appear in any App Store categories, recommendations, charts, search results, or other listings. The direct link can also be used in Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
Under App Distribution methods, make sure your app’s availability is set to Public. If your app was already approved for private download on Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager, you’ll need to create a new app record in App Store Connect, upload your binary, and set the distribution method to Public before completing the next step.
Submit a request to receive an unlisted link. If your request is approved, your app’s distribution method will change to Unlisted in the Pricing and Availability section of the app information page. Future versions of your app will remain unlisted.
Submit your app for review, if you haven’t already.

I currently have an app that is available privately in Apple Business Manager and I’d like to make it available publicly on the App Store, can I change my app’s distribution method?

No. To change your app’s distribution method from public to private, or vice versa, please create a new app and submit it for review.

Where can users download my app in volume?

Downloading apps in volume requires either an Apple School Manager or Apple Business Manager account. Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager are available in many countries and regions.

Set version release options

Select a version release option

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version you want to set a release option for.
In the Version Release section, select a release option:
- Release the app yourself: Select “Manually release this version.” (Later, manually release the version.)
- Automatically release the app after approval: Select “Automatically release this version.”
- Automatically release the app but no earlier than a specified date: Select “Automatically release this version after App Review, no earlier than” and below this option, enter a date and time.
On the top right of the page, click Save.

Manually release a version

If you choose to manually release a version when you submit your app for review, you can release the version after it’s approved and the status changes to Pending Developer Release. If you have an app in the Pending Developer Release state for longer than 30 days, you’ll receive an email reminder from Apple.

Learn how to manually release a version with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the app version that is Pending Developer Release.
On the top right, click Release This Version.

After manually releasing your app version, allow up to 24 hours for the app to appear on the App Store. Alternatively, if you want to cancel the release, click Cancel This Release in the message that appears on the version page.

Release a version update in phases

When you release a version update of your app, you can choose to release your apps in stages. This option is available if you are submitting a version update and your app has one of the following app statuses.

Prepare for Submission
Waiting for Review
In Review
Waiting for Export Compliance
Pending Developer Release
Developer Rejected
Rejected
Metadata Rejected

If you choose this option, your version update will be released over a 7-day period to a percentage of your users (selected at random by their Apple ID) on iOS or macOS with automatic updates turned on. Users aren’t notified that they're in a phased release of your app.

Day of Phased Release	Percentage of Users
1	1%
2	2%
3	5%
4	10%
5	20%
6	50%
7	100%

Keep in mind that apps and app updates in phased release can be manually downloaded from the App Store by anyone at any time.

While your app is in phased release, you can choose to pause the release for a total of 30 days. There’s no limit to the number of pauses. If you remove your app from sale, phased release will stop and won’t be available for that version again.

Learn how to manage phased releases with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Release a version update in phases

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version you want to submit.
On the right, scroll down to the Phased Release for Automatic Updates section, select Release update over a 7-day period using phased release.
Click save.

When you submit your app for review and it's approved, the app status will be Ready for Sale, and will be appended with “Phased Release” next to the status when viewing your app's version page.

When the update completes, all users with the Admin or App Manager roles(who have access to this app) will be notified when the phased release is complete.

Pause and resume a phased release

If you find an issue with your version update, you can pause your phased release at any time, for up to 30 days total.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the Ready for Sale app version.
In the Phased Release for Automatic Updates section, select Pause Phased Release or Use Phased Release to resume the update.
Click Save.

You can pause your release for a total of 30 days. For example, if you pause your release for 10 days, and then resume, you will have 20 days left to pause the release a second time. If you resume a release that was previously paused, your phased release will pick up on the day it was left off when it was paused.

Release a version update to all users

If you opted to release your app in phases, you can choose to release your app to all users at any time once your app has the Ready for Sale status. When you select this option, all users whose devices have automatic updates turned on will get the latest app version supported on the user’s device.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version that you've submitted.
On the top right of the page, click Release to All Users.

Submit to App Review

Submit for review

Submitting your app to App Review starts the process for releasing it on the App Store.

Before submitting, you’ll need to provide required metadata and choose the build for the version.

Builds for each platform can be submitted separately and the status of one platform’s build doesn’t affect the others.

The App Review section in the sidebar is where you manage your submissions and messages with App Review. There are four content types that may display in this section:

App Store Submission: App versions and/or in-app events that you’ve submitted to App Review and any related messages from App Review. You can have one In Progress submission at a time per platform. In-app event submissions are associated with the iOS platform.
Beta Build: Beta builds that you’ve submitted to App Review that weren’t accepted and any related messages from App Review.
App Review Message: Other messages from App Review that aren’t related to a submission.
Submission Message: Messages from App Review related to a submission that was sent before the updated submission experience was enabled.

Learn how to submit versions of your app to review with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Submit an app

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, click the app version you want to submit.
On the right, scroll down to the Build section and verify that you set the build for the version to the correct build.
In the upper-right, click Add for Review. The app status changes to Ready for Review.
You can continue adding items, such as in-app events, to the submission. View the items that you’ve added to review from the App Review section in the sidebar.
Note: All items submitted together must be marked as Accepted before the submission can be approved.
Click Submit to App Review.

After you submit, the app status changes to Waiting for Review. When the review process starts, the app status changes to In Review. For information about tasks you can do in these states, view App and submission statuses.

Remove a submission from review

You can remove an app from the review and release process if the app is in one of the following states:

Waiting for Export Compliance
Waiting for Review
In Review
Pending Developer Release
Pending Apple Release

Learn how to remove a submission from review with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Remove an app from the review and release process

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, click the app version that you want to remove a build for.
In the message that appears at the top, click “remove this version from review.”
In the dialog that appears, click Remove.

The app is removed from the queue and the app status changes to Developer Rejected. If you resubmit the review process will start over.

Cancel a submission

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, click App Review.
Under In Progress, click View next to the submission.
At the bottom of the page, click Cancel Submission.
Click Confirm.

The submission will be canceled and any items that were marked as Accepted will need to be resubmitted. If the submission included an app version, the app status will change to Developer Rejected. If you resubmit, the review process will start over.

Resolve app rejection issues

Reply to App Review messages

If App Review or TestFlight App Review rejects your app, you can communicate with Apple and resolve issues in the App Review section.

You’ll receive a message that contains information about the rejection, including how the app or item is out of compliance with the App Store Review Guidelines. You can correspond with Apple, and include attachments, such as screenshots and supporting documents, until you resubmit to App Review. If your app was rejected for a metadata issue, you can resubmit the same build after resolving the issue.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Reply to messages on the App Review page

From My Apps, select your app.
At the top of the page, click the link that indicates that there are unresolved issues.
From the In Progress section, click Resolve next to the submission you want to view.
To reply, click Reply to App Review.
Enter text in the Reply field.
To include a file, click Attach File and, in the dialog that appears, choose a file.
Click Reply.

Manage a submission with unresolved issues

If you’re using the updated submission experience and any of the items in your submission are rejected, the submission status will change to Unresolved Issues. A submission isn’t considered approved until all items have been accepted by App Review. Items that were rejected can be either edited and resubmitted, or removed from the submission to continue with the accepted items. When a submission has a status of Unresolved Issues, more items can’t be added to it.

Remove rejected items

From My Apps, click View App Review Issues & Messages.
From the In Progress section, click Resolve next to the submission.
Hold the pointer over the item you want to remove, then click the Delete button (–).
Once all rejected items are removed, the submission will move to the Completed section of the App Review page and will be ready to be released.

Edit and resubmit rejected items

From My Apps, click View App Review Issues & Messages.
From the In Progress section, click Resolve next to the submission.
Click Edit next to the item you want to edit.
Make the necessary changes, then click Add for Review.
Items in a submission can be edited only once before resubmission. If you no longer want to submit the item, you can remove it. Please note that removed items can’t be added back to the same submission.
Once you edit or remove all rejected items, click Resubmit to App Review from the submission details page.

View app status history

You can view the app status history for a version of your app. Each row in the history table includes an app status, the time the app status changed, and the originator of the change. Use this information to track your app through the App Review process.

To receive user notifications when the app status changes, go to Add and edit users.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager, Marketing. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Version History.
In the table, click the disclosure triangle next to the version you want to view app status history for. The app status appears in the Activity column, the user who originated the change appears in the User column, and the date of the change appears in the Date column.

Maintain your app

Overview of maintaining an app

After you publish your app on the App Store, you perform a number of tasks to respond to customer feedback and to maintain your app throughout its lifetime. You can perform these tasks in any order.

Monitor customer reviews, sales, and analytics

You can read and respond to customer reviews in the App Store tab. To better understand how your app is doing, you can view sales and trends and view app analytics, such as crashes, sessions, and active users.

Download catalog reports

If you have several apps in your account, generate catalog reports that detail the information and settings for all your organization’s apps, including in-app purchase, and metadata for Game Center leaderboards and achievements.

Create a new version

When you’re ready to distribute a new build of your app, you create a new version using the same app record as your previous version. You can update the metadata for the new app version and add a description of the new features. The new version is available for free to customers who purchased a previous version.

Change pricing and availability

You can change the price, schedule price changes, and change the territories for your app at any time. Scheduling price changes is useful for promotions that have a start and end date.

Remove an app

If you no longer want your app to be available to customers, you can remove it from the App Store, which removes all versions of the app.

Remove an app from the App Store

If you no longer want your app to be available to customers, you can remove it from the App Store, which removes all versions of the app. Users with previous versions of the app can’t update it, but they can still restore it from a backup, as long as you have an active agreements.

In order to remove an app from the App Store, the app needs to have one version with a status of Ready for Sale.

Note: Removing an app from the App Store doesn’t automatically remove its associated in-app purchases. Customers can still complete in-app purchases and auto-renewable subscriptions will be uninterrupted unless you explicitly remove them from sale.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
On the right, below Availability, select “Remove from sale.”
On the top right, click Save.

The app status changes to Developer Removed from Sale and your app will be removed from the App Store within 24 hours.

Restore an app to the App Store

You can restore apps that you removed from the App Store.

If you create a new version of an app you removed from the App Store and it gets approved by App Review, the app status remains as Developer Removed from Sale. To release the new version, you must restore it to the App Store first.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
Below Availability, select “All countries or regions selected.”
Click Edit if you want to select specific countries or regions.
On the top right, click Save.

The app status changes to Ready for Sale and your app reappears on the App Store within 24 hours.

Monitor customer reviews

Ratings and reviews overview

Ratings and reviews on the App Store

Customers can rate your app on a scale from 1 to 5 stars. They can also write a review for your iOS and macOS apps, but not your tvOS apps. When a customer edits their rating or review, the most recent change will display on your App Store product page. If a customer submits a new rating or review, the existing customer review is replaced.

Your product page displays a single summary rating for your app for each country or region of the App Store, as well as individual customer ratings and reviews. iOS apps that use the WatchKit or Messages frameworks share the same rating across the App Store for iPhone, iPad, Apple Watch, and iMessage.

View ratings and reviews

You can view all customer ratings and reviews from the App Store directly in App Store Connect. You can view the summary rating for specific countries or regions. The country or region for a rating is the App Store country or region where the customer originally purchased the app. You can also view individual reviews of your app.

Respond to customer reviews

For iOS, macOS, and watchOS apps, you can respond to customer reviews. When you respond to a customer review, the customer is notified of your response and has the option to update their review. If you edit your response multiple times within a short period of time (for example, to correct a typo), customers will only be notified once that you've edited your response. If a customer that you respond to changes their review, all App Store Connect users with the Admin or Customer Support role that have access to the app receive a notification (if they set their user notifications accordingly).

Your response will remain publicly visible regardless of edits made by the customer to their own review, unless you edit a response or delete a response. You can edit your response at any time and only one response per review will display on your App Store product page.

All ratings, reviews, and responses are publicly viewable on your App Store product page, and therefore, your responses should be appropriate for a public audience. If you believe a review is offensive or inappropriate, report a concern.

Reset app rating

You can reset your app’s rating when you release a new version. Your product page will display a message stating that the app's summary rating was recently reset. This message will be displayed until enough customers have rated the new version and a new summary rating appears.

View ratings and reviews

You can view the summary rating of your app or individual customer reviews. If necessary, you can report a concern about a review.

Note: Customers can rate and review your iOS and macOS apps, but can only rate your tvOS apps.

Learn how to view customer reviews with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Customer Support, Developer, Marketing. View role permissions.

Why does my app’s rating appear to have been reset?

In iOS 11 or later, individual ratings inform your app’s summary rating, which is displayed on your product page and in search results. This summary rating is based on the ratings of the version of your app that was available as of September 19, 2017, as well as ratings of later versions. This summary rating is specific to each territory on the App Store and you can reset it when you release a new version of your app. However, we recommend using this feature sparingly; while resetting the summary rating can ensure that it reflects the most current version of your app — useful if an update addresses users’ previous concerns — having few ratings may discourage potential users from downloading your app. In addition, keep in mind that resetting your summary rating doesn’t reset your app’s written reviews. Past reviews will continue to display on your product page.

Why is there a different rating for my app on devices running different versions of iOS?

iOS 10 or earlier displays your app’s rating based on all ratings of your app. iOS 11 or later displays a summary rating based on all ratings after Sept 19, 2017.

View summary ratings

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.
Users with only the Customer Support role will be taken directly to Ratings and Reviews after selecting an app.
From the menu on the right side, select the platform you wish to view ratings and reviews for. For tvOS apps, only ratings will display.
To view the summary rating for a specific country or region, choose the country or region from the menu above the summary rating.

View individual reviews

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.
Users with only the Customer Support role will be taken directly to Ratings and Reviews after selecting an app.
From the menu on the right side, select the platform you wish to view ratings and reviews for. For tvOS apps, only ratings will display.
To filter the list, use the pop-up menus.
- View reviews for a specific app version: Choose the version from the All Versions menu.
- View reviews with a specific rating: Choose the rating from the All Ratings menu.
- View reviews that have been edited or responded to: Choose the option from the All Reviews menu.

Report a concern

If there’s an issue with a customer review, you can report your concern to Apple. The customer who wrote the review wont’t be notified if you report a concern.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.
Users with only the Customer Support role will be taken directly to Ratings and Reviews after selecting an app.
From the menu on the right side, select the platform you wish to view ratings and reviews for. For tvOS apps, only ratings will display.
Find the review and click Report a Concern
In the dialog that appears, choose a concern from the pop-up menu, enter a description of your concern, and click Submit.

Respond to customer reviews (iOS, macOS, watchOS)

You can publicly respond to a review, edit your response, and delete your response. One response per review appears on your App Store product page.

Responses may take up to 24 hours to appear on the App Store. Until then, they’ll show as pending in App Store Connect. Edited responses will have notations indicating that they’ve been edited. Responses appear in iOS 10.3 or later, and macOS 10.6.6 or later.

Learn how to respond to customer reviews with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin or Customer Support. View role permissions.

Reply to a review

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.
From the menu on the right side, select the platform (iOS or macOS) with the review you wish to reply to.
Find the review and click Reply next to the review.
In the dialog that appears, enter a reply in the text field and click Submit.

Edit a response

If you respond to customer reviews, you can edit and delete your responses.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.
From the menu on the right side, select the platform (iOS or macOS) with the review you wish to edit the response for.
Find the review and click Edit Response next to the review.
You don't need to be the person who wrote the response to edit it.
In the dialog that appears, edit the response and click Save.

Delete a response

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Ratings and Reviews.
From the menu on the right side, select the platform (iOS or macOS) with the review you wish to delete the response for.
Find the review and click Edit Response
In the dialog that appears, click Delete Response.

Reset app summary rating (iOS, tvOS, macOS)

You can reset your app's summary rating when you release a new app version. Your product page will display a message stating that the app's summary rating was recently reset, until enough customers rate the new version and a new summary rating appears. You can view the reset date in the App Store tab under Ratings and Reviews.

Please note that once you release the new version of your app, you won’t be able to restore the previous rating.

Ratings are reset globally, not by individual country or region. Keep in mind that when you reset your summary rating, it won’t apply to written customer reviews, which will continue to display on the App Store.

For universal apps, the reset only applies to the platform version that you reset your rating for. You can’t reset the rating of app bundles.

Required role: Admin or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version you want to submit.
In the Reset Summary Rating section, select Reset rating when this version is released.
Click save.
After you submit your app for review, your app's summary rating will reset on the App Store when the version is released.

Generate catalog reports

You can generate catalog reports that detail the information and settings for your organization’s catalog of apps, including in-app purchases and metadata for Game Center leaderboards and achievements.

After you request a report, you'll receive an email letting you know when it’s ready for download.

Each type of catalog report can be generated once per 24-hour period. If a report was already requested within 24-hours, a message displays that it can’t be generated again.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

Request catalog reports

From My Apps, select Reports from the Ellipsis menu (…) on the top left.
In the dialog that appears, click Request Report.
Select the type of reports you want, and click Submit.

Download a catalog report

From My Apps, select Reports from the the Ellipsis menu (…) on the top left.
In the row of the report you want to view, click “Available for download”.
Open the downloaded file using your preferred spreadsheet application. The format of a report is a tab-delimited .txt file.

Make a previous version unavailable for download

If a legal or usability issue occurs with a previous version of your app, you can make that version unavailable for download.

If the status of the version is Ready for Sale and the version has a legal or usability issue, you must submit an app update and explain the issue with the previous version when submitting the new version. If you’re unable to submit an update, you must remove the app from the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click Pricing and Availability.
At the bottom of the page, under the Last-Compatible Version Settings, select the available version.
In the dialog that appears, deselect versions that shouldn’t be available, and click Done.
On the top right, click Save.

If the legal or usability issue is resolved, select the versions that should be available in step 4.

Measure app performance

Analytics and reporting overview

App Store Connect provides the following analytics and reports so you can measure your app’s performance and view all final payments you've received.

App Analytics

App Analytics provides data on user engagement and marketing campaigns with metrics such as App Store Impressions, Product Page Views, Sales, Sessions, Deletions, and more. Usage data is available for devices running a minimum of iOS 8, macOS 11, or tvOS 9, and data is displayed only when a certain number of data points are available.

Learn about App Analytics.

Sales and Trends

Sales and Trends provides next-day sales and unit data so you can measure the performance of your free or paid apps, as well as any associated in-app purchases. Transactions reported in Sales and Trends are based on the date the customer purchased the app or in-app purchase.

Learn about Sales and Trends.

Payments and Financial Reports

Payments and Financial Reports provides information on final payments made to you based on settled transactions and finalized proceeds using the Apple fiscal calendar. Financial reports only include paid transactions for which payment was collected from the customer (review the Paid Applications Agreement for details). You can opt in to email alerts that notify you when financial reports are available for download in App Store Connect.

Learn about receiving payments from Apple.

Automating reports

You can automate downloads of your sales and financial reports with our command-line tool, Reporter, or the App Store Connect API.

Differences in reporting

There may be differences between reports in Sales and Trends and reports in Payments and Financial due to the following reasons:

Processing status. Transactions may take time to process and close. Transactions initiated in a particular month and shown in Sales and Trends may not be reflected in Payments and Financial Reports until the customer’s payment is processed and collected and an invoice is issued, which may be in the following fiscal month. In addition, transactions for which payment wasn’t collected payment aren’t shown in financial reports.
Exchange rate. Sales and Trends estimates the USD amount of sales and proceeds based on a rolling average of the previous month's exchange rates. All downloadable reports show amounts in local currencies transacted by customers. Final payments in Payments and Financial Reports are based on the exchange rate used to convert each report currency to the currency of your bank account. Learn about the exchange rate.

There may also be differences between sales reports in App Analytics and sales reports in Sales and Trends for the following reasons:

App Analytics data is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). By default, Sales and Trends data is shown in UTC, but you can change the time zone to Pacific Time (PT).
App Analytics excludes Restores (where a user restores an app to their device from a backup) in the Redownloads metric, while Sales and Trends includes Restores in its Redownload count.
App Analytics excludes sales metrics (in-app purchases, sales, paying users, proceeds) from TestFlight builds, while Sales and Trends includes them.
App Analytics excludes Sales or Redownloads on watchOS.
App Analytics excludes in-app purchase transactions (such as auto-renewable subscription renewals) from Removed from Sale apps, while Sales and Trends includes them.
Certain transactions may not be reported on the same dates in App Analytics and Sales and Trends due to processing time differences between the two systems.

App Analytics

About App Analytics

App Analytics lets you measure user engagement, marketing campaigns, and monetization for your apps. You can use App Analytics to:

Find out which sources drive the most traffic to your app’s product page.
Calculate conversion rate (the number of people who view your app’s product page to total downloads of your app).
Find out which territories have the most engaged users by sessions and proceeds per paying user.
Evaluate the success of your online marketing campaigns.
Find out which App Clips are successful at driving first-time app downloads.
View how many users have pre-ordered your app.

App Analytics displays App Store and usage data from devices running a minimum of iOS 8, macOS 11, or tvOS 9. To protect user privacy, App Analytics only shows data after a certain number of data points are available.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

View app metrics

App metrics are divided into four categories: App Store, Downloads, Sales, and Usage.

App Store

Find out how many times your app was viewed on the App Store, and how many times users have visited your app’s product page.

Downloads

View how many total times your app was downloaded and which of those were first-time downloads and re-downloads.

Sales

View the total number of pre-orders, first-time app downloads, in-app purchases, and their associated sales. You can also view how many unique paying users your app has.

Usage

Track a variety of user engagement metrics, such as installations, sessions, crashes, and active devices. Usage metrics are only available from users who have agreed to share their diagnostics and usage information with app developers. Learn more.

The App Analytics dashboard display the statistics from the date range you select and the estimated percentage difference from the previous period of the same length of time. For example, if you select “Last 7 days,” the percentage values will show if your app is performing better or worse than the week prior.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

View metrics

From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page opens with a summary of key app metrics.
From the menu bar, click Metrics. The Metrics page opens with product page views displayed by default.
The graph shows daily totals for the metric for the past 30 days. Hold the pointer over the graph to view data for a specific day.
To change the metric displayed, click the metric selector on the top left and choose from the complete list of app metrics.

Compare metrics

App Analytics allows you to display two metrics at a time as a ratio, which can help you calculate key performance indicators, such as conversion rate or proceeds per paying user.

From App Analytics, select your app.
From the menu bar, click Metrics. The Metrics page opens with product page views displayed by default.
Click the metric selector to display a list of available metrics and select your desired metric.
On the right side, click the (...) button and select Compare.
Click the menu next to Compare To and select your desired metric to compare against.
By default, the data displays as a single axis. Click the (...) button to change the graph to a ratio or dual axis.

Add filters and dimensions

App Analytics metrics can be filtered by a number of dimensions, such as device type, territory, and source type.

From App Analytics, select your app.
From the menu bar, click Metrics. The Metrics page opens with product page views displayed by default.
Next to the metric selector, click By Date, and choose a dimension.
You can add additional filters by clicking Add Filter. For example, add Product Page Views by Device, by Region.

Create saved views

Saved Views allow you to apply filters and dimensions to your desired metrics in App Store Connect, then easily view the same data again.

From App Analytics, select your app.
From the menu bar, click Metrics.
Select your desired metrics, filters, or comparable metrics.
On the right side, click Saved Views.
In the Saved Views pop-up menu, click Save Current View.
Enter a reference name and click Save. Return to the view at any time by clicking Saved Views.

Export data

You can export data directly from the App Analytics dashboard as a CSV file.

From App Analytics, select your app.
From the menu bar, click Metrics.
Select your desired metrics, filters, or comparable metrics.
On the right side, click the (...) button and select Export as CSV.

View opt-in rate

App Analytics only collects usage data from users who have agreed to share their diagnostics and usage information with app developers. Your opt-in rate can tell you what percentage of your app’s users have agreed to share this information with you. Opt-in data includes installations, sessions, active devices, active last 30 days, crashes, and deletions.

From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page opens with a summary of key app metrics.
On the Overview page, navigate to a usage metric widget, such as Crashes.
In the Crashes widget, click Opt-In Only. The pop-up menu displays your opt-in rate for the last 24 hours.
To view your opt-in rate for a longer period, click Opt-In Rate History. Each day on the chart shows the average opt-in rate of all the users who installed your app in the last 90 days.

View App Clip metrics

App Analytics helps you analyze the performance of your App Clips.

When your App Clip card displays, it’s counted as an App Clip Card View. If the user launches the App Clip by tapping the action button on the App Clip card, the App Clip installs on the user’s device and is counted as an App Clip Installation. It remains on the device until there are 30 consecutive days of inactivity. If the user returns to your App Clip for at least one second, an App Clip Session is counted. If the user clicks a link in your App Clip to download your app from the App Store, the resulting App Unit is attributed to your App Clip as the source, as well as any additional App Clip Sessions or Crashes.

App Clip metrics are only available from users who have agreed to share their diagnostics and usage information with app developers.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

View App Clip metrics

From App Analytics, select the app associated with your App Clip. The Overview page provides a summary of key app metrics.
From the menu bar, click Metrics.
The Metrics page opens with your app’s Product Page Views displayed by default. To change the metric to an App Clip metric, click the metric selector on the top left corner.
From the pop-up menu, choose an App Clip metric to view.
Choose a dimension and add any desired filters. Use the date picker to select a date range.

View in-app event metrics

App Analytics helps you understand how in-app events contribute to your app’s acquisition, user engagement, and monetization. With App Analytics, you can understand key performance metrics such as how many users are discovering your in-app events on the App Store, how successful your in-app events were at getting users to download your app, as well as how engaged users remain with your app over time.

When a user discovers your in-app event on the App Store, an Event Impression is counted. If they already have your app installed, clicking on a link to your app from the event will count as an App Open. Users can also choose to be reminded just before your event starts. App Analytics counts how many times users tap on those notifications bringing them to your in-app event.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

To view in-app event metrics:

From App Analytics, select the app associated with your in-app event.
Click the Acquisition tab.
In the top menu bar, click In-App Events.
Click an event name in the list to display an overview page of key metrics about your in-app event. An overview of your event's performance includes how many times your event was viewed, the total number of app downloads from your event, retention, and more.

View acquisition sources

App Analytics lets you view data based on where users discover your app or App Clip, so you can determine which sources are most successful at helping you acquire users.

When a user taps a link from an app, website, or App Clip card that brings them to your App Store product page, the immediate product page view is attributed to the referring app, website, or App Clip. If the user then taps to download the app for the first time, the resulting First-Time Download is attributed to the referring app, website, or App Clip.

All sales and usage data for the app or App Clip are attributed to the source recorded when a user tapped to download your app or launch your App Clip for the first time. This includes data from redownloads, downloads to multiple devices sharing the same Apple ID, subscription renewals, and Family Sharing downloads.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

View app metrics by acquisition source

Viewing your app metrics by source can help you determine which source types are most successful at driving sales and usage.

Source traffic for apps is divided into the following categories:

Source				Definition
App Store Search				Users viewed your app or downloaded it from Search on the App Store. Includes Search Ads in App Store search.
App Store Browse				Users viewed your app or tapped to download it while browsing the App Store (for example, in the Today, Games, or Apps sections).
App Referrer				Users tapped a link in an app that brought them to your App Store product page. Includes apps using the StoreKit API to load your product page. Includes Apple apps, such as Messages, except Safari.
Web Referrer				Users tapped a link from a website that brought them to your App Store product page. If a chain of redirects in Safari leads to your App Store product page, the referring website will be the last URL in the chain. Note: For iOS apps, taps from websites in non-Safari web browsers, such as Chrome, are attributed as that web browser app in App Referrers. For macOS apps, taps from non-Safari web browsers are attributed to Web Referrers.
App Clip				Users tapped a link in your App Clip that brought them to your App Store product page. If the user then downloaded your app, the resulting Download is attributed to your App Clip as the source.
Institutional Purchases				Users downloaded your app from Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager.
Unavailable				Sales and usage data display sources as unavailable if users downloaded your app before App Analytics started tracking source attribution on April 15, 2017. As users download your app for the first time, more complete sources data will display. If a user downloads your app using an App Store gift card or promotional code, the source type will also show as unavailable.

From App Analytics, select your app.
In the menu bar, click Sources.
The Sources page displays all source data for Product Page Views by default. Use the metric picker on the right side to select a metric. Data is displayed.

View App Clip metrics by invocation source

Viewing your App Clip metrics by invocation source can help you determine which sources are most successful at driving app downloads and engaging users.

App Clip metrics, including App Clip Card Views, App Clip Installations, App Clip Sessions, and App Clip Crashes, are attributed to the source that first displayed the App Clip card to the user. App Clip metrics are only available from users who have agreed to share their diagnostics and usage information with app developers.

Default App Clip experience invocations include Messages and Web Referrer sources. Learn more.

The following invocation sources are available in App Analytics:

Source				Definition
Siri				Siri suggested your App Clip in response to a user, they tapped the suggestion, and your App Clip card was displayed.
NFC Tags				A user held their iPhone near an NFC tag that you placed at a specific location and your App Clip card was displayed.
Maps				A user tapped on a place card in Apple Maps, followed the link to your App Clip, and your App Clip card was displayed.
Messages				Your App Clip card was displayed after a user tapped a link they received through the Messages app.
QR Code				A user scanned a QR code with their device and your App Clip card was displayed.
App Clip Code				A user scanned an App Clip Code with their device and your App Clip card was displayed.
Location Based				Your App Clip card was displayed due to the user’s location settings.
App Referrer				Your App Clip card was displayed after a user tapped on a link in another app, such as the Notes app or Facebook. Safari, Maps, and Messages aren’t included in app referrers.
Web Referrer				A user tapped on an invocation URL or Smart App Banner in Safari which invoked the App Clip Card. A detailed breakdown of web referrers is not available.

From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page provides a summary of key app metrics.
From the menu bar, click Metrics.
The Metrics page opens with Product Page Views displayed by default.
To change the metric displayed, click the metric selector on the top left and choose from the complete list of App Clip metrics. Note that these will only display if your app has a corresponding App Clip.

How are the metrics driven by Search Ads (such as downloads, product page views, and impressions) attributed in App Analytics?

When a user searches for your app using keywords in the Search tab of the App Store and your paid ad appears in the results, those resulting metrics are included in your Search totals. If a user doesn’t enter any keywords in Search, and your paid ad is on the Search page by default, those resulting metrics are included in your Browse totals.

Manage campaigns

App Analytics allows you to generate campaign links for use in marketing materials. When a user clicks an ad with your campaign link, they’re redirected to your app's product page on the App Store. When you generate a campaign link, you also receive a campaign token and a provider token to use in other campaigns.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

Create a campaign link

From App Analytics, select your app.
In the menu bar, click Acquisitions.
Choose Campaigns.
Click the (+) button next to Campaigns.
In the menu under App, select your app from the list.
In the Campaign field, enter a campaign name. Your campaign name will be your campaign token. You can use up to 40 alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following punctuation marks and characters:
[ ] / \ - ~ + = < > : ; , . _ ‘ “ * & $ % # @ ? ! | { } ( )
A space can’t be used as the first or last character in the campaign token.
Copy the campaign link to use in your marketing materials.
Example: https://apps.apple.com/app/apple-store/id123456789?pt=123456&ct=test1234&mt=8

Use your campaign and provider tokens

When you generate a campaign link, you also receive a campaign token (identified by the ct= parameter) and a provider token (identified with the pt= parameter) that you can place in your other campaigns.

Smart App Banners

If you promote your app with Smart App Banners in Safari, you can add your campaign token and provider token when implementing a Smart App Banner on your website.

StoreKit

To track advertising and campaigns in apps that use the StoreKit framework to load your product page, add your campaign token and provider token using SKStoreProductParameterCampaignToken and SKStoreProductParameterProviderToken.

App Store for iMessage

For targeted campaigns for the App Store for iMessage, add the &app=messages parameter to your campaign link to ensure that the user is directed to your app's product page on the App Store for iMessage. iMessage and sticker pack extensions share a product page with the associated iOS app.

Example: https://apps.apple.com/us/app/apple-store/id439104108?pt=8668&ct=test123&mt=8&app=messages

View campaign performance

Campaigns only display in App Analytics after more than a day has passed since campaign launch and at least five First-Time Downloads are attributed to the campaign. Your campaign must also include your provider token and a campaign token.

When a user downloads your app for the first time within 24 hours of using your campaign link or campaign token, they’re counted as a First-Time Download. If a user clicks more than one campaign link during a certain period, only the most recent campaign link is credited for sales that occur after it's used.

From App Analytics, select your app. The Overview page provides a summary of key metrics about your app.
Click Sources.
In the menu on the left, choose Campaigns.
From the date picker in the top-right, choose a date range. You can view a predefined period (for example, Last 7 Days) or enter a custom range. By default the date picker will display the last 30 days.
On the top right, choose an App Purchase Date.
Tip: To export the data in the list, click the download icon on the top right of your screen. Keep in mind that this list includes only a limited number of your top referrers. Data will be exported in CSV file format.

See alsoView app metrics

Measure app retention

App Analytics retention measures the the usage of your app over time.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

From App Analytics, select your app.
Click Retention.
On the top right, choose a start date.

The table displayed shows the percentage of devices on which your app was used in the days after the first installation.

For example, if your app was first downloaded by customers on 100 devices on May 1, and seven days later on May 8, 20 devices are still active with at least one session, the retention rate on May 8 is 20% (or 20 active devices out of 100).

View product page optimization results

Product page optimization helps you evaluate which version of your product page is most effective at getting users to download your app. These tests use a range of modern and rigorous Bayesian techniques and require minimal overhead to launch a test, transparently communicate changing results as they arrive, and identify the best version as quickly as possible. This methodology is designed by Apple specifically for App Store product page data, so you can evaluate results every day with the confidence that you’re receiving the most accurate and up-to-date information.

Once a test gathers enough impressions for 90% confidence, a treatment may be marked as Performing Better or Performing Worse, compared to your chosen baseline. (This baseline is the original product page by default, and can be changed to a treatment at any time.) The main measure of performance for each product page version is the conversion rate — the percentage of users that downloaded your app after viewing the product page. If the amount of data required to reach a high confidence level is more than you’ll likely receive based on your test’s traffic partway through the test, we’ll let you know that your test may be inconclusive.

Your test results will indicate an estimated conversion rate for each variant, an estimated lift in conversion between variants, and Apple’s level of confidence in the results. To calculate this, Apple takes into account a range of prior information about the performance of your app’s product page. This helps ensure that there’s enough data to report on a difference between your variants.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

View test results

Product page optimization helps you evaluate which version of your product page is most effective at getting users to download your app.

From App Analytics, select your app.
Click the Acquisition tab.
In the top menu bar, click Product Pages.
Click a test’s name in the Product Page Optimization list. Only the most recent and currently running tests are shown.

The overview of your test’s performance, includes an estimate of which treatment is performing best. By default, your original product page is the baseline. If your test has multiple treatments, you can change the baseline to one of those treatments. Use the Improvement switch to display results by Improvement or Conversion Rate. Use the menu to view different test results.

Once a test gathers enough impressions to have at least 90% confidence in the results, a treatment may be marked as either Performing Better or Performing Worse compared to your chosen baseline. By default, the baseline is your original product page, and can be changed to any of your treatments at any time.

The methodology used in product page optimization is described in Interpretive Adaptive Optimization.

View terms and definitions.

Sales and Trends

About Sales and Trends

Sales and Trends provides next-day sales and unit data so that you can measure the performance of your free or paid iOS, tvOS and macOS apps, as well as any associated in-app purchases. Data in Sales and Trends is recorded when a customer initiates a transaction on the App Store. Sales data for iMessage apps and sticker packs is included in the data for the containing iOS app.

On the overview page, view top apps or in-app purchases and their contribution to your overall business.
If you offer auto-renewable subscriptions, view subscriptions data on the summary, retention, state, and event pages to gain quick insight into the performance of your subscriptions business.
View units, proceeds, sales and pre-orders with options to filter data by selected time period, app, subscription, and territory.
You can also download and view reports in order to further analyze the performance of your app or subscriptions.

Note: If you transfer your app, you’ll continue to have access to information for sales that occurred prior to the transfer. You won’t be able to view data for sales that occur after the transfer has completed.

View Units, Proceeds, Sales, and Pre-Orders

Sales and Trends estimates the USD amount of sales and proceeds based on a rolling average of the previous month's exchange rates.

By default, data is shown in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). To match the time zone used by downloaded reports, select Pacific Time (PT). A day includes transactions that happened from 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m. for the selected time zone.

Units

By default, the Units section displays app units, in-app purchases, and app bundles. You can apply filters to view the number of updates, redownloads, and app units originated from pre-orders.

App and Bundle Units

The number of first-time purchases of your app or bundle. An app unit or bundle unit is counted when a customer taps the 'Buy' or 'Get' button for the first-time. App updates, downloads from the same Apple ID onto other devices, and redownloads to the same device aren't counted. Family Sharing downloads are included for free apps, but not for paid apps.

In-App Purchases

The number of in-app purchases, including consumables, non-consumables, auto-renewable subscriptions, and non-renewable subscriptions. In-app purchases restored by users aren’t counted. Learn about the types of in-app purchase types.

Sales

The total amount billed to customers for purchasing apps, app bundles, and in-app purchases. Sales are inclusive of any applicable taxes we collect and remit per Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications Agreement. Sales for iMessage apps and sticker packs are included in the data for the containing iOS app.

Proceeds

The amount of money you receive on sales of your apps and in-app purchases. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of your Paid Applications Agreement. Proceeds in Sales and Trends aren’t final. Learn about final proceeds based on closed transactions.

For paid subscriptions that have been active for less than one year, you receive 70% of the subscription price, minus applicable taxes, or the Rate Before One Year. After a subscriber accumulates one year of paid service, you receive 85% of the subscription price, minus applicable taxes, or the Rate After One Year.

Pre-Orders

Before releasing your app on the App Store for the first time, you can choose to offer it as a pre-order. Making your app available for pre-order allows customers to order it before its release date and automatically download it once it's available. Upon fulfillment to the customer, a pre-order will be reflected as an app unit. If a pre-order is a paid app unit, then the associated sales from the pre-order will also appear upon fulfillment.

Required role: Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

View top apps or in-app purchases

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
You’ll be taken to an overview of your top apps and in-app purchases.
On the top right, choose a date range.
Use the menu to select app units, sales, or in-app purchases.
Use the graphs at the bottom to view data by device type and territory.
To view what apps and in-app purchases have the most sales, select Sales from the menu.

View units, proceeds, sales, and pre-orders

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, click Units, Proceeds, Sales, or Pre-Orders.
By default, the Units metric includes app units, in-purchases, and app bundles. Updates and redownloads are excluded but can be added using a filter.
On the top right, click the pop-up menu and choose a time zone.
On the top right, choose a date range.
You can view a predefined period (for example, Last 7 Days) or enter a custom range. You can also choose a period using the date slider below the main graph.
Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.
You can create saved views based on the selected dimensions.
Click a row in the table below the graph to add the corresponding value to your filters.
For example, if you filter by territory and click the Europe row, the graph and table will display data for territories in Europe.

Create saved views

You can save your current chosen date range, group, and filter selections. You can later choose your saved views from the Sales page menu.

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, click Units, Proceeds, Sales, or Pre-Orders.
Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.
On the left side, select the add button (+) next to Saved Views.
Give the saved view a name and click Save.
Return to your saved view at any time by choosing it from the Saved section on the left side.

View refunds

Your daily Unit totals include any processed refunds. However, you can view your total number of refunds in Sales and Trends by adding filters.

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the top right, choose a date range.
In the upper-left corner, click Add Filters and choose Transaction Type.
Under Transaction Type, choose Refunds. Refunds are shown as negative unit values on the right-hand side. Percentage Range shows the change in Refund totals from the previous period for each app or in-app purchase.

View hourly sales data

You can view data for your apps and in-app purchases for the last 24-hours. Data is displayed for a rolling period of the previous 24-hour period, and is generally available within two hours.

To view your last 24 hours of sales data:

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, click Units, Proceeds, Sales, or Pre-Orders.
On the top right, click the date picker and select Last 24 Hours.
Filter by content to view data for a specific app or in-app purchase, or by territory to view where your app’s performance is highest.

Why are there sales for in-app purchases in territories in which my app is not available?

While apps are only available for sale in the territories you specify, in-app purchases are available in all territories. This allows customers to continue using apps they own, for example, after they move to a different country or region. Customers can only make in-app purchases if they already own that app.

Why are there more updates than the total downloaded units in Sales and Trends?

Your total downloaded units are based on unique users. Updates are counted on every device on which they’re installed, even when the device shares the same Apple ID. If you release frequent updates of your app, there may be significantly more updates than total downloads.

View Subscriptions Data

On the Subscription Summary, Retention, Event, and State pages, you can view sales and activity for your auto-renewable subscriptions.

Time Zone: Data is shown in Pacific Time (PT). A day includes transactions that happened from 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m. PT.

Required role: Admin, Finance, or Sales. View role permissions.

View subscription data for a selected period

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, choose Subscriptions Summary.
On the top right, choose a date.
Data in the graphs will change based on the chosen end date. For example, if you select an end date of April 26, the number of Active Subscriptions on April 26 and a graph showing daily Active Subscriptions for the 30 days prior to April 26 will display.
Click Add Filters, and then choose a dimension.
You can filter by dimensions such as app, subscription, or territory.
Navigate to the graph that you want to view.

View retention and conversion rates

You can view monthly retention and introductory price conversion rates for the twelve months preceding a selected end date. By default, the rate across all of your subscription offerings (for example, 1-month and 1-year subscriptions) will display, unless you filter by a particular subscription.

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, select Subscriptions Summary.
Scroll down to Retention and Conversion Rates.

Selecting Retention Rate will show the number of subscriptions that renewed during a specific period, divided by the number of subscriptions that were up for renewal during the same period. Upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades don’t count as a subscription renewal.

Selecting Conversion Rate by Introductory Offer or Conversion Rate by Promotional Offer will show the percentage of subscriptions that converted to the standard price at the end of the introductory or promotional period.

View active subscriptions by proceeds rate

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, choose Subscriptions Summary.
Scroll down to Active Subscriptions by Proceeds Rate.
Hold the pointer over the graph to view the data by month.

Only subscriptions active on the last day of each month are counted.

View subscription events

You can view subscription events in Sales and Trends, including the number of times subscribers activate, change, and cancel their subscriptions. To view your subscription events:

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side under Subscriptions, choose Events.
From the right side, click the date picker to choose a date range. The graph will update to show data for the selected period.
Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.

Subscription events are grouped into the following event types:

Activations: the number of times your customers started a subscription for the first time. Includes standard price subscriptions and introductory offers.
Cancellations: the number of canceled subscriptions. Cancellations can occur when a subscriber turns off auto-renew, or when the App Store is unable to successfully bill a customer in billing retry for a renewal. In the case of a subscriber turning off auto-renew, the event is counted when the subscription expires at the end of the period. In the case of subscriptions in billing retry, the event is counted at the last billing attempt.
Conversions to Standard Price: the number of introductory or subscription offers that have renewed to a standard price subscription.
Reactivations: the number of previously canceled subscriptions that have re-reactivated to a subscription in the same group, including upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades.
Refunds: the number of subscriptions refunded to customers. Includes full and partial refunds.
Renewals: the number of subscriptions that have renewed. Includes upgrades, downgrades, and cross grades, as well as introductory or subscription offer renewals.
Renewals from Billing Retry: the number of subscriptions that have successfully renewed out of the billing retry state. Doesn’t include subscriptions that renewed during a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.
Enter Billing Retry: the number of subscriptions that have have not renewed due to a billing issue. When a subscription expires due to a billing issue, Apple will attempt to renew the subscription and collect payment for up to 60 days. Includes subscriptions that previously entered a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period but did not renew.
Enter Billing Grace Period: the number of subscriptions that have not renewed due to a billing issue, and have entered a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.
Renewals from Billing Grace Period: the number of subscriptions that successfully renewed from a 6 or 16 day Billing Grace Period window.

View a complete list of subscription events by type.

View active subscription data

Active paid subscriptions are the total number of auto-renewable subscriptions that are currently active, including paid subscriptions with introductory pricing, paid subscription offers, excluding free trials and marketing opt-ins. A subscription is active during the period for which the customer has paid.

You can also view your daily subscription units, which are the total number of subscription purchases, renewals, and reactivations (minus refunds) and the associated sales from those transactions. Free trials aren't included.

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side under Subscriptions, choose Summary.
Your active subscriptions data will display at the top of the page.

Compare retention by start month

Subscription Start Month allows you to compare retention of subscriptions started in specific months.

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, choose Subscription Retention.
Scroll down to Retention Trends.
From the right side, click Subscription Start Month to choose a month. The graph will update to show retention rate over consecutive renewal periods. By default, all subscription durations are included.
Click Add Filters, and choose a dimension.
You can filter by dimensions such as duration.

How can I determine which prices my subscribers are paying?

The Subscription report includes the number of active subscriptions and corresponding customer prices.

See alsoMetrics definitions

Download and view reports

You can download Sales and Trends reports directly from App Store Connect. You can also automate downloading of reports using the App Store Connect API or Reporter.

The following reports are available for download in Sales and Trends:

Summary Sales Report. Aggregated sales and download data for your apps and In-App Purchases.
Sales Events Report. The dates of significant sales events for your apps and in-app purchases across various territories and devices.
Subscription Report. Total number of Active Subscriptions, Subscriptions with Introductory Prices, and Marketing Opt-Ins for your auto-renewable subscriptions.
Subscription Event Report. Aggregated data about subscriber activity, including upgrades, renewals, and introductory price conversions.
Subscriber Report. Transaction-level data about subscriber activity using randomly generated Subscriber IDs.
Magazine & Newspapers Report. Transaction-level data for Magazines & Newspapers apps using randomly generated Customer IDs.
Pre-Order Report. Aggregated data for your apps made available for pre-order, including the number of units ordered and canceled by customers.
Subscription Offer Redemption Report. Information on the total number of subscription offer code redemptions.

Time zone: Reports are based on Pacific Time (PT). A day includes transactions that happened from 12:00 a.m. to 11:59 p.m. PT.

Download & View Reports

You can also automate downloading of your Sales and Trends and Payments and Financial Reports with the command line tool, Reporter, or with the App Store Connect API.

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Sales and Trends.
On the left side, choose Download Data Reports.
Scroll to the Report that you want to download.
Choose a vendor and date or report period.
Click Download.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.
On macOS, double-click on the compressed GZIP (.gz) file to unzip it.
Open the extracted tab-delimited text (.txt) file in a spreadsheet application.
On macOS, control-click the tab-delimited text (.txt) file to open a shortcut menu and select Open With. Or right-click to open a shortcut menu on Windows.

Why don't my reports from Sales and Trends match up with my reports from Payments and Financial Reports?

Sales and Trends provides next-day data so that you can view the performance of your app and in-app purchases, while Payments and Financial Reports provide final proceeds. Learn about differences in reporting.

Why do some transactions show zero proceeds, even though my app isn't free?

Your reports include app updates. Updates are always free and these transactions will show Product Type Identifier 7. App sales will show Product Type Identifier 1 and can either be free or paid.

Why are there refunds for an amounts that are less than the customer price?

Customers that paid for subscriptions may get a pro-rated or partial refunds to factor in the content they’ve already received.

Manage agreements, tax, and banking

Agreements, Tax, and Banking overview

The Apple Developer Program License Agreement allows you to distribute free apps on the App Store as part of the Apple Developer Program. Before you can sell apps or offer in-app purchases, the Account Holder must sign the Paid Applications Agreement, an addition to the Apple Developer Program License Agreement.

To receive payments from Apple, you'll also need to enter banking information and submit tax forms. App Store Connect will verify the information you provide.

If you’re enrolled as an individual, your legal name displays as the Seller on your App Store product page. Alternatively, organizations may set a registered trade name to display as the Seller. For example, if your legal entity name is “Apps Company LLC”, your trade name may simply be “Apps.” You can set this trade name in the Company Name field only when adding an app to your account for the first time.

You must have the Account Holder, Admin or Finance role in order to view the Agreements, Tax and Banking. However, only the Account Holder can sign agreements.

Sign and update agreements

To sell your apps or offer in-app purchases, the Account Holder must sign the Paid Applications Agreement.

Required role: Account Holder. View role permissions.

Sign a paid agreement

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click View and Agree to Terms.
You may be prompted to provide a two-factor authentication verification code in order to proceed. Learn how to get a verification code.
Verify your legal entity information is correct in the dialog, then click Add. Enter the same information that you provided when you enrolled in the Apple Developer Program.
Read and accept the terms, then click Agree. You can also download a copy of the agreement.

Important: Once you've accepted the terms of this agreement, you can’t undo this action.

Renew an expiring Paid Applications Agreement

If you renew your membership after it expires, you’ll need to agree to the Paid Applications Agreement again. This agreement must be active in order for you to submit or update paid apps and in-app purchases.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Renew Agreement.

Accept the latest agreement

When a new version of the Paid Applications Agreement is available for you to sign, an alert appears in App Store Connect. You won’t be able to create a new app or in-app purchase until you’ve agreed to the most recent version of the Paid Applications Agreement.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click View and Agree to Terms.
In the dialog, read and accept the terms, then click Submit.

Update your legal entity information or address

Legal entity information is provided when enrolling in the Apple Developer Program and is tied to contracts associated with your membership.

To update the legal entity name and address that appear in Agreements, Tax, and Banking, contact us.

Keep in mind that:

You may need to provide business documentation to support your request.
Once changes are approved, it can take up to two weeks for the updates to appear in App Store Connect.

Make sure to also provide any updated tax or banking information. Some updates may generate a new Paid Applications Agreement, which will be ready for your to accept once the update has finished processing. Your new legal entity name will also appear on the App Store.

View agreement status

You can view agreement terms, statuses, and expiration dates, as well as enter missing information and download PDF copies.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

View the status of an agreement

The agreement status indicates whether your agreement is active or if it needs your attention.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.

On the Agreements tab, find the agreement you want to view. The status appears in the corresponding row.

Status				Description
New				The agreement has not been signed.
Pending User Info				You’ve signed an agreement, but it’s not in effect because you haven’t finished providing required information.
Processing				You’ve provided all information and we’re reviewing your agreement.
Verifying				You’ve provided additional information about the legal entity associated with the agreement and the details are being reviewed.
Active				The agreement is in effect.
Active (Pending User Information)				The agreement is in effect, but you haven’t finished providing required information.
Active (New Agreement Available)				A new version of the existing active agreement is available for you to sign.
Pending (New Legal Entity)				You’ve made changes to your legal entity and new banking and/or tax forms are required.
Pending (New Agreement Available)				A new version of the existing pending agreement is available for you to sign.
Expired				The agreement has expired.

Download a copy of an agreement

You can download a copy of your agreements at any time in App Store Connect.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, click the agreement you want to download.
Navigate to the Terms section at the bottom of the screen.
Click Download Agreement Terms.

To download a copy of the Free Apps Agreement, also referred to as the Apple Developer Program License Agreement, visit the Membership section of your developer account and click Show Agreements. Alternatively, you can view Apple Developer Program agreements on the developer website.

Enter banking information

To receive payments from Apple, you need to submit electronic banking information. Note that in order to add banking information, you’ll first need to sign a Paid Applications Agreement.

The information you provide should apply to your own bank only (not an intermediary or correspondent bank), and should include a routing number that’s unique to your bank account.

You may also be required to provide additional documentation to receive payments in certain regions. If an Apple banking partner needs more documentation than what you provided, they’ll reach out to you directly. If you’d like us to verify the request from the Apple banking partner before you send them the requested documents, contact us. Note that Apple may also request additional information or documentation.

You must submit all required tax forms needed for your paid contract in order for us to process banking information.

Add banking information

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row and click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Bank Accounts, click Add Bank Account.
You may be prompted to provide a two-factor authentication verification code in order to proceed. Learn how to get a verification code.
Fill in the required fields and select the checkbox next to “I have read and agreed to the statement above.”
- Make sure to enter the name exactly as it appears on your bank account or your payment may be rejected.
- Click “Don’t know your ABA Routing Number?” to search by your bank’s name, city, or postal code to find and and select your bank. Not all branch locations are published in App Store Connect. Select a branch using the routing number for your bank account if your branch location isn’t listed.
- In the Bank Account Number field, enter the bank account number of the legal entity or individual enrolled in the Apple Developer Program.
- In the Account Holder Name field, enter the bank account holder’s name.
- In the IBAN field, enter your IBAN (International Bank Account Number) if applicable. An IBAN is used for payments to bank accounts in Europe and certain other regions.
- In the Bank Account Currency pop-up menu, choose the primary currency of the bank account to ensure successful payments.
Click Save.
- If you hold the Admin or Finance role and are trying to add banking information, the Account Holder will need to approve the information in App Store Connect before it’s processed.
Once your banking information is complete, it appears on the Banking tab. Depending on where your bank is located, there may be additional required fields.

Edit existing bank information

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

You may update your banking information at any time, unless the information you submitted is currently processing. Keep in mind that if you change your banking information, we may have already begun processing your payment for the fiscal month, so it may not be sent to your new bank account until a future payment.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
From the top navigation, click Banking.
Click the name of the bank account you want to edit.
You may be prompted to provide a two-factor authentication verification code in order to proceed. Learn how to get a verification code.
Make your edits, then select the checkbox next to “I have read and agreed to the statement above.”
Click Save.

Change your primary bank account

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

You can change your primary bank account at any time in App Store Connect. When making this change, keep in mind that we may have already started processing your payment for the fiscal month, so it may not be sent to your new bank account until a future payment.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, click “Paid Apps”.
Scroll down to the Bank Accounts section.
Next to your primary bank account, click Edit.
From the pop-up menu, choose Replace with New Account. If you'd like to change your primary bank account to a previously used account, choose Replace with Existing Account.
- You may be prompted to provide a two-factor authentication verification code in order to proceed. Learn how to get a verification code.
- If you hold the Admin or Finance role and are choosing Replace with New Account, the Account Holder will need to approve the new banking information in App Store Connect before the change is processed.

Approve a pending banking change

Required role: Account Holder. View role permissions.

If you’re the Account Holder for a team with multiple App Store Connect users, you'll need to approve the following banking information changes before they’re processed:

Adding a new bank account
Replacing a bank account
Editing an IBAN

When an Admin or Finance user initiates a change, the Account Holder receives an email asking them to review the updated information in App Store Connect.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab in the Paid Apps row, click Approve Bank Changes. You’ll be shown the proposed change.
Click Approve to authorize the change or click Reject to to deny the change.
After the Account Holder approves the change, it will be processed within 24 hours. If they reject the change, your bank account details will not be updated.

Property to edit	How to update
Account Holder Name Address Account Holder Type Bank Account Type Bank Account Currency IBAN¹ (if applicable), or other territory-specific information such as tax IDs or vendor contact information	Follow the steps in "Edit existing bank information."
Bank Territory Bank Code Bank Account Number	Follow the steps in “Change your primary bank account.”
Select another bank account that's already set up	Follow the steps in “Change your primary bank account.”

Property to edit

How to update

Account Holder Name

Address

Account Holder Type

Bank Account Type

Bank Account Currency

IBAN¹ (if applicable), or other territory-specific information such as tax IDs or vendor contact information

Follow the steps in "Edit existing bank information."

Bank Territory

Bank Code

Bank Account Number

Follow the steps in “Change your primary bank account.”

Select another bank account that's already set up

Follow the steps in “Change your primary bank account.”

¹If you hold the Admin or Finance role and are updating the IBAN, the Account Holder will need to approve the change in App Store Connect before it’s processed.

Can I receive payments to multiple banks?

No. You may only receive payments at one bank.

Why am I getting a “Please enter valid bank account number” error message?

If your bank account number has leading zeros, make sure you’ve included all leading zeros when entering your banking information. Your bank account number and your IBAN are two separate numbers. Make sure you haven’t entered your IBAN in the bank account number field.

Submit tax forms

Tax forms overview

In order to submit tax forms, you first need to sign the Paid Applications Agreement. The required tax forms will display, many of which can be submitted electronically.

Note: You can submit changes to your tax information by emailing vendortax@apple.com. We process all changes that we receive, and will notify you if there’s a question or concern. Please note that App Store Connect won’t show changes to tax forms sent to Apple. The tax information that you originally provided online will continue to display.

Form				Required
U.S. Tax Forms				Required for all developers. Go to Provide U.S. tax information.
Australia Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Australia or registered for Australian GST. Go to Provide Australia tax information.
Canada Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Canada or registered for Canadian GST/HST. Go to Provide Canada tax information.
Brazil Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Brazil. Optional for developers based outside of Brazil. Go to Provide Brazil tax information.
Taiwan Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Taiwan, or who file taxes in Taiwan. Go to Provide Taiwan tax information.
Korea Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Korea. Go to Provide Korea tax information.
Singapore Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Singapore. Go to Provide Singapore tax information.
Mexico Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Mexico or developers tax registered in Mexico. Go to Provide Mexico tax information.
Thailand Tax Forms				Required for developers based in Thailand. Go to Provide Thailand tax information.

Provide U.S. tax information

To meet the requirements of the Paid Applications Agreement, all developers must complete a U.S. tax form.

Depending on where your legal entity address is based, you'll be required to complete a U.S. tax form and any applicable certification in order for your agreement to go into effect. If you’re based in the United States, you’re prompted to complete a W-9 form. If you’re based outside the United States, the W-8BEN, W-8BEN-E, or W-8ECI may be required, but you'll be prompted to answer a series of questions to direct you to the most appropriate tax form and any applicable certification. If your tax form isn’t available to you in App Store Connect, contact us.

The U.S tax form section will display a field for a tax identification number. For an individual, this is either a Social Security Number (SSN) or an Individual Taxpayer Identification Number (ITIN). For a business entity, the taxpayer identification number is the Employer Identification Number (EIN). Learn more about tax identification numbers.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Add U.S. tax information

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Tax Forms, click Complete U.S. Tax Forms and follow the instructions.
The form or certification presented must be completed for your Paid Applications Agreement to go in effect.
Tip: Use the downloadable instructions and tip sheets near the top of the page to help you provide the right information for your W9, W-8BEN, or W-8BEN-E.
Verify that the information you entered if correct and complete, and then click Submit. Note: After you click Submit, you won’t be able to make changes to this form.

View and update U.S. tax information

To make updates to your U.S. tax information, contact us. Alternatively, you can download, complete, and sign your applicable tax form from the Internal Revenue Service website, and send it to Apple by email or mail.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
From the top menu bar, click the Tax tab.
The relevant tax form for United States will be displayed under Tax Forms. Depending on your circumstances, this may be a W-9, W-8BEN, or another form.
Find your applicable form from the Internal Revenue Service website.
Download, complete, and sign your tax form with your updated information.
Include a cover letter with the Apple ID that you use to sign in to App Store Connect, and mail or email the form to Apple.

Email	Mailing Address
vendortax@apple.com	Apple Inc. MS: 580-GL 12545 Riata Vista Circle Austin, TX 78727 USA

Keep in mind that the information you originally provided in App Store Connect will continue to display even after we have your updated information on file. We'll notify you if there's a question or concern with an updated form.

1099 Tax Forms

The Apple legal entities associated with each territory where content is sold will issue a 1099-K form to U.S.-based individuals or entities that meet the following requirements. Forms are mailed by January 31 of the following year:

Your unadjusted gross sales for the calendar year were at least $20,000 (the total amount of your sales, unadjusted for Apple’s commissions, fees, refunds, and other adjustments.)
More than 200 transactions were made in your apps during the calendar year.

Keep in mind that Apple won’t send a U.S. 1099-MISC tax form. Sales on the App Store are between you and the customer. You’re the seller of copyrighted works, and we make payments to you for products or goods, which are specifically exempt from reporting on Form 1099-MISC. This is true even though the payments may be reportable on Form 1099-K and may be taxable income to you.

Provide Australia tax information

If you’re based in Australia or registered for Australian GST, you’re required to complete Australian tax information. Although you may not be required to register for goods and services tax (GST) with the Australian government, Apple requires that Australia-based developers have a GST registration to sell apps.

To meet Apple’s tax requirements, you’ll need an electronic copy of your GST registration and evidence of your Australian Business Number (ABN). The evidence can be screenshots or PDF files of the ABN registration. Collect the current details with enough information to associate this ABN with the legal entity name you’ve given Apple and the historical details to show that the developer is registered for the GST.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Tax Forms, click Complete Australia Tax Forms.
Upload the file or files with ABN and GST registration evidence.
Enter your ABN.
Verify that the information you entered is correct, click Submit, then Done.

Once you submit this page, you won’t be able to make any changes in App Store Connect. For any corrections or additional tax forms, contact us.

Provide Canada tax information

If you’re based in Canada, you’re required to submit your Canadian GST/HST number (and QST number if based in Quebec). In accordance with Canadian law, your remittances for sales on the App Store in Canada will be reduced by the applicable Canadian GST/HST and QST/PST on Apple’s commission. A tax credit may be available for GST and QST. Apple will issue you a tax on commission invoice on a monthly basis, available in App Store Connect.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Submit Canadian tax information

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Tax Forms, click Complete Canada Tax Forms. If you’ve previously submitted tax information to Apple, click Update Information.
Complete the required information based on your region.
Verify that the information you entered is correct, then click Submit.

Your certification will complete Part 4 of the Quebec Form FP-2506-V, or part D of GST/HST Form 506. Apple will complete Part 5 or Part E respectively, and make the form available for you to download for your records.

Download tax on commission invoice

From the home page, click Payments and Financial Reports.
Select the fiscal month for the reports you want to download.
On the top right, click Create Reports.
Select Canada VAT on Commission from the menu.
Click Create Reports. A status bar shows progress as the reports are created.
When the reports are ready, a download link appears. Click Download Reports.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

Submit tax information if you’re registered in Canada, but based elsewhere

If you’re based outside of Canada, but registered in Canada, send either of the following forms to Apple:

GST506
Quebec Form FP 2506-V

Note that email is the preferred method.

Email	Mailing Address
vendortax@apple.com	iTunes K.K. c/o Apple Inc. MS: 580-GL 12545 Riata Vista Circle Austin, TX 78727-6524 USA

Mailing Address

vendortax@apple.com

iTunes K.K.

c/o Apple Inc.

MS: 580-GL

12545 Riata Vista Circle

Austin, TX 78727-6524

USA

Provide Brazil tax information

Brazilian tax information is required if you’re based in Brazil. You must provide either a CNPJ, a 14-digit number issued to companies or organizations, or a CPF, an 11-digit number issued to individuals. If you’re based outside of Brazil and have a CPF or CNPJ, this field is optional.

If you’re based outside of Brazil or the United States you also have the option to provide a local tax ID, a tax processing number issued to you by the tax authority in your country or region of residence. If you’re based in the United States, you won’t need to provide your U.S tax ID again, because you’ve already provided this information in the U.S Tax Forms section.

If you’re based outside of Brazil and your country or region of residence has a tax treaty agreement with Brazil, you may also upload your tax residency certificate. If you don’t provide a certificate, your sales in Brazil may be subject to the applicable withholding tax at the standard rate. If your region is denied under the Brazilian legislation, no reduced rate of withholding is available. Contact your tax authority if you have questions regarding how to obtain a tax residency certificate.

Your withholding tax rate won’t be reduced until your tax residency certificate is received and reviewed for applicable treaty benefits between Brazil and your country or region of residence. You can start selling content in Brazil (assuming you’ve submitted all required banking and tax information), but payments will be subject to the applicable withholding tax at the standard rate until your residency certificate is reviewed and tax rate benefits are confirmed.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Submit Brazilian tax information

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Tax Forms, click Complete Brazil Tax Forms.
Enter your Brazil Tax ID, Local ID, or upload your Tax Residency Certificate.
Ensure that all information is correct, then click Submit.

Once you submit this page, you won’t be able to make any changes in App Store Connect. For any corrections or additional tax forms, contact us.

Download tax withholding certificate

If you sell content on the App Store in Brazil, an annual withholding tax certificate can be downloaded in App Store Connect. If there are multiple vendor numbers associated with your account, you'll receive a withholding certificate for each vendor number.

To download your Brazil tax withholding certificate:

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
Click the Tax tab.
Scroll down to the Tax Statements section.
Next to your desired document, click the download button.

Download monthly tax withholding information

To download your monthly tax withholding information:

From the home page, click Payments and Financial Reports.
On the top right corner, click Create Reports.
Select Tax Statements from the menu.
Select the fiscal month for the report you would like to download.
Select Brazil from the list of countries or regions.
Select the checkbox next to the report or reports you would like to download.
Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.
When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

Provide Taiwan tax information

Taiwan tax forms are required if you’re based in Taiwan or if you have a Taiwan Tax Identification Number (TIN). If you don’t file taxes in Taiwan, Taiwanese tax forms aren’t required. Apple collects and remits taxes to the appropriate tax authorities in Taiwan, consistent with Schedule 2 of the Paid Applications Agreement. The amount of tax collected will differ depending on whether you have provided a TIN in App Store Connect. Your TIN is necessary to ensure that we’re calculating your proceeds correctly.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Tax Forms, click Complete Taiwan Tax Forms.
Under Taiwan Tax ID, choose either Company ID or Citizen ID, depending on whether you file taxes as an individual or an organization.
Enter the required information, then Save.

Once you submit this page, you won’t be able to make any changes in App Store Connect. For any corrections or additional tax forms, contact us.

Provide Korea tax information

Apple requires developers based in the Republic of Korea with an in-effect Paid Apps Agreement to have a Korean Business Registration Number (BRN) or a Registration Number with the Korean National Tax Service. Failure to provide this may result in a delay of payment on your earnings.

A standard BRN is generally used for organizations in the Republic of Korea, and a Registration Number with NTS may be used for nonprofit organizations. Consult with your tax advisor for information on the registration type appropriate for your business or organization.

You can also provide trade representative contact information to display on the Korean App Store in compliance with Korean e-commerce regulations. If you’re based in the Republic of Korea, the contact information includes your E-Commerce and Business Registration Numbers.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Field				Description
Trade Representative				Someone within your company or organization who has the authority to represent the organization, such as the CEO, Representative Director, or other responsible officer.
Trade Representative Contact Information				If provided, this contact information is displayed on the App Store in the Republic of Korea.
E-Commerce Registration Number				A registration number issued by the government of the Republic of Korea for companies doing business on the Internet. ¹
Registration Number with Korean National Tax Service (NTS)				A registration number issued by the Korean National Tax service to nonprofit organizations based in the Republic of Korea.¹

¹This property appears only for organizations based in the Republic of Korea.

Enter your Korean tax information

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Tax Forms, click Complete Republic of Korea Tax Forms.
Enter your Korean tax information.
Click Submit.

Edit your Korean tax information

If your tax information expires or changes, you can edit it at any time in App Store Connect.

From the App Store Connect home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Tax tab, under the Tax Forms section, click Republic of Korea Tax Information.
Review or edit your information.
Click Submit.

Provide Singapore tax information

Developers based in Singapore are required to either provide a Singapore GST Registration number in App Store Connect, or indicate a non-registered status for Singapore GST.

If you do not provide a Singapore GST Registration Number or indicate non-registered status, Apple’s commissions earned in relation to your sales on apps and in-app purchases on the App Store in Singapore will be considered taxable under the Singapore GST Act. Completing Singapore tax forms in App Store Connect are required to ensure your proceeds are calculated correctly.

Note: Singapore GST registration number is different from a Singapore Tax ID. For more information about Singapore GST registration, consult your tax advisor or visit the IRAS website.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Enter your Singapore registration number

From the App Store Connect home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under the Tax Forms section, click Complete Singapore Tax Forms.
In the pop up window, indicate whether you have a Singapore GST Registration Number. If you select Yes, you’ll be prompted to enter your number.
Click Submit.

Update your Singapore tax registration status

You can update your Singapore tax registration status at any time in App Store Connect. Your status will be reflected in the same month’s earnings if the update is made before the end of the fiscal month, otherwise your status will be updated for the following month’s earnings.

Note: Apple’s fiscal month may not align exactly with the calendar month.

From the App Store Connect home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Tax tab, under the Tax Forms section, click Singapore Tax Forms.
Update your Singapore GST Registration status.
Click Submit.

View GST adjustments on your account

App Store Connect shows the value of GST adjustments applied to your account, along with any other adjustments that apply in the territories where you sell your app. The adjustment will be displayed in the territory currency. This report is available beginning with your February 2020 earnings.

From the home page, click Payments and Financial Reports.
Select the fiscal month for the reports you want to download.
In the top-right corner, click Create Reports.
Select “Singapore GST on Commission,” from the menu.
Click Create Reports. A status bar shows progress as the reports are created.
When the reports are ready, a download link appears. Click Download Reports.

Tax documents for Irish entities

Apple Distribution International Limited has exporter status under Irish VAT law and is entitled to purchase from entities based in Ireland with no charge of Irish VAT. The current Apple Distribution International Limited authorization from the Revenue Commissioners in this regard is available to you:

Form VAT 56B for 2015 and later
Pre-2015 Form VAT 56B

Provide Mexico tax information

All sales on the App Store in Mexico are subject to a value-added tax (VAT).

Apple will collect and remit the VAT directly to the tax authority in Mexico if you’re one of the developers listed below. No action is required on your part.

Individuals based in Mexico or outside of Mexico who aren’t tax registered
Companies based outside of Mexico that aren’t tax registered

Apple will collect and remit the VAT to you if you’re one of the developers listed below. You’ll then need to remit the VAT in the appropriate manner to the tax authority in Mexico and submit your Clave en el RFC and Cédula de Identificación Fiscal in App Store Connect. Tax-registered individuals also need to submit their Clave Única de Registro de Población.

Tax-registered individuals based in Mexico or outside of Mexico
Tax-registered companies based outside of Mexico
All companies based in Mexico

If you’re based in Mexico, a withholding income tax and VAT on Apple’s commission may also apply, as described below. Where applicable, a VAT invoice on Apple’s commission and withholding income tax statement will be issued on a monthly basis.

Companies: You’re required to submit your Clave en el RFC and Cédula de Identificación Fiscal. Your earnings are reduced based on the VAT on Apple’s commission, for which you may be able to receive an input tax credit.
Tax-registered individuals: You’re required to submit your Clave en el RFC, Clave Única de Registro de Población, and Cédula de Identificación Fiscal. Your earnings will be reduced by the VAT on Apple’s commission, for which you may be able to receive an input tax credit, and withholding income tax on your total monthly worldwide sales before VAT.
Non-tax-registered individuals: Your earnings will be reduced by the VAT on Apple’s commission, for which you may be able to receive an input tax credit, and withholding income tax on your total monthly worldwide sales before VAT.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Enter your Mexican tax information

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under the Tax Forms section, click Complete Mexico Tax Forms.
Complete the tax registration form.
Click Submit.

Edit your Mexican tax information

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Tax tab, under the Tax Forms section, click Mexico Tax Information.
Review or edit your information.
Click Submit.

Download tax withholding information

Monthly tax certificates and invoices for your sales on the App Store in Mexico, including Mexico VAT on Commission Invoice, Mexico Withholding IT Certificate, and Mexico Withholding VAT Certificate, are available for download in Payments and Financial Reports.

To download your monthly tax withholding information:

From the home page, click Payments and Financial Reports.
Select the fiscal month for the reports you want to download.
On the top right corner, click Create Reports.
Select the relevant option(s) from the menu.
Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.
When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

Provide Thailand tax information

If you’re based in Thailand, you’re required to submit Thailand tax information to Apple. Optionally, you can submit a value-added tax (VAT) registration number, as well.

You're not required to submit a VAT registration number if you’re not registered for VAT in Thailand, but if you don't provide it, your proceeds for sales on the App Store in Thailand will be reduced by a 7% value-added tax (VAT) on Apple’s commission. The tax will appear on your tax on commission invoice in the Payments and Financial Reports section on App Store Connect. If you choose to submit a VAT registration number, you won't be subject to this tax.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Submit Thailand tax information

From the home page, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
On the Agreements tab, find the Paid Apps row, then click Set Up Tax and Banking.
Under Tax Forms, click Complete Thailand Tax Forms. If you’ve previously submitted tax information to Apple, click Thailand Tax Information.
You’ll be asked if you have a Thailand VAT registration number. Select Yes or No.
- If you select No, you’ll be returned to the Agreements page, and your Thailand tax form will be considered complete. You can add a VAT registration number to this form anytime in the future.
- If you select Yes, enter your VAT registration number, verify that the information you entered is correct, then click Submit.

Download tax on commission invoice

From the home page, click Payments and Financial Reports.
On the top right, click Create Reports.
Select the fiscal month for the reports you want to download.
Select Thailand VAT on Commission from the menu.
Click Create Reports. A status bar shows progress as the reports are created.
When the reports are ready, a download link appears. Click Download Reports.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

Manage invoices

Developers may have different invoicing requirements in accordance with local laws and statutes. Consult with your own legal and tax advisors with respect to any invoice requirements you’re subject to.

Invoicing for Irish developers

Apple requires hard copy invoices from Ireland VAT-registered developers who sell in Europe through Apple Distribution International Limited.

All invoices for GBP and EUR sales must be stated at 0% VAT.
When sending your hard copy, make sure that the billing address stated on the invoice is Ireland and that the invoice is sent to Ireland.

Send invoices to:	Billing address
App Store Invoicing Apple Operations Europe Apple Distribution International Limited Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill Cork, Ireland	Apple Distribution International Limited Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill Cork, Ireland TVA/VAT No.: IE9700053D

Send invoices to:

Billing address

App Store Invoicing

Apple Operations Europe

Apple Distribution International Limited

Hollyhill Industrial Estate

Hollyhill

Cork, Ireland

Apple Distribution International Limited Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill Cork, Ireland TVA/VAT No.: IE9700053D

Recipient-created tax invoices

Developers registered in Australia for AU GST who have provided an ABN have the option to download recipient-created tax invoices for earnings on the App Store in Australia. Download of these invoices is not required in order to receive payment.

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Agreements, Tax, and Banking.
From the menu bar, click Invoices.
In the invoices section, locate the invoice you wish to download.
On the right-hand side, click Download.

Tax on commission invoices

Tax on commission invoices are available in relation to commissions paid by Japan-based, Thailand-based, or Canada-based developers to their local country storefront. You'll only receive a tax on commission invoice if you have sales on your local country’s storefront.

Download of this invoice is not required to receive payment.

To download your tax on commission invoice, if applicable:

From the App Store Connect homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.
Select the fiscal month for the reports you want to download.
On the top right corner, click Create Reports.
Select the relevant VAT on Commission report from the menu.
Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.
When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.

Getting Paid

Getting paid overview

In order to receive payment from Apple for proceeds for your app or in-app purchase, you must meet the following requirements:

Have a Paid Applications Agreement in effect. Learn more.
Provide banking information in App Store Connect. Payments are sent to the primary bank account on file at the time a payment is processed. Payments to multiple or split bank accounts aren't supported. Learn more.
Exceed the minimum monthly payment threshold for each country or region in which you sell content.
Complete any monthly invoicing requirements you’re subject to based on your country or region. Learn more.

If you meet those requirements, payments are made to the bank account and the currency you provided within 45 days of the last day of the fiscal month in which the transaction was completed.

All payments are made by direct deposit or electronic funds transfer (EFT.) Note that when available, payments are sent via a low-value transfer as opposed to a high-value wire transfer. Apple's bank will consolidate proceeds for each currency in which you have sales on the App Store, resulting in a single payment to your bank each fiscal month. Payments may be subject to bank fees and transaction costs charged by your bank or intermediate financial institutions, reducing the amount that's deposited in your bank account.

Use the Payments and Financial Reports section of App Store Connect to view your payments owed, amounts paid to you, exchange rates applied, and more. You can also download financial reports, which are made available for the previous fiscal month’s earnings by the end of the current fiscal month.

Financial reports show payments made to you based on closed transactions and finalized proceeds using the Apple fiscal calendar. Reports only include paid transactions where we are able to collect payment from the customer (view Schedule 2 of your Apple Developer Agreement).

What is the exchange rate applied to my payments?

Our bank converts payment amounts into the currency of your bank account. The exchange rate is established by our bank and, due to Apple's volume, is generally a more favorable rate than used by your local bank. The rates are typically the spot rate on the date of payment and no more than three business days prior to the date the proceeds are received into your account.

Why am I not receiving financial report notifications?

If financial reports are available for your account and you have not been receiving the related email notifications, confirm that your user profile is set up to receive financial report notifications. If these items are set up correctly, check your email client and/or spam filter to make sure the email address do-not-reply@apple.com is not being blocked.

Additional information

If you have a Nepal-based bank account, your payments from Apple will be subject to a 1% advance income tax, deducted from your payment by the local correspondent bank and settled with the local tax authority in Nepal. Apple is not responsible for deducting or remitting this tax to the local tax authority.

See alsoSet email notifications

View payments and proceeds

Payments and Financial Reports displays a summary of your proceeds for the current fiscal month, and information on sales of your apps and in-app purchases.

You can also view detailed information for each territory, such as the number of units sold, the amount earned in that territory's currencies, taxes, and adjustments, the exchange rate applied to the payment, and the total proceeds owed to you displayed in the currency of your bank account.

Proceeds are the amount you'll receive on sales of your apps and in-app purchases. This is the Customer Price minus applicable taxes and Apple’s commission, per Schedule 2 of your Paid Applications Agreement.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

View payments and estimated proceeds

At the top of the page, either your total estimated proceeds, or the amount paid for that period will display. The amount displayed depends on the month selected, and whether payment for that month has been received.

Payment. If payment has been received, the name of your bank and the last four digits of the account will be displayed under the payment amount. The amount displayed is in your bank account currency.
The date displayed will reflect the date payment was issued. There is also a Transaction ID, a unique seven-digit payment reference number. This may also be referred to as a Consolidated Credit Identifier (CCI). The CCI number is included as a reference in the additional text provided with the payment transfer details to your bank. If you have questions about a payment, it’s helpful to have the CCI number available when you contact Apple.
Total Estimated Proceeds. If payment hasn’t yet been received for the month you’re viewing, an estimate of your proceeds in your bank account currency will display. This is a consolidated amount owed to you, as of the current date. The actual amount you actually receive may be different. Differences are generally due to changes in the foreign exchange rate by the time of payment, and any applicable withholding tax, which is applied when the payment is made.

Estimated proceeds may display if one of the following has occurred:

Expected Payment Date Has Not Yet Occurred. Payment will be dispersed on the date shown in Payments and Financial Reports.
Balance Carried Forward. Minimum payment threshold has not yet been met, meaning your proceeds will carry over to the next payment period.
Payment Returned. If payment was unsuccessful, your action may be needed. Learn how to resolve issues in returned payments.

View a previous month’s proceeds

From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.
In the center, click the month.
From the pop-up menu, use the arrows to select a month.

View your vendor number

You can view your vendor number at any time in App Store Connect. Vendor numbers are needed for downloading reports using the App Store Connect API.

From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.
Your vendor number appears in the top left hand corner under your legal entity name.

Important: Keep in mind that the payment amount that's displayed in App Store Connect represents the amount we've sent to your bank. However, the amount you receive may vary depending on bank fees and transaction costs deducted by your bank or intermediate financial institutions. Learn more.

View proceeds from a different legal entity name or vendor number

The menu at the top left lists legal entity names and associated vendor numbers or revenue streams that have been reported to or paid.

Multiple vendor numbers appearing in the menu indicates that more than one legal entity or revenue stream has been associated with your App Store Connect account. There may be a few reasons why multiple vendor numbers are listed:

You changed your legal entity name. If you updated your legal entity name, the new legal entity name will be assigned a new and unique vendor number that is different than the vendor number assigned to your old legal entity name. Both vendor numbers will be listed so you can view reports for the two legal entities.
You publish content on Apple News+ or Apple Arcade. If you recently linked your Apple News channel or added Apple Arcade apps to your App Store Connect account and set up tax and banking information, a new and unique vendor number will be assigned to those agreements.

To view proceeds from a different legal entity name or vendor number:

From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.
From the top left, click the arrow next to your vendor name.
Choose from the pop-up menu to view reports for other legal entities. When selecting a vendor number from the menu, the page will update to reflect the financial activity of the assigned entity.

Resolve a returned payment error

If your bank returns a payment to us, we’ll show you an alert where your proceeds are displayed and also on the App Store Connect homepage, along with the reason the payment was returned, and the bank reference number. You can also opt in to receive email notifications for returned payments.

Payment Returned alerts will include the following:

Reason. This will let you know why your payment was returned. If our own bank doesn’t have any information about why your payment was returned, we’ll share whatever information we received from your bank.
Required Adjustment. This will include information on how to fix the problem, or information you’ll need to know to follow up with your bank.
Often this issue can be resolved by going to Agreements, Tax, and Banking and updating your banking information. If you continue to receive Payment Returned alerts after you’ve confirmed that your banking information is correct, contact your bank to resolve the issue.
Transaction ID. This is a seven-digit payment identifier our bank sends your bank any time we try to make a payment. The bank payment reference number can help your bank identify the attempted payment and explain how to solve the issue so we can send payments to your account. It may also be referred to as a Consolidated Credit Identifier (CCI).

Once you make all necessary updates, the system will automatically reattempt payment during the next monthly payment processing period. The Payment Returned alert will display until the issue is resolved and we’re able to successfully make a payment to you.

If you've confirmed that your bank account information in App Store Connect is correct, reach out to your bank to resolve why they're not accepting our payments. Use the Transaction ID presented to assist your bank in finding the returned payment.

See alsoView payment information

Download financial reports

Financial reports show your monthly proceeds, as well as final unit sales by territory and order type. They’re automatically generated once a month, based on Apple’s fiscal calendar, and are only generated if there are purchases or refunds during that fiscal period.

Reports can be manually downloaded from App Store Connect. Learn how to download sales and financial reports using the App Store Connect API.

There are four types of reports available.

All Countries or Regions (Detailed)

This detailed financial report covers all locations in which you have sales on the App Store and includes the transaction and settlement dates for purchases. It’s available once all respective individual currency reports are available, starting with your March 2020 report.

All Countries or Regions (Single File)

This consolidated financial report covers all locations in which you have sales on the App Store, and is based on processed and settled transactions during the Apple fiscal month. It’s available once all respective individual currency reports are available, starting with your March 2020 report.

All Countries or Regions (Multiple Files)

Separate financial reports cover each location in which you have sales on the App Store and are based on processed and settled transactions during the Apple fiscal month. If you change the location where your products are available for sale, the number of reports you receive may increase or decrease accordingly. The number of reports may also increase as we introduce new currencies to customers on the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or Finance. View role permissions.

Download and view Financial reports from App Store Connect

From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.
In the top-right corner, click Create Reports.
Select the fiscal month for the report you would like to download.
Select which locations you would like to include in your report. By default, this is set to All Countries or Regions (Multiple Files).
Note: When All Territories is selected, an App Store Connect user can only download the reports for which they have access.
Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.
When reports are ready, a download link will be provided. Click Download Reports.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.
Open the extracted tab-delimited text (.txt) file in a spreadsheet application.

Download and view reports for Windows users

If you are using Microsoft Windows, you may need to take additional steps to open your financial reports.

From the homepage, click Payments and Financial Reports.
In the top-right corner, click Create Reports.
Select the fiscal month for the report you would like to download.
Click Create Reports. A status bar will display showing progress of your reports being created.
When the reports are ready, click Download Reports.
Unzip the compressed GZIP (.gz) file by opening it or using a utility.
Once extracted, you’ll have a tab-delimited text file (xxx.txt). If your system doesn’t know how to open it, a dialog with a list of applications to choose from will display. Select WinZip or a WinZip-equivalent application to extract the file.
Launch Microsoft Excel.
From the File menu in Excel, choose Open and the file name. The Import Wizard will start.
In the Original data type box, select Delimited and click Next.
In the Delimiters box, select Tab and click Next.
Select the columns titled UPC, ISRC, and Vendor Identifier by holding the shift key and clicking the top of each column. Once selected, in the top-right Column Data Format box, choose Text. The label above those three columns will change from General to Text.
Click Finish.
Once the file has opened, save it as an Excel Workbook.

Configure App Store features

Sell app bundles

Create and submit an app bundle

App bundles make it easy for you to group up to 10 of your apps together in a single download. Apps in a bundle must be either all paid or all free. A paid app bundle can only include paid apps and must be offered at a reduced price. Each app in a free app bundle must be free and offer an auto-renewable subscription that allows the user to subscribe to and access content or services in all apps of the bundle. Customers buy the bundle with a single tap and the individual apps appear on their device. Customers who previously purchased one or more apps in an app bundle can use the Complete My Bundle feature and the bundle price will be adjusted to account for those previous purchases.

All apps in a bundle must support the same platform as the first app you add to the bundle, called the primary app.

If the primary app supports more than one platform, you can add an app that supports all of the same platforms (or more) and/or an app that supports only one of the platforms. However, if you add an app that supports only one of the shared platforms, all apps added after that must include that platform. Additionally, apps that support tvOS only cannot be part of a bundle.

Learn how to set up app bundles and effectively market them on your product page.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Create an app bundle

In My Apps, click the Add button (+) next to Apps and select “New App Bundle."
In the Name field, enter a unique name for the app bundle.
Under Apps in This Bundle, click the Add button (+) next to the apps you want to add to the bundle.
An app can be added to a bundle if it's in the Ready for Sale, Removed from Sale, or Developer Removed for Sale state. The first app you select to be part of the bundle is called the primary app. Some app bundle information is determined based on the primary app in the bundle.
On the top right, click Create.
Later, the app bundle will appear on your My Apps page.
Under Bundle Information, enter the required app bundle information and click Save.

Submit an app bundle for review

In My Apps, select your app bundle from the list.
On the top right, click Submit for Review. The app bundle status changes to Waiting for Review and when the review process starts, the app status changes to In Review. After the app bundle is approved, you can’t add or remove apps from the bundle.

The app bundle status changes to Waiting for Review and when the review process starts, the app status changes to In Review. After the app bundle is approved, you can’t add or remove apps from the bundle.

Remove an app bundle from review

From My Apps, select the app bundle.
On the top right, click Remove from Review. The app bundle will be removed from Apple’s review queue and the app status will change to Developer Rejected.

The app bundle will be removed from Apple’s review queue and the app status will change to Developer Rejected.

Edit app bundle information

You can edit which apps belong to your app bundle only until the app bundle is approved. If your app bundle has been submitted to App Review, remove the app bundle from review to make changes.

If you make changes to an app bundle that has already been approved by App Review, some edits may need additional review. You can make the following changes without needing additional review:

Rearrange the apps in the bundle
Edit the bundle description and marketing URL
Change the primary language of the bundle
Change pricing and availability
Use an automatically generated app bundle icon

These edits will require the app bundle to be reviewed again:

Add localizations
Changes to an existing app bundle name or a custom app bundle icon

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Edit app bundle information

From My Apps, select your app bundle.
Under App Information, edit the name, description, or marketing URL.
To add, delete, or reorder the apps in the bundle, click the Edit button next to Apps in This Bundle.
Adding, deleting and rearranging the apps in the bundle will update the derived information once those changes have been saved.
Under Availability and Price, change the price or edit clearances.
On the top right, click Save.

Add custom app bundle icon

You can create a custom icon for your bundle in place of the icon generated automatically. If your app bundle currently has an automatically generated icon, you can submit a custom icon at any time, but it will need to go through App Review before it will be displayed on the App Store.

From My Apps, select your app bundle.
Select your app bundle from the list.
Scroll down to the General Information section.
Drag the icon to the well, and in the upper right corner, click Save.
The specifications for a custom app bundle icon are the same as for an App Store icon. Follow the Human Interface Guidelines when creating your app icons.

Remove custom app bundle icon

You can choose to delete your custom icon at any time and your bundle will revert back to the automatically generated icon.

From My Apps, select your app bundle.
Scroll down to the General Information section.
Hold the pointer over the icon that you want to delete, and click on the Delete button (–).

To change a property of derived metadata, edit the app information for the primary app. The app bundle metadata will be updated automatically when you make changes to the app’s information. Alternatively, choose a different primary app for the app bundle.

Set availability for an app bundle

After you have submitted an app bundle for App Review and it has been approved, it will automatically become available for sale when all of the apps it contains are available and all other requirements are met.

In order to be available, app bundles must meet the following requirements:

Apps in the bundle must be either all paid or all free. A paid app bundle can only include paid apps and must be offered at a reduced price. Each app in a free app bundle must be free and offer at least one auto-renewable subscription.
Paid app bundles must be sold at a reduced price, which is a price tier less than the sum total of the individual app prices in the bundle.
A paid app bundle’s price must not be lower than the highest app price in the bundle. If an app in the bundle goes to a price that is higher than the price of the bundle, the bundle will automatically be removed from the store.
There are no bundle-specific territory settings. An app bundle will be live only where all member apps have common territories.
Only ten bundles can be marked as cleared for sale at any time per developer account. If you have ten bundles marked cleared for sale, you can create additional bundles, but you can’t check Cleared for Sale for an additional bundle unless you first uncheck it from another bundle.
A single app can be in no more than three cleared-for-sale bundles at one time.

View an app bundle’s availability

While an app bundle can have the status Ready for Sale, it might not be available on the App Store. You can check its availability from the app bundle page.

From My Apps, select your app bundle.
If the app bundle is not available, a warning message appears at the top of the page. The message states the reasons that the app bundle is not available, such as incompatible pricing.
Under Availability and Price, view the reason your app bundle might not be available in a specific territory.
For example, this section might show that the number of territories is 0.
To view the territory details, click the number of territories on the top right.
The reason the app bundle isn’t available in a territory appears in the Reason column.

Remove an app bundle from sale

After an app bundle is approved, it can’t be deleted, but it can be removed from the App Store.

From My Apps, select your app bundle.
In the Availability and Price section, uncheck Cleared for Sale.

Use promo codes

Promo codes overview

Promo codes provide potential customers or reviewers with a free copy of apps or in-app purchases (including subscriptions) on iOS, macOS, or tvOS. Promo codes can be redeemed on any App Store storefront where your app is available and are valid for four weeks from the day they’re generated. Each promo code can be used once.

You can distribute promo codes by any means. Purchases made using promo codes are indicated in your Sales and Trends reports.

Promo codes for apps

When a customer downloads an app using a promo code, the app behaves just as it would if it had been purchased. For example, the customer has the opportunity to update to new versions of the app. However, customers can’t rate or review the app. Promo codes can be used to redeem an unreleased app version, as long as the app is available on the App Store. Promo codes for tvOS or multi-platform apps must be redeemed on an iOS device. After the code is redeemed, the tvOS app appears in the customer’s purchase history on the App Store for Apple TV. You can request up to 100 promo codes per version of each platform your app supports.

Promo codes for in-app purchases

When a customer redeems an in-app purchase promo code for a free app that’s not installed on their device, the app automatically downloads. If the app is for sale, the customer needs to purchase the app to redeem the in-app purchase. If a customer uses a promo code to subscribe to an auto-renewable subscription, the subscription won’t automatically renew after the duration is complete. You can provide up to 100 promo codes for each in-app purchase product, with a limit of 1,000 total codes for all in-app purchases for an app every six months (resetting on January 1 and July 1). These codes are for non-commercial use and expire 28 days after they were generated.

See alsoManage promo codes

Manage promo codes

You can request up to 100 promo codes for every version of each platform of your app, or for your in-app purchases.

To request promo codes for an app version, the version’s status must be Ready for Sale, Pre-Order Ready for Sale, or Pending Developer Release for iOS and macOS apps, or Ready for Sale or Pre-Order Ready for Sale for tvOS apps. For in-app purchases, the in-app purchase state must be Approved or it won't appear as an option.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Request promo codes

From My Apps, select your app.
Click the Services tab.
In the sidebar, click Promo Codes. The Promo Code page opens with Generate selected.
Under App Promo Codes, enter the number of version promo codes and under In-App Purchase Promo Codes, enter the number of in-app purchase promo codes you want to generate.
On the top right, click Generate Code.
Read and agree to the contract terms for Apple to distribute free versions of your app or in-app purchase, and click Generate Code.
Click OK. You can view or download the generated promo codes on the History tab.

View history of promo codes

On the Promo Code page for your app, click History.
The history table shows the date each set of codes was generated in App Store Connect. Use this date to determine the expiration date of your codes.
Click View Codes to view or download generated promo codes.
You can copy the codes in the dialog, or click “text file“ to download a .txt file containing the codes.

See alsoPromo codes overview

Offer in-app events

In-app events overview

In-app events are timely events within apps and games — such as game competitions, movie premieres, live-streamed experiences, and more. Customers can discover your in-app events right on the App Store on iOS and iPadOS, giving you an entirely new way to showcase your events and expand their reach.

On iOS 15 and iPadOS 15 and later, in-app events appear across the App Store as event cards that include images or video, the event name, and a short description. Customers can tap to open an event details page, which provides a more immersive experience with a longer event description and notes if an in-app purchase or subscription is required to participate. Customers can opt in on the event card and event details page to receive a notification from the App Store when your event starts.

Customers who don’t have your app or game can download it directly from your in-app event card or event details page. Once downloaded, they can tap Open to be seamlessly directed to the appropriate area within your app or game.

In-app events appear:

On your product page, which displays all of your currently published events.
In search results. When users search for an app, the event card appears along with your app for users who have downloaded your app, while screenshots show for those who haven’t downloaded your app. Users can also search for in-app events directly. When users search for an event, the event card appears along with your app.
In editorially curated selections and personalized recommendations on the Today, Games, and Apps tabs.

iPhone screens showing the event card on the product page and event details

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

See alsoIn-App Events

Create an in-app event

You can have up to 10 approved in-app events per app in App Store Connect. A total of five per app can be published at a time, regardless of region.

Learn how to create a high-quality event.

Learn how to create in-app event using the App Store Connect API.

From the left sidebar under Features, click In-App Events.
Click Create In-App Event.
Choose a reference name. This name identifies your event in App Store Connect and is not visible on the App Store. Each name must be unique and can be up to 64 characters long.
Click Create.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Manage your events

Edit event details

You can edit the details of your in-app event before submitting to review. If the event is approved, you can edit the region availability and priority, as well as the start time, end time, and publish date (if they’re in the future).

From the left sidebar under Features, click In-App Events.
Select your event from the list.
Edit your event details and click Save.
Note: If your event is Waiting for Review or In Review you’ll need to remove it from review in order to edit any details except for Country or Region Availability.

Archive an event

Once an event ends, you can archive it in all locations, or only in specific locations. Users will no longer be able to access the event details page through the Event Deep Link. You can access your archived events at any time in the Archived section of your events list.

From the left sidebar under Features, click In-App Events.
Scroll down to Past Events.
Select your event from the list.
Scroll to the bottom of the page.
Click Archive Event.

Delete an event

Events can be deleted when they’re in Drafts, Archived, or Approved states. Deleting an event will remove it from your list of events and you won’t be able to access it again.

From the left sidebar under Features, click In-App Events.
Scroll down to Past Events.
Select your event from the list.
Scroll to the bottom of the page.
Click Delete Event.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Configure event details

Once you’ve created an in-app event and chosen a reference name, you’ll need to enter details and upload media used for the event card and event details page. You can also add localizations to your event.

Learn how to manage in-app event metadata using the App Store Connect API.

Enter event information

From the left sidebar under Features, click In-App Events.
Select your event from the list.
Enter an event name to appear on the App Store. It can be up to 30 characters.
Enter a short description to appear on your event card in places like the Today tab and Search. It can be up to 50 characters.
Enter a long description that will appear on your event details page when users tap your event card. It can be up to 120 characters.
Upload media for your event card and event details page. Make sure all media follows the in-app event media specifications.
Choose a badge that best fits the type of event you’re offering to display above the title on the event card and event details page.
Add localizations for your event by choosing the primary language to display the language pop-up menu. Learn about localizing App Store information.

Select country or region availability

Country or region availability controls where your event appears. The default selection will be all storefronts, but please note that your event’s availability will be determined by your app’s availability. You can select the date and time your event first becomes discoverable to users, as well as the date and time the event starts and ends.

From the left sidebar under Features, click In-App Events.
Select your event from the list.
Scroll down to the Country or Region Availability section.
Select a start and end date and time. You can choose any date in the future for the start time. The end date can be a maximum of 31 days from the start date. Events must be at least 15 minutes long.
Select a publish start date and time. The publish date is when your event will become discoverable on the App Store and can be a maximum of 14 days in advance.

Customize event start dates and times

The Customize Dates and Times option allows you to select different start times in one or more countries or regions. If you choose to start your event on different days in different locations, all of your event start dates must be within 48 hours of each other.

From the left sidebar under Features, click In-App Events.
Select your event from the list.
In the Country or Region Availability section, click Customize Dates and Times.
Select the locations you want to edit, and click Next.
Enter the start date and time. Use the Time Zone toggle on the top right to choose a time zone.
Click Done.
To customize more regions, click the add button (+) next to Customize Dates and Times.
Select the locations you want to edit, and click Next.
Enter the start date and time.
Click Done.

Add additional information

Provide an event deep link. This link takes users who tap Open on the in-app event card or details page to the event content within your app. This can be a universal link (recommended for security) or custom URL. Avoid using URL shorteners and other services that add unnecessary redirects. Test the deep link to make sure it directs to the proper destination within your app — for example, you can paste your URL into the Notes app and tap it. Learn about configuring universal links.
Select the general purpose of your event to help make sure your event reaches the most relevant users on the App Store.
Select the priority for your event. Events appear chronologically on the product page based on start time, with the soonest start time displaying first. If you designate an event as High Priority, it will appear ahead of Normal Priority events.
Indicate if an in-app purchase is required to participate in the event, as this information is shown on your event details page. For subscription apps, you only need to indicate that an in-app purchase is required when there’s an additional cost for the event specifically — for example, a pay-per-view event in a subscription app that requires an in-app purchase in addition to the standard subscription.
Choose your event’s primary language. This will be the default language that displays to users if your event isn’t localized for their device’s language.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Submit an event for review

Before you can publish your in-app event on the App Store, you’ll need to submit your event details and event page media for review. Make sure all the required event details are complete before submitting for review. Submitting an in-app event for review doesn’t require a new binary submission. Events that are submitted on their own will be associated with the Ready for Sale version of the app. Events that are submitted with an app update will be associated with the updated version of the app.

Submit an event for review

From My Apps, select your app from the list.
In the left sidebar, click In-App Events.
Select your event from the list.
On the top right, click Add for Review. The in-app event status changes to Ready for Review.
The submission confirmation screen shows the app version that will be associated with the in-app event, and the items that will be reviewed. You may choose to add other items to the submission.
Click Submit to App Review

View the status of an event

From My Apps, select your app from the list.
In the left sidebar, click In-App Events. A list of your events organized by status will be displayed.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

See alsoIn-app event statuses

Optimize your app’s product page

Product page optimization overview

You can optimize the product page for your iOS or iPadOS app’s product page by comparing different app icons, screenshots, and app previews to test which resonate most with customers. Test up to three different treatments against your original product page to determine which gets the best results. Each treatment will be randomly shown to a percentage of eligible users that you set, and can be localized in as many languages as your app supports. View results in App Analytics and make the top-performing assets the ones that will display to all customers.

The methodology for determining the treatment that’s best at driving app engagement is based on the estimated lift in conversion rate, as well as algorithms that provide confidence in the reliability of the test results. For details on analytics, visit View product page optimization results.

Note: Your app’s status must be Ready for Sale in order for its product page to be tested. If you submit a new app version while a test is running, the test will automatically stop. Product page optimization tests aren't available for custom product pages or for product pages on the App Store for Apple Watch or iMessage.

Treatments are shown to users on the App Store on iOS 15 and iPadOS 15, or later.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Create a test

Product page optimization tests are configured in App Store Connect. For information about how to design tests, visit Enhancing Your Product Page.

In the left sidebar under Features, click Product Page Optimization.
If you haven’t created a test before, click Create Test. Otherwise, click the add button (+) next to Product Page Optimization.
Enter a reference name to help you identify the test when monitoring results in App Analytics.
Choose the number of treatments you want to create. You can have up to three treatments per test. Please note that the more treatments you add to a test, the longer the test may take to reach a conclusive result.
Choose a traffic proportion. This is the percentage of users that will be randomly shown a test treatment instead of your original product page. For example, if a test has three treatments and you choose a 30% traffic proportion, each treatment will be shown to 10% of the total traffic.
Select the localizations you want to include in your test. By default, all localizations that your app supports are selected. If the localization shown to a user is excluded from your test, the user won’t be included in the test.
To view how long it might take to reach your goal, click the arrow next to Estimate Your Test Duration and choose your desired improvement in conversion rate. We use your app’s existing performance data, such as daily impressions and new downloads, to generate this estimate. The estimated duration and impressions needed will appear. This estimate is provided as a guide and won’t impact the test. A test runs for 90 days or until you manually stop it within that time. Please note that it may not be possible to reach your desired improvement in conversion rate within 90 days.
Click Create Test.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Configure test treatments

By default, test treatments are copies of your app’s original product page. You can edit the app icon, screenshots, and previews of each treatment. If you choose not to edit one of these items, the metadata from your original product page will display for that item.

Before testing, all of the metadata in your test treatments must be approved. You can submit this metadata without submitting a new version of your app. However, any app icons you want to use must be included in the app binary for the version of your app currently on the App Store, and that app must use an SDK that supports alternate icons in asset catalogs.

If you’re simply changing the order of screenshots or previews that are already on the App Store, or only modifying the app icon, your metadata is already approved and you don’t need to resubmit.

App Store Connect will display your original product page and the test version of your product page.

Note: Product page optimization tests aren't available for custom product pages or for product pages on the App Store for Apple Watch or iMessage.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Product Page Optimization.
The default treatment names are Treatment A, Treatment B, and Treatment C. Treatment names are only visible to you in App Store Connect and help you identify treatments in App Analytics. Next to the treatment name you want to edit, click Edit Name.
Enter a treatment name, then click OK.
Click the App Icon tab, which displays if your app binary includes more than one icon. Any app icons you want to use must be included in the app binary for the version currently on the App Store, and that app must use an SDK that supports alternate icons in asset catalogs. Icons must also be sized to 1024x1024 pixels.
Scroll to the treatment you want to change and, under the icon, click Change.
Choose an icon from the menu that appears. This menu shows all app icons included in your app’s binary. If an app is downloaded from a product page with a test treatment, the test treatment app icon displays throughout the download process and on the user’s device.
Click the device tabs and add screenshots and previews. If you choose not to edit screenshots or previews for a certain device size, the treatment will use the ones on your original product page for that device size. For details on specifications, visit Screenshot specifications and App preview specifications.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Run a test

All metadata used in a test must first be approved by App Review. If you try to start a test before the metadata is approved, the metadata will be added to a submission for you to send for review. If you already have a submission for that platform in review, you’ll need wait until the first submission is complete before you can send the test metadata for review.

Note: Submitting a new app version for review automatically stops any tests that are in progress.

Start a test

From My Apps, select your app.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Product Page Optimization.
Click the name of the test you want to start.
On the top right, click Start Test. The test status automatically updates to Running and shows how long the test has been live. If you click Start Test before submitting your metadata for review, the test status will change once the metadata is accepted by App Review.
Your test will run for 90 days or until you manually stop it within that time. Test results appear in App Analytics. For details, visit View product page optimization results.

Manually stop a test

From My Apps, select your app.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Product Page Optimization.
Click the name of the test you want to stop.
On the top right, click Stop Test. Once you stop a test, it cannot be restarted. You’ll need to create a new test with the same treatments and run it again.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Apply a test treatment to your product page

You can apply any of the treatments to your original product page on the App Store, as well as to versions in the Ready for Sale or Prepare for Submission states, at any time. You can apply one treatment per test, and the action cannot be undone. Please note that only the app previews and screenshots from the treatment will be applied. To apply the app icon, you'll need to set it as the default icon in your next app version.

For details on analytics, visit View product page optimization results.

If you apply a treatment while a test is still running, the test will automatically stop.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Product Page Optimization.
Click the name of the test.
Scroll to the treatment you want to use.
Click Apply Treatment to Original Product Page.
Select the app versions you want to apply the treatment to.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

App Clip experiences

Set up an App Clip experience

An App Clip is a small part of your app that’s discoverable at the moment it’s needed and lets people quickly start and finish a task from your app. Users running iOS 14 or later can quickly access App Clips without needing to download the full app. Learn about App Clips.

To configure how your App Clip is discovered and launched, you create App Clip experiences, each of which includes metadata for the App Clip card, an invocation URL, and invocation methods. You can create many App Clip experiences to support situations when different tasks from your app might be helpful.

A default App Clip experience is required, and can be invoked through Safari and links people share in Messages. Once you create a default App Clip experience, you can create advanced App Clip experiences, which can also be invoked by App Clip Codes that encode a URL and incorporate NFC tags, QR codes, and place cards in Maps. Learn about configuration options.

When you’re ready to submit your app for review, you can optionally provide up to three URLs that are representative of experiences your App Clip provides, allowing App Review to understand the features and functionalities. Add these URLs in the App Clips URLs section in App Review Information toward the bottom of the Version Information page.

You’ll need to first upload a build that has an App Clip to be able to edit the App Clip section in App Store Connect.

Learn how to read App Clip information and manage App Clip experiences using the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Set up a default App Clip experience

Learn how to create a default App Clip experience using the App Store Connect API.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the iOS app version for which you want to add an App Clip experience.
On the right, below App Clip, enter the required metadata (a header image, subtitle, and a call to action). This metadata appears on the App Clip card when the experience is invoked from Safari or Messages.
Learn more about the required, localizable, and editable properties.
In the upper right, click Save.

Set up an advanced App Clip experience

Learn how to create an advanced App Clip experience using the App Store Connect API.

Set up an advanced App Clip experience without place association

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the iOS app version for which you want to add an App Clip experience.
Under Advanced App Clip Experiences, click Edit Advanced Experiences. A new page opens with general information on what to provide.
Click Next.
In the App Clip experience URL field, enter the invocation URL for your App Clip experience.
The App Clip Bundle ID will be prepopulated.
Click Next.
Enter the information for the App Clip card. To add a Default Display Title and Default Subtitle in additional languages, click Add Additional Titles.
Specify that your App Clip experience is not associated with a place.
View tooltips next to each field for more details.
Select a call to action, then click Next.
Answer the question about what this App Clip experience promotes. Specify whether it promotes your app’s business, service, or brand or if it’s created on behalf of other businesses, services, or brands that appear within your app.
Learn about creating App Clips for other businesses.
Click Send to Apple.
All the experiences you’ve configured, along with their statuses, will display on the App Clip experiences page.

Set up an advanced App Clip experience with place association

A place association is an optional component that connects the App Clip to a physical location, and is needed for the experience to be invoked in Maps. Place association doesn’t guarantee inclusion in Apple Maps and may not be available in all regions.

If an App Clip is part of the location’s official app, it will be approved for that location. If it’s not part of the official app, either the business owner must claim the location through Places on Maps and approve the App Clip to display, or the creator of the App Clip must be authorized as a partner on the business’ website.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the iOS app version for which you want to add an App Clip experience.
Under Advanced App Clip Experiences, click Edit Advanced Experiences. A new page opens with general information on what to provide.
Click Next.
In the App Clip experience URL field, enter the invocation URL.
The App Clip Bundle ID will be prepopulated.
Click Next.
Enter the information for the App Clip card. To add a Default Display Title and Default Subtitle in additional languages, click Add Additional Titles.
Specify that your App Clip experience is associated with a place.
View tooltips next to each field for more details.
Select a Maps action that best fits the experience and click Next. This determines the action that appears on the place card in Maps.
Choose a place to associate with this App Clip experience.
Answer the question about the relationship between your app and the place associated with this App Clip experience.
Answer the question about what this App Clip experience promotes. Specify whether it promotes your app’s business, service, or brand, or if it’s created on behalf of other businesses, services, or brands that appear within your app.
Learn about creating App Clips for other businesses.
If your App Clip experience promotes another business, service, or brand, select a category.
Click Send to Apple.
All the experiences you’ve configured, along with their statuses, will display on the App Clip experiences page.

Note: To confirm that your App Clip experience appears in Maps, open Maps and search for places associated with the experience.

Generate App Clip codes

Advanced App Clips can be discovered and launched through App Clip Codes. You can generate these codes in multiple colors and incorporate NFC tags, allowing people to launch your App Clips by tapping their iPhone on the code or scanning it with the camera. Generate App Clip Codes in App Store Connect or with the App Clip Code generator command line tool.

Learn about proper placement and messaging for App Clip Codes.

Generate App Clip Codes for a single App Clip experience

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the iOS app version with the App Clip experience for which you want to generate an App Clip Code.
Under Advanced App Clip Experiences, click Edit Advanced Experiences.
A list of your active App Clip experiences will display. Click Get App Clip Codes and select one experience for which you want to generate an App Clip Code.
Note: You won’t be able to select App Clip experiences that are incompatible with App Clip Codes.
Click Continue.
Click Get Started on the Create an App Clip Code page to generate the codes.
If you want to upload URL parameters to append an invocation URL, select Yes and upload a CSV file that includes your invocation URLs for App Clip Codes, then click Next. If you do not want to upload URL parameters to append to your App Clip experience URL, select No and click Next.
Learn how to identify URLs for your App Clip to support.
Learn best practices for encoding a URL in an App Clip Code.
Select a color pattern for the code or select custom foreground and background colors to generate a code consistent with your brand, then click Next.
Learn best practices for color selection.
To embed an NFC tag in the code, select NFC and click Next. If you're not embedding an NFC tag, select Scan Only and click Next.
Based on the placement of your App Clip Code, select the appropriate design (“Use App Clip logo” or “Without App Clip logo”) and click Next.
Click Download App Clip Codes to download SVG files.
Learn about printing App Clip Codes.

Generate App Clip Codes for multiple App Clip experiences

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the iOS app version with the App Clip experience for which you want to generate App Clip Codes.
Under Advanced App Clip Experiences, click Edit Advanced Experiences.
A list of your active App Clip experiences will display. Click Get App Clip Codes and select multiple experiences for which you want to generate codes.
Note: You won’t be able to select App Clip experiences that are incompatible with App Clip Codes.
Click Continue.
Click Get Started on the Create an App Clip Code page to generate App Clip Codes.
With No preselected, click Next.
Select a color pattern for the codes or select custom foreground and background colors to generate codes that are consistent with your brand, then click Next.
Learn best practices for color selection.
Note: You can view your selected App Clip experiences by clicking “View selected App Clip experiences” under the preview icon.
To embed an NFC tag in the code, select NFC and click Next. If you're not embedding an NFC tag, select Scan Only and click Next.
Based on the placement of your App Clip Code, select the appropriate design (“Use App Clip logo” or “Without App Clip logo”) and click Next.
Click Download App Clip Codes to download SVG files.
Learn more about printing App Clip codes..

Deactivate an advanced App Clip experience

Learn how to manage an advanced App Clip experience using the App Store Connect API.

You can deactivate or reactivate experiences as needed.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the iOS app version with the App Clip experience you want to deactivate.
Under Advanced App Clip Experiences, click Edit Advanced Experiences.
A list of your active App Clip experiences will display. Click the experience you want to deactivate.
Scroll to the bottom of the App Clip experience details page and click Deactivate App Clip Experience.
In the confirmation dialog that appears, click Deactivate.

View domain URL status

You can check the validation status of your App Clip in App Store Connect. The cache status is automatically available to view, but to validate the status of your domains in real time, you can load the debug status.

From My Apps, select the app you want to view. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, select the iOS app version with the App Clip you want the domain status for.
In the build section, view the cache status under the Domain Status column.
To view the debug status, click View Status under the Domain Status column.
In the dialog, click Load Debug Status to view the debug status.

Learn about supporting associated domains.

Configure custom product pages

You can create multiple versions of your app’s product page to highlight features or specific content, each with a different set of screenshots, previews, and promotional text. Custom pages are fully localizable, and shareable through a unique URL. Your app's default product page displays to all customers on the App Store, unless they follow a custom product page link. You can have up to 35 custom product pages published on the App Store at a time, per app.

You'll also be able to view metrics (including impressions, downloads, and conversion rate) for each page in App Analytics.

Custom product pages can be viewed on the App Store on iOS 15 and iPadOS 15, or later.

Learn how to create and manage a custom product page using the App Store Connect API.

Create a custom product page

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Custom Product Pages.
Click Create Custom Product Page.
Enter a reference name to help you identify the page in App Analytics.
Choose whether to start with a blank page or make changes to an existing product page. If you choose to start from an existing page, you can choose a version that’s in the Ready for Sale state or the Prepare for Submission state.
Click Create. Your custom product page’s unique URL is automatically generated and displays on this page.
Modify or add additional screenshots, app previews, or promotional text as desired.

Submit a custom product page for review

Custom product pages must be submitted for review.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Custom Product Pages.
Click the page you want to submit for review.
On the top right, click Add for Review.
The submission confirmation screen shows the app version that will be associated with the custom product page, and the items that will be reviewed. You may choose to add other items to the submission.
Click Submit to App Review.

A custom product page’s screenshots, previews, and promotional text can’t be modified while it’s in review. Withdrawing the submission makes the page editable, so you can make changes and resubmit.

Edit a custom product page

An approved custom product page can be edited and submitted for review without affecting its unique URL. Changes are published automatically upon approval by App Review.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Custom Product Pages.
Click the page you want to edit.
Click Edit.
Review the prompt and click Edit again to proceed. This creates a new draft of your custom product page in the Ready to Submit state.
Make your edits and click Add for Review.
The submission confirmation screen shows the app version that will be associated with the custom product page, and the items that will be reviewed. You may choose to add other items to the submission.
Click Submit to App Review.
Once the edited page is approved, it will replace the current page on the App Store.

Delete a custom product page

You can have up to 35 custom product pages published on the App Store at a time, per app. You can delete and create pages at any time. If someone taps a URL to a deleted custom product page, they’ll be redirected automatically to your default product page.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Custom Product Pages.
Click the page you want to delete.
Scroll to the bottom and click Delete This Product Page.

Disable a custom product page URL

Each custom product page has a unique URL that’s generated when you create the page. The URL can’t be changed or reused for a different page, and it remains consistent for all future versions of the page. You may want to disable a URL if you’d like to make the page publicly unavailable, but keep the custom page record in App Store Connect — for example, if you need to pause a marketing campaign. If someone taps a URL to a disabled custom product page, they’ll be redirected automatically to your default product page. To reenable the custom product page URL, follow the same steps to disable a URL. If your link is already disabled, Enable Link will display instead.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the left sidebar under Features, click Custom Product Pages.
Click the page you want to disable.
Next to the URL, click Disable Link.
For a disabled link, Enable Link will display instead.
Click Disable.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Manage iCloud display sets

To use an iCloud display set, you need to configure the display set in App Store Connect, identify the apps that use it, and reference the display set in each app’s Information property list (Info.plist) in the Xcode project.

For each iCloud display set, you’ll need to provide the following:

Property				Description
Reference Name				An internal name. It must be at least two characters and can be up to 255 bytes. It’s displayed in App Store Connect only.
Display Set ID				A unique identifier used to associate your app with the display set. Use the same ID in your app’s Information property file, `NSUbiquitousContainerName` key. This string must be a uniform type identifier (UTI) and can contain only alphanumeric characters, hyphens, and periods. The string should also be in reverse-DNS format and can’t end in `.test`.
Display Set Name				The label that displays to users when they configure iCloud settings for your apps. Localize this label for each of the languages your apps support.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Create an iCloud display set

Log into App Store Connect. Select My Apps.
From the Ellipsis pop-up menu next to Apps, choose Manage iCloud Display Sets.
Any existing display sets are listed in the Manage Your iCloud Display Sets dialog that appears.
In the upper-left corner, click Create New.
Enter a reference name and display set ID.
Click Add Language, then in the Add Language dialog, choose a primary language for your apps from the Language menu.
In the Display Name field, enter the display set label that’s presented to users when they configure iCloud settings for your apps.
The display name must be at least two characters and can be up to 75 bytes.
Click Save in the dialog.
To add more languages that your apps support, repeat steps 5 through 7.
Click Save in the bottom-right corner of the Create New iCloud Display Set page.

Edit an iCloud display set

Log into App Store Connect. Select My Apps.
From the Ellipsis menu next to Apps, choose Manage iCloud Display Sets.
The Manage Your iCloud Display Sets page appears listing your display sets.
Click the row for the display set you want to edit.
Do any of the following:
- Change the reference name: Click Edit next to the name and enter a new name.
- Add a language: Click Add Language. Follow the same steps in Create an iCloud display set to add more languages.
- Delete a language: In the row for the language, click Delete.
- Edit a language: In the language table, click the display name of the language.
Below the detail area, you can view the attached apps but you can’t edit them (attached apps are configured in the Xcode project).
Click Done.

Delete an iCloud display set

You can delete only iCloud display sets that have no attached apps.

Log into App Store Connect. Select My Apps.
From the Ellipsis pop-up menu next to Apps, choose Manage iCloud Display Sets.
In the row for the display set, click Delete.

See alsoApp Store Connect workflow

Upload a geographic coverage file for a routing app (iOS, watchOS)

If you submit a routing app to App Review, Apple doesn’t start the approval process until you upload a geographic coverage file. You can upload the geographic coverage file when you first create the app record or later after you upload a build.

For the complete steps to configure a routing app, an app that provides point-to-point directions for other apps, visit Configure a routing app (iOS, watchOS) in Xcode Help.

Note: To create a geographic coverage file, read “Specifying the Geographic Coverage File Contents” in Location and Maps Programming Guide.

Learn how to manage geographic coverage files using the App Store Connect API.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, click the version of your app that you want to edit.
Scroll to the General App Information section.
Click the Choose File button under Routing App Coverage File.

Offer in-app purchases

Workflow for configuring in-app purchases

In-app purchases let people securely buy content, features, or services within your app using the StoreKit framework.

You can create up to 10,000 in-app purchase products per app. There are four in-app purchase types: consumables, non-consumables, auto-renewable subscriptions, and non-renewing subscriptions.

Learn more about in-app purchases.

Sign the Paid Applications Agreement
To offer in-app purchases, you must accept the Paid Applications Agreement in App Store Connect. For details on how to do this, consult the Agreements, Tax, and Banking overview.
Configure in-app purchases in App Store Connect
Next, configure in-app purchases for your app in App Store Connect. Every in-app purchases must be associated with a specific app and isn’t available for use in other apps. However, in-app purchases can be shared across your app’s platform versions (iOS, macOS, tvOS) if they're part of the same app record in App Store Connect.
You'll have the option to add metadata, such as a display name and description, and choose your in-app purchase pricing. As you develop your app, you can add and remove in-app purchases and refine or reconfigure your existing ones. You can add in-app purchases by following the steps in Create in-app purchases or using the App Store Connect API.
Enable in-app purchase in Xcode
Add the in-app purchase capability to your app in Xcode, making sure that the bundle identifier and product identifiers in Xcode match the identifiers for your app and in-app purchases in App Store Connect.
Note: For a watchOS app with an iOS app, the capability only needs to be added to the iOS app.
Design and create your in-app purchase
Use the In-App Purchase API to implement in-app purchases. View documentation.
Test in-app purchases
Apple provides a testing environment, called sandbox, which allows you to test in-app purchases without incurring charges, using special test accounts. Learn how to create a Sandbox Apple ID.
Test each part of your code to verify that you’ve implemented it correctly by using your app to make in-app purchases. Learn about testing with sandbox.
You can further test your app and in-app purchases using TestFlight.
Publish on the App Store
When you're done testing your in-app purchases, you'll be able to submit for review. Make sure you aren't missing any required information before submitting.

Offer consumable and non-consumable in-app purchases

Create in-app purchases

To offer in-app purchases, add in-app purchase information in App Store Connect.

Learn how to create auto-renewable subscriptions.

Learn how to create in-app purchases with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: You must have the Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing role to add and edit in-app purchases. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
To add in-app purchases and click the add button (+).
Select Consumable or Non-Consumable. Offer auto-renewable subscriptions.
Add the reference name and product ID, then click Create.
You can enter all your metadata when you create your in-app purchases, or enter your in-app purchase information later.

View and edit in-app purchase information

All in-app purchase metadata can be edited, except the product ID and in-app purchase type. If your in-app purchase was never submitted to Apple for review, you can make changes to its metadata. If your in-app purchase was already submitted, some changes require approval by App Review.

Learn how to modify in-app purchases with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Add and remove localizations

You can add and remove localizations at any time. After an in-app purchase is submitted, changes to localized text or new language support have their own status separate from the overall status of the in-app purchase.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Click the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.
Under App Store, in the Localization section, click Add Localization or the add button (+).
To delete a localization, hold the pointer over the language listed under App Store Localizations, then click the remove button (—).
Click Delete in the dialog.

Add or remove a promotional image (iOS)

Add a promotional image to make your in-app purchase available to promote on the App Store for devices running iOS 11 or later. You can submit up to 20 in-app purchases with a promotional image for review at a time.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Click the in-app purchase you want to modify.
Scroll down to the App Store Promotion (Optional) section.
To add an image, click Choose File and upload the image. To delete an image, move your pointer over it and click the remove icon (—).
Click Save.

When you're ready, submit your in-app purchase for review. Your promotional image must be approved by App Review to appear on your App Store product page. If you're also using offer codes for auto-renewable subscriptions, your promotional image will display when a code is redeemed.

Add App Review information

Add review notes and a screenshot of your in-app purchase to help Apple review your in-app purchase. This information is for Apple’s review only and is not displayed on the App Store. You can change it before you submit to App Review, or if your in-app purchase is rejected.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Click the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.
Scroll down to the Review Information section.
Click Choose File to upload your image.
Add information under Review Notes, then click Save.

See alsoIn-app purchase information

Manage in-app purchase pricing

You can change the pricing for an in-app purchase at any time.

Learn how to manage pricing for your in-app purchases with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

To add or edit pricing:

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Click the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.
Scroll down to the Price Schedule section.
Choose your price. Click Other Currencies to view the equivalent price tiers across territories. You can plan a price change with an end date by clicking Save, then clicking (+), selecting your desired price/tier, and selecting a start and end date.
To remove a price change, move your pointer over the price change listed and click the red delete button (—) on the right.
Click Save.
Note: You cannot delete the original price.

Set availability for in-app purchases

All in-app purchases are available worldwide — you can’t exclude specific countries or regions for availability. This ensures a seamless experience when users move locations. For example, if someone purchases an app in one country and moves to another country, they can still access in-app purchases within the app, even if the app has never been available in the new country. If you need to restrict access for a specific reason, develop a solution within the app.

To make your in-app purchase available, you must clear it for sale. You don’t need to clear an in-app purchase for sale in order to test in-app purchases or submit an in-app purchase.

Learn how to set availability for in-app purchases with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Clear an in-app purchase for sale

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Clic the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.
Under Availability, select Cleared for Sale to make your in-app purchase available for sale. To remove it from sale, deselect Cleared for Sale.
Click Save.

Keep in mind that even if you clear your in-app purchase for sale, it may not be available for purchase. Monitor the In-app purchase statuses to understand if action is needed from you, such as completing missing metadata, or if your in-app purchase has been approved by App Review. To automatically release your in-app purchase on the App Store after approval, you must clear it for sale.

Delete an in-app purchase

If you want to discontinue an in-app purchase, consider the impact on users and any communications you might need to provide.

Taking the following steps before removing your in-app purchase from sale can help ensure a smooth experience:

Announce your intention to remove the in-app purchase for sale and stop merchandising it within your app at least 31 days before removal. This lets people use up any consumable in-app purchase products they purchased. You can leverage your own communication channels such as email, websites, and in-app messaging. If you’re unable to provide sufficient notice to users, contact us.
End any promotions of the in-app purchases to discourage purchases.
Notify Apple of your intention to remove an in-app purchase from sale.

To delete a product after it is available for sale, you must first remove it from sale. You can delete in-app purchases after they’re created, but not if they’re In Review.

Note: You must be the Account Holder in order to remove an in-app purchase from sale.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Navigate to the in-app purchase you want to delete.
Scroll to the bottom of the page and click Remove In-App Purchase.
Click the Remove button.

Offer subscriptions

Offer auto-renewable subscriptions

App Store Connect offers tools to help you run a subscription business on the App Store. How you configure your subscriptions in App Store Connect determine how users subscribe to your service, how often they are billed, and how they upgrade and downgrade between offerings. To begin offering a subscription in your app, you will need to create a Subscription Group, then add one or more Subscription products to that group, then assign levels to those products. Subscription setup is structured as the following:

Subscription group: A set of subscription products with varying levels and durations. Users can subscribe to one subscription product per group at a time.
Subscription: A product that lets users purchase dynamic content for a set period. Auto-renewable subscriptions renew automatically, unless cancelled by the user. Subscription duration and price is configured in App Store Connect.
Subscription levels: A ranking system of subscriptions within a subscription group that determines the upgrade, downgrade, and crossgrade path available to subscribers. Levels make it possible to offer varying access (basic, premium) of the same service.
Subscription duration: The length of time before the subscription renews and the subscriber is charged. Possible durations are 1 week, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 months, and 1 year.

Single subscription product setup

If you offer only one subscription product in your app, the subscription defaults to a single level within the subscription group.

Multiple subscription and durations product setup

Arrange your subscriptions in order from the one that offers the most (level 1) to the one that offers the least. You can stack subscriptions with equal content but different durations and other similar variables, at the same level. Each level can have multiple subscription products, allowing for multiple durations and prices for people to choose from. This lets them upgrade, downgrade, and crossgrade within the subscription group without impacting their days of paid service.

Subscription proceeds rate

During a subscriber’s first year of service, you receive 70% of the subscription price at each billing cycle, minus applicable taxes. After a subscriber accumulates one year of paid service in the same subscription group, your net revenue increases to 85% of the subscription price, minus applicable taxes. Time spent within a subscription offer is also counted toward the total. Members of the App Store Small Business Program receive 85% starting on the first day.

When an auto-renewable subscription expires, the days of paid service stop accumulating. If the someone resubscribes or the subscription is recovered with 60 days, the days of paid service continue from the recovery date. Conversely, if the subscription is recovered after 60 days, the rate reverts to 70% and the day count starts over.

When a subscription expires due to a billing issue, Apple attempts to renew the subscription and collect payment. If you enabled billing grace period for your apps, there won’t be any interruption to days of paid service or to your revenue, if Apple is able to recover the subscription within the billing grace period (either 6 or 16 days, depending on the subscription duration). Learn more about billing grace period.

You can find information about subscription performance, subscriber activity, and proceeds in your Sales and Trends reports. Learn more.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Create a subscription group

To offer subscriptions within your app, you must first create a subscription group in App Store Connect. When you create subscription products, you'll be able to add these products to the subscriptions group. Before creating subscriptions, ensure that you understand the right subscription setup for your business model. Learn about offering subscriptions.

In the sidebar under Features click Subscriptions.
Click the add button (+).
Enter a reference name.
Click Create

Create an additional subscription group

If you want to offer groups of subscriptions with varying subscription levels, you’ll need to create more than one subscription group.

Note: Since users can only buy one subscription within a group at a time, creating a single group is the best practice for most apps, as it prevents people from accidentally purchasing multiple subscriptions. Users who buy subscriptions in multiple groups are billed separately for each subscription.

1. In the sidebar under features click Subscriptions.

2. Click the add button (+).

3. Read and acknowledge the warning by selecting the checkbox and clicking Next.

Note: You’ll only be prompted with a warning when creating your second subscription group.

Screenshot showing the checkbox for creating an additional subscription group

4. Enter the reference name for the new group.

5. Click Create.

Add subscription products

In the Sidebar under features, click Subscriptions.
Click a subscription group name.
Click Create.
Note: If you're adding a subscription to a group that already has existing subscriptions, you'll click the add button (+).
Enter the subscription’s reference name and Product ID, then click Create. Once you've created your subscription product, you'll be taken to its information page to add more details.
Under Subscription Duration, choose a duration and click Save.
Under Subscription Prices, set a price.
Under Review Information, provide any additional information that may help the App Review team review your in-app purchase.
Optionally, enable Family Sharing, edit the subscription’s tax category, and add localizations.
Click Save.
Note: If you'd like your subscription to be accessible from more than one app, create an equivalent subscription product for each app. Learn how to offer subscriptions across multiple apps.

Assign subscription levels

After you've created a subscription product, you can add subscription group information and set subscription levels, which will determine the upgrades, downgrades, and crossgrades available within a group.

You don’t have to assign multiple levels. You can choose to offer a single subscription product or offer multiple subscription products and assign them all to the same level within a group. Learn about setting up subscription groups and ensure that you understand the right level setup for your business model.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, under Features click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription group you want to edit.
To set subscription levels, click Edit Level.
In the window that opens, click the reordering control on the left of the subscription name and drag it to a new position to change the subscriptions’ level.
Click Save.

Add localizations

You can add languages and enter localized metadata for your auto-renewable subscriptions and your subscription groups. For a list of supported languages, see App Stores and localizations. Subscription group localizations and subscription localizations are reviewed independently from your in-app purchase submission. For the properties you can localize, see Required, localizable, and editable properties. For a detailed example see Localize App Store information.

Important: You can manage languages only when the app status is editable.

Add subscription group localizations

You can use different subscription group display names and app name display options for each localization. Users will see these names when they manage subscriptions on their devices.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription group name.
Click the add button (+) next to App Store Localizations.
Follow the prompts to select localizations and enter localized subscription group display names and descriptions.
Click Add.

Add subscription localizations

The localized display name and description for your subscription will appear on the App Store according to the user’s device language settings.

1. From My Apps, select your app.

2. n the sidebar, under Features, click Subscriptions.

3. Click the subscription group name.

4. Select the subscription.

5. Click the add button (+) next to App Store Localizations.

6. Follow the prompts to select localizations and enter localized subscription group display names and descriptions.

7. Click Add.

Manage pricing for auto-renewable subscriptions

Auto-renewable subscriptions can be priced by App Store country or region (also known as storefronts.) You can choose from 800 price points in each currency, with the option for the Account Holder to submit a request for additional higher price points.

After you set a starting price for your auto-renewable subscription, you can schedule one future price change at a time, per territory. If you schedule a second price change when you already have a change scheduled, the first scheduled change will be overwritten. You also have the option to preserve prices for existing subscribers.

Learn how to configure auto-renewable subscription pricing with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Set a starting price for your auto-renewable subscription

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription group name.
Click the subscription reference name.
Scroll down to the Subscription Prices section and click Add Subscription Price.
Choose a country or region and price, then click Next. To search from a larger list of price points, click See Additional Prices.
App Store Connect provides comparable prices for all 175 App Store countries and regions, taking into account taxes and foreign exchange rates. If you want to set different prices for specific storefronts, make the changes and click Next.
Make sure your subscription’s starting price is correct and click Confirm.

Decrease the price of an auto-renewable subscription

If you decrease the price of your auto-renewable subscription, existing subscriptions will automatically renew at the lower price. You don’t have the option to preserve the higher price for existing subscribers.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription group name.
Click the subscription reference name.
Scroll down to the Subscription Prices section and click the add button (+).
Click Plan Subscription Price Change, then select the storefronts where you want to edit pricing.
Choose a start date, country or region, and price, then click Next. To search from a larger list of price points, click See Additional Prices.
App Store Connect provides comparable prices for all 175 App Store countries and regions, taking into account taxes and foreign exchange rates. If you want to set different prices for specific storefronts, make the changes and click Next.
Make sure the details of your price decrease are correct and click Confirm.
You can schedule one future price change at a time, per storefront. If you schedule a second price change when you already have a change scheduled, the first scheduled change will be overwritten.
Once a price decrease goes into effect, it can’t be reverted. However, you can schedule a price increase later.

Increase the price of an auto-renewable subscription

Increases in auto-renewable subscription prices result in either a notice to active subscribers or a request for consent, based on certain criteria below. Subscribers on introductory or promotional price subscriptions, including free trials and paid offers, will renew for at least one more billing period at the price that was displayed when they subscribed, to ensure their notice or request for consent for the new price is sent at least 30 days’ in advance. If a subscriber doesn’t consent before the first renewal at the higher price, their subscription will expire at the end of the last billing cycle at the former price.

Consent needed

If any of the following applies, subscribers must consent to the price increase before their next renewal date in order for the subscription to renew. Apple will automatically contact subscribers by email or push notification to request consent.

The subscriber is located in a region that requires consent for any price changes.
The price increase is:
- More than 50% of the current price; and
- The difference in price exceeds approximately US$5 per period for non-annual subscriptions, or US$50 per year for annual subscriptions.
- International equivalents for prices not in USD are based on current exchange rates with the specific thresholds which are subject to change based on changes in taxes or foreign exchange rates. View a list of thresholds per storefront.
The subscriber experienced a price increase for that subscription within the past 12 months.

The timing of price consent requests from Apple depends on the length of the subscription. If a price increase occurs within the minimum required notice period (7 days for weekly subscriptions, 27 days for 1 month subscriptions, and 30 days for subscription durations longer than 1 month), subscribers will renew at their existing price for one more billing period and will be notified before the end of their next billing period.

Subscription duration	First email notification (email, push, in-app messaging
2 month, 3 month, and 6 month, and annual subscriptions	60 days before renewal date
Monthly subscriptions	29 days before renewal date
Weekly subscriptions	7 days before renewal date

If a subscriber doesn’t agree to the new price or takes no action, Apple will continue to request consent approximately weekly through email, push notifications, and in-app messaging until their subscription expires at the end of their current billing cycle. Learn about displaying in-app consent messaging with StoreKit.

Example screenshots of consent needed and not

Consent not needed

If none of the criteria apply, Apple will automatically notify subscribers of the price increase with no additional request for consent. Notifications are sent via email and push notifications if enabled by the subscriber 30 or 7 days before the next renewal date. On iOS 13.4 or later, Apple will also notify subscribers via in-app messaging. If a price increase occurs within the minimum required notice period, subscribers will renew at their existing price for one more billing period and will be notified before the end of their next billing period.

First email	First in-app messaging	Push notification
30 days before renewal date for monthly and yearly subscriptions, 7 days before renewal date for weekly subscriptions	First app launch after entering notice period.	7 days before renewal date, if in-app messaging wasn't viewed.

Note: Price changes only apply to active subscribers. If a subscription is recovered in the billing retry or grace period state, it will renew at the existing price for one more billing period. 30 days before the renewal date, the subscriber receives notice of the price change, and the subscription renews at the next renewal date at the new price. Subscribers won't receive a notification if the subscription isn't going to renew.

To schedule a price increase:

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click an auto-renewable subscription, go to the Subscription Prices section, and click the add button (+).
Click Plan Subscription Price Change, then select the countries or regions where you want to edit pricing.
Choose a start date, country or region, and price, then click Next. To search from a larger list of 800 price points, click See Additional Prices.
App Store Connect will determine the soonest your price change can be scheduled for based on timezones for your desired date (generally 1 to 2 days in advance.) The time of day your price change goes into effect will vary by region. Ensure you are scheduling your price changes with enough time in advance.
App Store Connect provides comparable prices for all 175 App Store countries and regions, taking into account taxes and foreign exchange rates. If you want to set different prices for specific storefronts, make the changes and click Next.
Choose an option for subscribers paying the current price shown in App Store Connect:
- A: Keep the current price for existing subscribers. Anyone who subscribed before the start date of this price change won’t be affected. Subscribers whose subscription expires can resubscribe at the preserved price within 60 days of expiration.
- B: Apply the price change to existing subscribers who are paying the price of your subscription currently displayed on the App Store. App Store Connect will provide an indication if consent is required (or if they'll simply be notified) for each country or region. If you have customer groups that have had their prices preserved and your change is scheduled for the future, keep in mind that circumstances may change and consent will be required based on the conditions of the customer at the time of the increase. You are responsible for ensuring you understand when consent will be required.
Click Next.
View the list of planned price changes.
If all of the information is correct, click Confirm.

Once a price increase goes into effect, it can’t be reverted.

Un-preserve prices for subscribers

If you initially preserve the price for existing subscribers during a price increase, you can un-preserve the price later to bring those subscribers to the current price.

Apple automatically notifies subscribers and may request their consent to the new price in order to renew. Subscribers whose subscription expires can resubscribe at the preserved price within 60 days of expiration.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription group name.
Click the subscription reference name.
Scroll down to the Subscription Pricing section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
Click Starting Price.
Click Edit Price.
App Store Connect displays the countries or regions where subscribers currently pay a lower price.
Select the countries or regions where you want to increase the price. Click Next.
Click Confirm. Any changes you make can’t be reverted.

If you have subscribers on multiple preserved prices (as a result of multiple price increases over time) in the same countries or regions, you can only increase a preserved price to the next highest price. If you decide to bring all subscribers on preserved prices to the current price, start with the preserved price closest to the current price and unpreserve it, then unpreserve the next highest price, and so on. This keeps subscribers from experiencing multiple price increases.

1. From My Apps, select your app.

2. In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.

3. Click the subscription group name.

4. Click the subscription reference name.

5. Scroll down to the Subscription Pricing section and click View all Subscription Pricing.

6. Under Price Change, click the date of the price change that occurred closest to the current price.

7. Select the countries or regions you where you want to unpreserve the price. Note that the only option is to raise it to the current price. Click Next.

8. Click Confirm.

9. Repeat these steps for subscribers on other preserved prices, starting with the price closest to the current price.

View or modify your planned price changes

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription name, go to the Subscription Prices section, then click View all Subscription Pricing.
View your planned price changes.
You can download a list of prices customers are currently paying for your auto-renewable subscriptions, as well as a list of upcoming prices. Click Export as CSV
To cancel a scheduled price change, move your pointer over the right side of the price change row until the delete button (—) appears. Click the delete button.
In the dialog that appears, click Delete.
Click the date to view the set or planned price. If you’ve previously preserved pricing for existing subscribers, the current prices paid by these subscribers and the start date of the prices will also appear.

How will changes to foreign exchange rates and tax adjustments affect auto-renewable subscription pricing?

Apple will not make price adjustments on your auto-renewable subscription products. Retail price changes initiated by Apple due to tax changes and significant foreign exchange rate movements will exclude auto-renewable subscriptions. For any value-added tax (VAT) rate changes, your proceeds and Apple’s commission will be calculated after the deduction of VAT, which means that your proceeds will change. You can choose to pass any changes caused by taxation or foreign exchange onto your subscribers by adjusting the price for your subscription.

Set up an introductory offer for an auto-renewable subscription

You can set up introductory offers for your apps that contain auto-renewable subscriptions in App Store Connect. An introductory offer is a limited-time discounted price or free trial for the initial period of a subscription.

When you set up an introductory offer, it automatically appears on your app’s product page on the App Store for eligible users. You can also display introductory offers within your app. When displaying offers in your app, use receipt validation to ensure that you’re only showing offers to people who can redeem them. Learn about implementing introductory offers.

There are three types of introductory offers: free trial, pay up front, and pay as you go. You can choose the length of the introductory offer based on the standard subscription duration.

Standard Subscription Duration	Pay As You Go	Pay Up Front	Free Trial
1 Week	1 to 12 Weeks	1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.	3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.
1 Month	1 to 12 Months	1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.	3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.
2 Months	2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 Months	1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.	3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.
3 Months	3, 6, 9, or 12 Months	1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.	3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.
6 Months	6 or 12 Months	1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.	3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.
1 Year	1 Year	1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.	3 Days. 1 or 2 Weeks. 1, 2, 3, or 6 Months. 1 Year.

Although you can create an introductory offer for each subscription product in App Store Connect, each person is only eligible to redeem one introductory offer per subscription group.

Learn how to set up introductory offers with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Create an introductory offer

Introductory offers can be set up and managed for each subscription in App Store Connect.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Select a subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription pricing.
Select Create Introductory Offers.
Select the countries or regions where you want to offer a discounted price, and click Next. You can have one current and one future introductory offer per storefront.
Choose the start and end dates for your introductory offer. If you choose today as the start date, your introductory offer begins immediately. Offers end on the selected end date, with the exact time varying by region.
Click Next. If you create new offers that have overlapping dates, the latest action overwrites existing introductory offers. Learn how to make sure your app handles offer availability and more.
Choose Pay as you go, Pay up front, or Free, then choose the appropriate duration, country or region, and price. To search from a larger list of price points, click See Additional Prices.
App Store connect provides comparable prices for all 175 App Store countries and regions, taking into account taxes and foreign exchange rates. If you want to set different prices for specific storefronts, make the changes and click Next.
Make sure the details of your introductory offer are correct and click Confirm.

Edit an introductory offer

Once an introductory offer is available to customers, only the End Date of the in effect introductory offer can be edited. For introductory offers scheduled for the future, the start and end dates can be edited. To edit the duration or price of any introductory offer after it's been created, you must create a new introductory offer.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click the subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
Navigate to the Introductory Offers tab, where you'll find all your offers listed by Date and Territory.
Click the date or territory you want to edit, select a new start/end date, then click Update.

Delete an introductory offer

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click the subscription you want to delete, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
Navigate to the Introductory Offers tab, where you'll find all your offers listed by date and territory.
Find the introductory offer you wish to delete, and move your pointer over the right side of the price change row until the remove button (—) appears. Click the remove button.
Click Delete in the dialog.

What is the difference between introductory offer limits and customer eligibility limits?

App Store Connect allows you to set an introductory offer for each subscription product in App Store Connect. You can have multiple offers in each subscription group. New and returning customers are only eligible to use one introductory offer per subscription group. For example, if a customer uses a free trial and then upgrades to a subscription product in the same group that also has a free trial, they aren't eligible for the second offer.

Set up promotional offers for auto-renewable subscriptions

Apps with auto-renewable subscriptions can provide a discounted price for a specific duration for existing and previously subscribed customers on iOS, macOS, and tvOS. You can use these offers to help win back subscribers who canceled their subscriptions or promote an upgrade to a higher-ranked subscription at a special price. Customers can accept the offer even if they've already accepted an introductory offer.

To get started, generate keys for in-app purchases, create a promotional offer on your app's in-app purchase page for each product, and choose a duration and offer type (pay as you go, pay up front, free). You can have up to 10 active offers per subscription.

Once you've created offers in App Store Connect, use Xcode 10.2 or later to implement the StoreKit APIs to allow these offers to be accepted by customers running iOS 12.2, macOS 10.14.4, and tvOS 12.2, or later.

Get business guidance for auto-renewable subscriptions.

Learn how to set up promotional offers with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Set up a promotional offer

Subscription offers can be set up and managed for each subscription product in App Store Connect.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click the subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click the add button (+).
Select Create Promotional Offer.
Enter a Promotional Offer Reference Name and a Promotional Offer Identifier, then click Next.
Choose Pay as you go, Pay up front, or Free, then choose the appropriate duration, country or region, and price. To search from a larger list of price points, click See Additional Prices. Click Next.
App Store Connect provides comparable prices for all 175 App Store countries and regions, taking into account taxes and foreign exchange rates. If you want to set different prices for specific storefronts, make the changes and click Next.
Make sure the details of your promotional offer are correct and click Confirm.

Edit a promotional offer

Once you create a promotional offer, only the price can be edited. To edit the duration, type, or offer code, you must create a new offer.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click the subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
Navigate to the Promotional Offers tab, where you'll find all your promotional prices listed.
Click the offer you'd like to edit.
Choose a new price from the menu, and click recalculate to view the updated price in each territory.
Click Save.

Delete a promotional offer

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click auto-renewable subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
Click the offer you'd like to delete, then click Delete Offer.
Confirm your changes in the dialogue.

Set up offer codes

Offer codes provide a free or discounted price for auto-renewable subscriptions for a specific duration. You can create codes for a maximum of 150,000 redemptions per app, per quarter.

There are two types of offer codes:

One-time-use codes: Unique, one-time-use codes generated in App Store Connect and redeemable through a redemption URL, within your app on iOS 14.2 and iPadOS 14.2, or later (if your app supports the presentCodeRedemptionSheet method), or by entering the code in the App Store code redemption flow. These codes are useful for small-scale distribution or when code access needs to be restricted. They expire after a maximum of six months from the date they’re created.
Custom codes: Uniquely named custom codes — for example, SPRINGPROMO — each of which can be redeemed through a redemption URL or within your app on iOS 14.1 or iPadOS 14 or later (if your app supports the presentCodeRedemptionSheet method). You can set a maximum redemption limit and choose whether or not to set an expiration date. Custom codes are ideal for large campaigns that require mass distribution.

Customer eligibility is determined by you in App Store Connect and can include new, active, and expired users. Consider your offer’s eligibility requirements before creating and distributing offer codes. Learn how to provide offer codes using the App Store Connect API.

Learn about offer types and which one to choose.

Get business guidance for auto-renewable subscriptions.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Set up offers

Both types of codes (one-time use and custom codes) must be associated with an offer in App Store Connect. You can have up to 10 active offers at a time.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Select the subscription from the list.
In the Subscription Prices section, click the add button (+).
From the menu, click Create Offer Codes, then click the add button (+).
Enter a reference name for the offer. You’ll use this reference name to manage the offer in App Store Connect and to identify sales associated with offers in Sales and Trends reports, and in StoreKit transactions.
Select the customer eligibility for your offer. You can select one or more of the following:
- New: Users who have never subscribed to any subscription product within the group.
- Existing: Users who are currently subscribed to a product within the group.
- Expired: Users who were previously subscribed to a product within the group, but whose subscription has expired.
If your subscription has an introductory offer, determine whether people redeeming your codes should be eligible to redeem both a code and the introductory offer by choosing from the following options:
- Yes. New users will redeem your app’s introductory offer first, then automatically renew to the offer they redeemed with the code.
- No. New users will redeem the offer code first, then automatically renew to the standard subscription price without using the introductory offer. If they cancel and resubscribe at any point, they’re still eligible to redeem an introductory offer.
Click Next.
Choose the appropriate territories for your offer. Click Next.
Choose Pay as you go, Pay up front, or Free, then choose the appropriate duration, country or region, and price, then click Next. To search from a larger list of price points, click See Additional Prices.
App Store Connect provides comparable prices for all 175 App Store countries and regions, taking into account taxes and foreign exchange rates. If you want to set different prices for specific storefronts, make the changes and click Next.
Make sure the details of your offer are correct and click Submit.
Note: Once you create an offer, you won’t be able to edit it. If changes to customer eligibility are needed, create a new offer.

Create one-time use codes

In order for users to redeem codes, your app must be in the Ready for Sale state.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click the subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
In the menu bar, click Offer Codes.
Select your offer from the list.
Click the “Create One-Time Use Codes” button.
In the pop-up window, select the number of codes you want to create. You must select a minimum of 500 and a maximum of 25,000. If you need more than 25,000 codes, you can create multiple batches of codes for the same offer.
Choose an expiration date to determine how long the codes are valid. One-time use codes can be valid for a maximum of six months. Codes expire at 12:00 a.m. PT on the expiration date.
Click Create. It may take up to an hour before codes are redeemable by customers.

Download one-time use codes

Once your one-time use codes are created, you’ll need to download them from App Store Connect so you can share them.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click the subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
In the menu bar, click Offer Codes.
Locate your offer in the list and click the reference name.
Locate the codes you want to download and click Download.
Open the extracted text (.txt) file in a spreadsheet application.

Create custom codes

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click the subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
In the menu bar, click Offer Codes.
Select the offer from the list.
Click the “Create Custom Codes” button.
Enter a custom code up to 64 characters and without any special characters. Once you’ve created your custom code, you won’t be able to edit it. Custom codes can’t be used for other offer campaigns or subscriptions for the app. To create a custom code that is already being used by a different offer for the same app, you must first deactivate the code.
Choose a redemption limit. This is the total number of people who can redeem this custom code. You can choose a limit of up to 25,000 at a time. If you need more, use the same custom code multiple times for the same offer.
Choose an expiration date to determine how long the codes will be valid (with a maximum of 6 months for codes with an expiration date). Codes expire at 12:00 a.m. PT on the expiration date. To create codes with no expiration date, choose No Expiration Date from the date picker. Expiration dates may not be edited.
Click Create. It may take up to an hour before codes are redeemable by customers.

Distribute offer codes

You are responsible for distributing offer codes to your users. You can utilize your own channels, such as email or offline marketing campaigns.

Give codes to users directly: Codes can be shared through online or offline channels. For example, you might print the codes on cards that you give out at an event. People can redeem one-time use codes by entering them in the “Redeem Gift Card or Code” page in their App Store account settings, or redeem custom codes within your app if you’ve implemented the presentcoderedemptionsheet API. Learn more.
Create a unique redemption URL: Codes can be used to create redemption URLs that you can share directly. When someone visits the URL, they'll land on a page where they can redeem your code. People who haven't installed your app will first be prompted to download the app before redeeming the code.
To create these URLs for one-time use codes, copy the example link from your offer details page, then add each code to the end of the URL. One-time use code URLs are also included in the downloadable text file.

Deactivate offer codes

You can deactivate codes at any time in App Store Connect. Users will no longer be able to redeem them, and will be shown an error message stating the offer is no longer available.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click a subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
In the menu bar, click Offer Codes.
Click the reference name of the offer.
Locate the codes you want to deactivate and click Deactivate. The codes will expire immediately. Subscribers who have already redeemed the codes won’t be affected. Unredeemed codes will also expire and will not be reapplied to the 150,000 quarterly limit.

Deactivate offers

You can have up to 10 active offers per subscription SKU at a time in App Store Connect. If you wish to deactivate an offer, please note that the offer cannot be reactivated later. All codes associated with the offer will be invalidated. Subscribers who have already redeemed codes for the offer will not be affected.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click subscriptions.
Choose the subscription group containing your subscription.
Click a subscription, then go to the Subscription Prices section and click View all Subscription Pricing.
In the menu bar, click Offer Codes.
Click the reference name of the offer.
In the upper corner, click Deactivate.
You can view your deactivated offers anytime, as well as download expired codes associated with deactivated offers.

Enable Billing Grace Period for auto-renewable subscriptions

Billing Grace Period lets subscribers whose auto-renewal failed due to a payment issue continue accessing your app’s paid content for a period of time while Apple continues to attempt to collect payment. There won’t be any interruption to the subscriber’s days of paid service or to your revenue if Apple is able to recover the subscription within the grace period. Without enabling Billing Grace Period, the subscriber’s days of paid service are paused until Apple is able to collect payment.

The duration of the grace period can be configured in App Store Connect, and the options are based on your subscription’s standard duration. You can also access Billing Grace Period settings with the App Store Connect API.

Workflow for enabling Billing Grace Period

Enabling Billing Grace Period requires that you verify subscribers renewal state using StoreKit to ensure you continue to provide service to your users while a subscription is in a billing retry state. The following workflow can be used to properly test and validate your server to app’s logic before fully rolling out the feature to your subscribers.

1. Turn on Billing Grace Period in Sandbox environment

Enable Billing Grace Period in the sandbox environment only before enabling it in production.

2. Test Billing Grace Period in Sandbox

Use sandbox to validate your client and server logic to handle subscribers entering and exiting the grace period. For implementation guidance, view Reducing Involuntary Subscriber Loss.

3. Enable Billing Grace Period in the production environment

Once you have validated your client and server logic, edit your Billing Grace Period configuration to support the production environment in App Store Connect.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin or App Manager. View role permissions.

Turn on billing grace period

You can turn on Billing Grace Period for each app in App Store Connect, which applies to all subscription products within the app. Billing Grace Period configurability is not available for individual subscription products.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
In the Billing Grace Period section, click Set Up Billing Grace Period.
From the drop down menu, select a duration. You can select a 3, 16, or 28 day duration to apply across all the subscription products in your app. For weekly subscriptions, selecting a 16 or 28 day duration enables a 6 day period, to ensure the length of the grace period is not longer than the subscription duration. The following table shows the maximum actual grace period duration for each subscription type.
3 day Billing Grace Period
16 day Billing Grace Period
28 day Billing Grace Period
Weekly subscriptions
3 days
6 days
6 days
Monthly and Yearly subscriptions
3 days
16 days
28 days
Determine the renewal types you wish to enable a grace period for from the following options:
- All renewals: Billing Grace Period will apply to all renewals including subscribers on a free introductory offer or free subscription offer who are renewing to standard paid subscription.
- Only Paid to Paid renewals: Customers on a free subscription offer will not receive a grace period when converting to a paid subscription.
Select the server environments you would like to enable Billing Grace Period for.
- Only Sandbox environment: enables Billing Grace Period in the sandbox environment only. Use sandbox testing to test that your app provides service to subscriptions during a grace period.
- Production and Sandbox environment: will enable Billing Grace testing in both sandbox and production environments.
Click Confirm.
Note: Your app still needs to perform purchase validation and in addition account for the subscribers renewal status to identify if a subscription is in a grace period. Use the state property of the Product.SubscriptionInfo.RenewalInfo to determine whether the subscription is in a billing grace period or a billing retry period.

	3 day Billing Grace Period	16 day Billing Grace Period	28 day Billing Grace Period
Weekly subscriptions	3 days	6 days	6 days
Monthly and Yearly subscriptions	3 days	16 days	28 days

Edit Billing Grace Period duration, environments, and subscriber eligibility

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
In the Billing Grace Period section, click Edit. You can edit the length of the Grace Period, the subscriber eligibility, and the environments you wish to enable. Any changes you make may take up to 24 hours to take effect, and will only apply going forward. Subscribers currently in Billing Grace Period are still entitled to service during their grace period
Click Done.

Turn off billing grace period

You can turn off Billing Grace Period for each app in App Store Connect.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click subscriptions.
In the Billing Grace Period section, click Edit.
Click Turn Off.
Note: Once you turn off Billing Grace Period, subscribers whose renewal fails due to a billing issue will not accumulate days of paid service until Apple is able to collect payment and renew the subscription. Ensure that your app continues to provide service for subscriptions that are already in Billing Grace Period.

Set availability for an auto-renewable subscription

All in-app purchases, including subscriptions, are available worldwide. You can’t exclude specific territories for availability. If you need to restrict product access for a specific reason, develop a solution within your app.

Learn how to set availability for auto-renewable subscription with the App Store Connect API.

Set availability for a subscription

Subscription availability is managed by the Cleared for Sale checkbox on the subscription’s page in App Store Connect. You don’t need to clear a subscription for sale in order to test in-app purchases or submit an in-app purchase.

Required role: An Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager can edit this selection before the subscription is approved and cleared for sale. After the subscription is approved and cleared for sale, only the Account Holder can edit this selection. View role permissions.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription group, then click the subscription.
Under Availability, select Cleared for Sale to make your subscription available for sale.
This setting automatically releases the subscription on the App Store after approval.
Click Save.

Keep in mind that even if you clear your subscription for sale, it may not be available for purchase. Monitor the in-app purchase status to understand if action is needed from you. To automatically release your subscriptions on the App Store after approval, you must clear it for sale.

Remove an auto-renewable subscription from sale

Required Role: Account Holder. View role permissions.

If you want to discontinue an auto-renewable subscription, consider the impact on users and any communications you might need to provide. Also consider whether your app still functions without the subscription. If not, remove your app from the App Store.

Keep in mind that you’re required by the Paid Applications Agreement to provide the full amount of content to eligible subscribers through the subscription duration.

Taking the following steps before removing your auto-renewable subscription from sale can help ensure a smooth experience:

Before discontinuing an auto-renewable subscription, remove it from sale to avoid additional sign ups and renewals. We recommend timing the removal of your subscription to be equivalent to its duration. For example, you should remove a one-month subscription from sale at least 31 days before you discontinue the subscription service.
If you are unable to provide the full amount of content to eligible subscribers through the subscription duration before removing the subscription, contact us.
Provide subscribers with advanced notice of the discontinuation of your subscription service through channels such as email, website, and in-app messaging. We recommend notifying them at least 31 days before discontinuing the subscription service.
End any promotions of the subscription to discourage purchases.

To remove your subscription from sale:

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click the subscription group, then the subscription.
Under Availability, deselect Cleared for Sale to remove your subscription from sale. Click Removing from Sale in the dialog.
Click Save.

Apps in the Magazines and Newspapers category need at least one active auto-renewable subscription to be listed in that category. If you want to discontinue the only auto-renewable subscription in your app, you must switch to a different category and submit a new binary to App Store Connect. Then you'll be able to remove the subscription.

Offer non-renewing subscriptions

All in-app purchase products, including subscriptions, are available worldwide — you can’t exclude specific territories for availability. If you need to restrict product access for a specific reason, you develop a solution from inside the app.

Create a non-renewing subscription

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Scroll down to Non-Renewing Subscriptions, and click Manage.
Click the add button (+).
Enter a reference name and product ID, then click Create.
Choose a price from the tiered options list.
Click Save.

Add localizations

From My Apps, select your app.
In the Sidebar under Features, click Subscriptions.
Click Non-Renewing Subscriptions.
Click the subscription name.
Scroll down to the App Store Localization and click Add Localization.
Choose your Localization territory, display name, and description.
Click Create.

Generate a shared secret

To increase the security between your server and Apple’s servers when validating a subscription or in-app purchase, include a shared secret with your request to verify receipts.

A shared secret is a 32 character hexadecimal string generated in App Store Connect. You may generate a primary shared secret, which is single code for all of your apps, or an app-specific shared secret for individual apps. You may also use a primary shared secret for some of your apps, and an app-specific shared secret for others.

For information about incorporating a shared secret into your app’s receipt handling, see Validating Receipts with the App Store.

Required role: Account Holder or Admin. View role permissions.

View or generate a shared secret for all your apps (primary shared secret)

To view or generate a shared secret:

From Users and Access, click Shared Secret.
Click Generate.
Copy the code and use it for your transactions receipt for all of your apps with auto-renewable subscriptions.

When you generate a new shared secret, all apps in your organization that use a shared secret should use the new value to verify auto-renewable subscriptions.

View or generate a shared secret for an individual app (app-specific shared secret)

You can access the app-specific shared secret from the Subscriptions page for an app. You may want to use an app-specific shared secret if you want to keep this code private for this app, or if you are planning to transfer this app to another developer account.

Note: Once an app uses an app-specific shared secret, it can no longer use the primary shared secret. App-specific shared secrets cannot be deleted, only regenerated.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under General, click App Information.
In the App-Specific Shared Secret section, click Manage.
You can generate a shared secret for individual apps, or regenerate a shared secret.
Note: Clicking Regenerate will automatically generate a new shared secret, and any previously generated shared secret for this app will be invalidated.
Then click Done.
To generate a shared secret, click Generate or Regenerate in the dialog.
Copy the code and use it for your transactions receipt for this app.

When you regenerate an app-specific shared secret, use the new value to verify your auto-renewable subscriptions for this app.

Enter a URL for App Store server notifications

App Store Server Notifications provide information about key events related to your in-app purchases, such as changes to a subscription's status or the refund of an in-app purchase. In order to receive these notifications from the App Store, you must provide a URL in App Store Connect that links to your server. You can enter URLs for both production and sandbox endpoints.

If you haven't yet configured your server to receive App Store Server Notifications, visit Enabling App Store Server Notifications. Refer to App Store Server Notifications for documentation on the notifications and their meanings.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Enter a production URL for App Store Server Notifications

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under General, click App Information.
Scroll down to General Information, then go to App Store Server Notifications.
Under Production Server URL, click Set Up URL.
Enter the URL that you've determined for App Store Server Notifications.
Choose either Version 1 or Version 2 notifications. Learn about versions of App Store Server Notifications.
Click Save.

Enter a URL for testing App Store Server Notifications in a Sandbox environment

If you do not provide a Sandbox URL in App Store Connect, please note that the App Store will automatically send notifications for both environments to the Production URL provided. If you only provide a Sandbox URL, no notifications will be sent in production.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under General, click App Information.
Scroll down to General Information, then go to App Store Server Notifications.
Under Sandbox Server URL, click Set Up URL.
Enter the URL that you've determined for App Store Server Notifications.
Choose either Version 1 or Version 2 notifications. Learn about versions of App Store Server Notifications.
Click Save.

Edit your URL for App Store Server Notifications

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under General, click App Information.
Scroll down to General Information, then go to App Store Server Notifications.
Next to the URL you want to edit, click Edit.
Enter the desired URL and click Save.

Test in-app purchases

To test in-app purchases without creating StoreKit transactions, use Sandbox, a test environment that uses the infrastructure of the App Store but doesn’t process actual payments. Instead, it returns transactions as if payments were processed successfully.

You can test any of your in-app purchases that appear in App Store Connect. As a reminder, setting an in-app purchase to Cleared for Sale will publish the in-app purchase in production, which isn’t required for testing. Learn how to set availability for in-app purchases and set availability for an auto-renewable subscription.

You can add Sandbox testers and manage the following settings for them in App Store Connect:

App Store country or region

You can change the account region of a test account to any of the 175 App Store regions. This allows you to test on different storefronts using the same Sandbox Apple ID, without having to create new testers.

Once you change the region, you will need to sign in again with your Sandbox Apple ID on your device to complete this change.

Subscription renewal rate

Sandbox allows you to test subscription events such as renewals, state changes, and interrupted purchases without having to wait the length of the subscription duration in production. Once you’ve added testers in sandbox, you can choose a subscription renewal speed for each tester to determine how quickly subscriptions renew. By default, accounts are set to a speed equalization of 1 month = 5 minutes, but you can slow down or speed up the renewal period, based on the options below. Subscriptions renew up to 12 times before auto-renewal turns off on the thirteenth renewal attempt.

The columns in the chart below represent each of the accelerated renewal rates you can select. The corresponding test durations are listed underneath the accelerated rates for each product duration.

Subscription Duration	Renewal every 3 Minutes	Renewal every 5 minutes (Default)	Renewal every 15 minutes	Renewal every 30 minutes	Renewal every hour
1 week	3 minutes	3 minutes	5 minutes	10 minutes	15 minutes
1 month	3 minutes	5 minutes	15 minutes	30 minutes	1 hour
2 months	6 minutes	10 minutes	30 minutes	1 hour	2 hours
3 months	9 minutes	15 minutes	45 minutes	1 hour 30 minutes	3 hours
6 months	18 minutes	30 minutes	1 hour 30 minutes	3 hours	6 hours
1 year	36 minutes	1 hour	3 hours	6 hours	12 hours

Interrupted purchases

You can test interrupted purchase scenarios on a device running iOS 14 or later by enabling interrupted purchases in App Store Connect for a specific tester Sandbox Apple ID. If this option is selected, on-device purchase attempts by that Sandbox Apple ID will be interrupted in the sandbox environment and continue to be interrupted until the option is deselected or the tester agrees to terms and conditions on their iOS device. This allows you to test your app’s handling of an interruption to ensure a seamless customer experience.

In general, an interrupted purchase is experienced anytime a customer needs to address an issue with their Apple ID. For example, they may need to agree to updated terms and conditions or update an expired payment method.

To learn what to test and how to use your device to test, view documentation on testing interrupted purchases and testing in-app purchases.

Learn about additional settings you can manage for testers in iOS Account Settings to test scenarios like subscription renewals that are in the billing retry state.

Billing Retry

When a subscription goes into billing retry, reference the following chart for both the Billing Retry and Grace Period durations for each sandbox renewal speed. Billing Grace Period starts immediately when the Billing Retry period starts, and ends when it either times out, or when the subscription is recovered, whichever is first.

	Renewal every 3 Minutes		Renewal every 5 minutes (default)		Renewal every 15 minutes		Renewal every 30 minutes		Renewal every hour
	Billing Retry	Billing Grace Period	Billing Retry	Billing Grace Period	Billing Retry	Billing Grace Period	Billing Retry	Billing Grace Period	Billing Retry	Billing Grace Period
Weekly subscriptions	6 minutes	3 minutes	10 minutes	3 minutes	30 minutes	5 minutes	1 hour	10 minutes	15 minutes	2 hours
Monthly and Yearly subscriptions	6 minutes	3 minutes	10 minutes	5 minutes	30 minutes	15 minutes	1 hour	30 minutes	1 hour	2 hours

Sandbox attempts to recover subscriptions at least 6 times during the Billing Retry Period.

Follow the steps outlined in Testing In-App Purchases with Sandbox to understand what to test and how to use your device in a testing environment.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, or Developer. View role permissions.

Editing tester settings

To modify the settings for a sandbox tester:

From Users and Access, click Sandbox Testers to view Sandbox Apple IDs.
Click the Sandbox Apple ID you want to modify.
In the dialog that appears, make your desired edits.
Click Save.

Clearing purchase history

You can clear the purchase history for a tester to continue testing with the same Sandbox Apple ID. Clearing purchase history will delete all past auto-renewable subscriptions and nonconsumables purchased by the selected testers in the sandbox environment. Customer accounts aren’t affected.

To clear tester purchase history:

From Users and Access, under Sandbox, click Sandbox Testers.
Click Edit.
Select the checkbox for each tester you want to modify and click Clear Purchase History.
Click Clear Purchase History in the dialog that appears.
Sandbox Apple IDs with a high number of purchases may take longer to clear. This action cannot be reversed.

Set tax category for in-app purchases

By default, the tax category for in-app purchases is set to the same tax category as the app. To learn how to set the tax category for your app, visit Set a tax category. You can choose to set a different tax category for your in-app purchase if necessary.

Changes to your in-app purchase’s tax category only affect future transactions and won’t affect the price of your in-app purchase.

Required role: Admin, Marketing, or App Manager. View role permissions.

To change the tax category for a specific in-app purchase:

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases or Subscriptions.
Click the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.
Scroll down to the Tax Category section.
Click the Edit button and select the tax category that best describes your in-app purchase.
Depending on your selection, you may be asked to describe your in-app purchase further by selecting a subcategory and/or attributes.
Click Save.
Note: Once you change an in-app purchase’s tax category, it will be managed separately from the app’s tax category. Future changes to the app’s tax category won’t change the tax category of the in-app purchase.

To restore the tax category of an in-app purchase to the app default:

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases or Subscriptions.
Click the in-app purchase you want to view or edit.
Scroll down to the Tax Category section.
Click Edit and select “Match to parent app.”
Click Save.

Add in-app purchases to promote (iOS)

You can promote in-app purchases and subscriptions on your App Store product page if you’ve added a promotional image and your app is an iOS app. In the App Store Promotions section, you can add and re-order your promoted in-app purchases. You can have an unlimited number of in-app purchases in this list, but can only promote up to 20 at a time to display on your App Store product page in all territories on devices running iOS 11 or later. Learn about promoting in-app purchases.

Your app will need to support the delegate method in SKPaymentTransactionObserver in order to display on your App Store product page, and all in-app purchases and metadata must be approved by App Review.

Note that in-app purchase promotion isn't currently available on the App Store for iMessage.

Learn how to manage promoted in-app purchases and subscriptions with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Add or remove in-app purchases for promotion

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click App Store Promotions.
Click Edit.
Select the in-app purchases you wish to promote.
Click Save.

Add or remove in-app purchase for promotion.

You can add or remove in-app purchases for promotion at any time. Keep in mind that if an app is not ready for sale or the in-app purchase is pending approval, it may not be available on your App Store product page even when it is available for App Store Promotion. Allow up to 24 hours for changes to reflect on your App Store product page.

Change the order of your promoted in-app purchases

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click App Store Promotions.
Click Edit.
Navigate to the in-app purchase you want to modify, then click the reordering control on the left of the in-app purchase name and drag it to a new position to change it's ranking on your App Store Product page.
Click Save.

Change order of promoted in-app purchases.

Allow up to 24 hours for changes to reflect on your App Store product page.

Promote in-app purchases to relevant customers only

If your app supports the SKProductStorePromotionController API, you can customize which promoted in-app purchases a user sees on a specific device. For example, you can hide an item that a user already has on that device, or show the most relevant levels in a game based on their gameplay.

You must configure this setting on your in-app purchase page in App Store Connect in addition to supporting the API. By default, your promoted in-app purchase show on all devices, even those without the app installed.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Click on the in-app purchase you want to modify.
Scroll down to the App Store Promotion (Optional) section.
Under “Show to all App Store users, even those who don't have the app installed”, click Change Visibility. In the dialog that appears, click Save. Note that a customer needs to have opened your app on their device at least once to view relevant promoted in-app purchases.
- To show the promotion to everyone regardless of whether they have your app installed or a compatible device, select the checkbox “Show to all App Store users, even those who don't have the app installed”. If you deselect the checkbox but haven't implemented the API, your in-app purchase will not be visible on the App Store.
Click Save.

Turn on Family Sharing for in-app purchases

Apps that offer auto-renewable subscriptions and nonconsumable in-app purchases can enable Family Sharing, which will allow users to share their purchase with up to five additional family members. You can choose which of your in-app purchases to allow Family Sharing for in App Store Connect.

Whether or not a user’s purchases are automatically shared with their family members depends on the type of in-app purchase, the user’s sharing preferences, and if the purchase was made before or after Family Sharing was turned on in App Store Connect. Users have the option of turning off Family Sharing in their subscription settings at any time.

	Auto-renewable subscriptions	Non-consumable in-app purchases
New Users	Family Sharing is enabled by default depending on the preference set by the purchaser in Manage Subscriptions.	Family Sharing is enabled by default if the following conditions are met: - user has purchase sharing enabled. - the user's family members are sharing payment. - the app is not hidden from the user's purchase history.
Existing Users	Users must opt-in to Family Sharing from within their manage subscriptions page.	You can unlock access to the in-app purchase using receipt validation or App Store server notifications if the following conditions are met: - user has purchase sharing enabled. - the user's family members are sharing payment. - the app is not hidden from the user's purchase history.

Auto-renewable subscriptions

Non-consumable in-app purchases

New Users

Family Sharing is enabled by default depending on the preference set by the purchaser in Manage Subscriptions.

Family Sharing is enabled by default if the following conditions are met:

- user has purchase sharing enabled.

- the user's family members are sharing payment.

- the app is not hidden from the user's purchase history.

Existing Users

Users must opt-in to Family Sharing from within their manage subscriptions page.

You can unlock access to the in-app purchase using receipt validation or App Store server notifications if the following conditions are met:

- user has purchase sharing enabled.

- the user's family members are sharing payment.

- the app is not hidden from the user's purchase history.

Required role: Account Holder, App Manager.

Turn on Family Sharing

Please note that once you turn on Family Sharing for an in-app purchases in App Store Connect, you cannot turn it off.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases, or Subscriptions then the subscription group.
Select your in-app purchase, or subscription, from the list.
Scroll down to the Family Sharing section.
Click Turn On.

Submit in-app purchases

After you create an in-app purchase or subscription product in App Store Connect, you can submit it to Apple for review. If you’re submitting your first in-app purchase, you must submit it with a new version of your app.

You can submit additional in-app purchases for your app on the App Store at any time. However, if you’re adding a new in-app purchase type to your app (for example, you usually offer consumables, but want to offer auto-renewable subscriptions), you must do so with an app version update.

To submit an in-app purchase for review, it must have the Ready to Submit in-app purchase status. If it doesn't have this status, complete any missing information.

You don’t need to clear an in-app purchase for sale in order to submit it for review. Only set the in-app purchase to Cleared for Sale if you want the in-app purchase to automatically release on the App Store after approval. View Set availability for in-app purchases and Set availability for an auto-renewable subscription.

Learn how to submit in-app purchases and subscriptions with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, or App Manager. View role permissions.

Submit an in-app purchase for the first time

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, click your app version.
On the right, scroll down to the In-App Purchases and Subscriptions section, then click Select in-app purchases and subscriptions. When submitting a subscription for the first time, the subscription(s) need to be submitted with a version. If there are multiple subscriptions related to that version, all of them should be submitted together. Once you have one or more subscriptions approved for your app, additional subscriptions can be submitted at a later time with or without a version submission.
In the Add In-App Purchases or Subscriptions dialog, select the in-app purchases you want to submit.
Click done, then Save

When you are ready, submit your app for review. To automatically release your in-app purchase on the App Store after approval, you must clear it for sale.

Note: If you have already submitted an in-app purchase with your app, and you decide to add additional in-app purchases later, you can do so without submitting an app version.

Submit an in-app purchase for a published app

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar under Features, click In-App Purchases.
Click the in-app purchase you want to submit.
On the top right, click Submit for Review.

Configure Game Center

Game Center overview

Game Center is an Apple service that provides social gaming functionality to games. Game Center allows users to track their scores on a leaderboard, view achievement progress, invite friends to play a game, and start a multiplayer game with friends or through auto-match.

Adding support for certain Game Center features, like leaderboards and achievements, requires you to provide additional assets and metadata. Some examples include achievement images and descriptions, as well as leaderboard artwork. You can provide and manage all of these within your App Store Connect account.

After you’ve implemented Game Center features into your game, you’re ready to enter metadata in App Store Connect. When developing a game, you may wish to develop, design, configure, and test Game Center components as you develop the app, rather than implement each step completely before proceeding to the next.

Learn how to manage Game Center enabled versions with the App Store Connect API.

Required role: Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, or Marketing. View role permissions.

Enable Game Center in Xcode.
In Xcode, create your project, enter an app name and bundle ID, then enable Game Center which adds the GameKit framework to your project. For more information, visit Adding capabilities to your app.
Configure Game Center in App Store Connect.
In App Store Connect, add an app to your account that matches the bundle ID in Xcode, enable your app version for Game Center, and configure Game Center components such as leaderboards, achievements, challenges, groups, and multiplayer compatibility.
Incorporate Game Center into your game.
In Xcode, incorporate Game Center by adding code to your app and configuring the components used by the service. While these components are configured separately from your app bundle, they should be intimately tied to the code in your game to ensure Game Center’s specific design and development requirements are met. For development and design information, visit GameKit and Human Interface Guidelines.
Test your game.
Test your Game Center components to ensure they work individually and together. Apple allows all prerelease development to occur in exactly the same server environment as released games. This brings advantages like allowing testers to play with the full player base, not just other testers.
Distribute your game.
Add Game Center components to an app version. This step ensures that your Game Center components are included in the desired platform version of your App Store submission. Complete this step before submitting your app for review.

Configure Game Center components

Configure leaderboards

Leaderboards allow players to compare their scores against other players in the same game. When you configure leaderboards in App Store Connect, you specify details such as the scores to collect and how to order them. For each language you want a leaderboard to display in, you specify the leaderboard name, score format, and score unit. You can also include a localized image to illustrate the score in the leaderboard.

There are two types of leaderboards that can be created:

Classic leaderboards: A leaderboard where score data will never reset unless the leaderboard is deleted.
Recurring leaderboards: A leaderboard where score data will continually be reset based on set preferences.

You can create up to 500 leaderboards per app.

For development information, see Leaderboards in GameKit.

Create a classic leaderboard

From My Apps, select the app you wish to enable for Game Center.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
Click the add button (+) in the Leaderboards section.
Select Choose next to Classic Leaderboard.
Input your leaderboard metadata. For more information, see Leaderboard properties.
- Leaderboard Reference Name
- Leaderboard ID
- Score Format
- Score Submission Type
- Sort Order
- Score Range (Optional)
Under Leaderboard Localization, add one or more languages by clicking Add Language.
Enter the required information:
- In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.
- In the Name field, enter a localized reference name for the leaderboard. For example, if you choose Finnish from the Language menu, enter the Finnish name for the leaderboard in the Name field.
- Choose a localized score format from the Score Format menu, then enter the singular and plural version of your score format suffix. If Score Format Suffix Plural doesn’t appear, it’s not needed for the selected language. Additionally, if you want a space to appear between the score and the suffix, you can enter a space followed by the suffix text.
- Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.
- Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the above steps for each language.
Click Save.

Create a recurring leaderboard

Recurring leaderboards add flexibility to your leaderboard configuration by allowing you to reset your leaderboards’ scores. The ability to reset your leaderboards creates a more competitive gaming experience, as it allows players to set a new top score for each leaderboard recurrence.

Leaderboards have a minimum recurrence of five minutes, a maximum recurrence of 30 days, and aren't allowed to overlap.

From My Apps , select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
Click the add button (+) in the Leaderboards section.
Select Choose next to Recurring Leaderboard.
Input your leaderboard metadata. For more information, see Leaderboard properties.
- Leaderboard Reference Name
- Leaderboard ID
- Score Format Type
- Score Submission Type
- Sort Order
- Score Range (Optional)
- Start Date and Time: The date and time when scores will begin posting to this leaderboard. The date and time are based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
- Duration: The length of time scores on this leaderboard will be posted.
- Restarts Every: The frequency at which this leaderboard will be created.
Under Leaderboard Localization, add one or more languages by clicking Add Language.
Enter the required information:
- In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.
- In the Name field, enter a localized display name for the leaderboard. For example, if you choose Finnish from the Language menu, enter the Finnish name for the leaderboard in the Name field.
- Choose a localized score format from the Score Format menu, then enter the singular and plural version of your score format suffix. If Score Format Suffix Plural doesn’t appear, it’s not needed for the selected language. Additionally, if you want a space to appear between the score and the suffix, you can enter a space followed by the suffix text.
- Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.
- Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the above steps for each language.
Click Save.

Delete a leaderboard

The status of a leaderboard is displayed in the Status column of the Leaderboards table. The possible status values are described in Leaderboard Statuses. A Delete button appears in this column when a leaderboard is eligible for deletion. After a leaderboard is available in Game Center, it can’t be deleted.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
From the Leaderboard section, hold the pointer over the leaderboard you want to delete, then click the delete button.
Confirm the deletion, then click Save.

Configure leaderboard sets

Leaderboard sets organize several leaderboards into a single unit. For example, in a game that includes many levels, you could define a leaderboard set to organize the leaderboards for each level. A single app can have 100 leaderboard sets, and a set can have a maximum of 100 leaderboards.

You must have at least one leaderboard for your app before you can create a leaderboard set. After you add leaderboard sets to your app, all future leaderboards that you configure for the app must be included in a leaderboard set.

The process to start using leaderboard sets to organize your app’s leaderboards includes these steps:

Create the first leaderboard set.
Create additional leaderboard sets.
Add new leaderboards directly into leaderboard sets.

When you create the first leaderboard set, App Store Connect ensures that all existing leaderboards for the app are included in at least one leaderboard set.

Click View Leaderboards in Leaderboard Sets to see how your leaderboard sets are organized. The page that appears lists leaderboards by Reference Name and Leaderboard ID, and also includes checkmarks to specify which sets your leaderboards belong to.

Merge leaderboards into sets

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
In the Leaderboards section from the More menu, select Move All Leaderboards into Leaderboard Sets.
Enter the leaderboard set reference name and leaderboard set ID, then click Continue.
Click Add to Leaderboard Set to select which leaderboards you would like to include in the set.
Under Leaderboard Set Localization, add one or more languages, then click Save.

You can add new leaderboard sets to your app to further customize how your leaderboards are displayed. Each set provides you with the ability to specify how a leaderboard is displayed within the set. You can put the same leaderboard into more than one set and configure a different display name for the leaderboard within each set.

Add a new leaderboard set

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
In the Leaderboard Sets section, click the add button (+).
Enter the leaderboard set reference name and leaderboard set ID, then click Continue.
Under Leaderboards in This Set, click Add to Leaderboard Set. You must add at least one leaderboard to the set.
Select a leaderboard, add a Display name in desired languages, then click Save.
To add additional leaderboards to the set, repeat steps 5 and 6.
Click Add Language under Leaderboard Set Localization to add one or more languages to your leaderboard set. You must add at least one language.
Enter the required information:
- In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.
- In the Display Name field, enter a localized display name for this leaderboard set as you would like it to appear in Game Center.
- Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.
- Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the above steps for each language.
Click Save.

Add a new leaderboard to a set

From My Apps , select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
In the Leaderboard section, click the add button (+).
Choose which leaderboard type you would like to add to your set, then complete the leaderboard configuration using the steps in Configure leaderboards.
Under Leaderboard Sets, click Add to a Leaderboard Set.
Note: To complete your leaderboard creation, it must be added to an existing leaderboard set.
Choose the leaderboard set to contain your leaderboard, add one or more languages, and click Save.
Add a language in the Leaderboard Localization section by clicking Add Language.
Enter the required information:
- In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.
- In the Name field, enter a localized reference name for the leaderboard.
- Choose a localized score format from the Score Format menu, then enter the singular and plural version of your score format suffix. If Score Format Suffix Plural doesn’t appear, it’s not needed for the selected language. Additionally, if you want a space to appear between the score and the suffix, you can enter a space followed by the suffix text.
- Optionally, you can click Choose File to add a localized image for your leaderboard.
- Click Save. To add additional language support for your leaderboards, repeat the steps above for each language.
Click Save.

Delete leaderboard sets

Before deleting a leaderboard set, you must ensure that all leaderboards within the set have been added to another set. Only after the leaderboards have been added to a new set can you delete an existing set.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
From the Leaderboard Sets section, hold the pointer over the leaderboard you want to delete, then click the Delete button as highlighted in the screenshot below:
Click Save.

If your app contains 100 or fewer leaderboards, you can click Remove All Leaderboards from Leaderboard Sets and all of your current leaderboard sets are deleted. To locate this option, navigate to the Leaderboards section and select the More menu.

Note: This option doesn’t appear for apps with more than 100 leaderboards. You must remove any excess leaderboards before you can use the Remove All Leaderboards from Leaderboard Sets button.

Configure achievements

An achievement is a distinction that a player earns for reaching a milestone or performing an action defined by you and programmed into your app. When you configure achievements in App Store Connect, you specify details about the achievement, such as the points earned, whether the achievement is hidden from players before they reach the goal, and whether players can earn the achievement more than once. For each language or region you want the achievement to display in, you specify the achievement Title, Pre-earned Description, and Earned Description to keep users engaged during gameplay. You also specify an image to represent the achievement. You can create up to 100 achievements per app.

For development information, see Achievements in GameKit.

Add an achievement

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
Click the add button (+) under the Achievements section.
Input your achievement metadata. For more information, see Achievement properties.
- Achievement Reference Name
- Achievement ID
- Point Value
- Hidden: Select Yes if you want the achievement to be hidden until the user earns it; otherwise, select No.
- Achievable More Than Once: Select Yes if the user can earn the achievement multiple times; otherwise, select No.
Add one or more language in the Achievement Localization section by clicking Add Language.
Enter your Achievement language properties:
- In the dialog that appears, choose a language from the Language menu.
- Title: Enter a localized name for the achievement.
- Pre-earned Description: Enter a localized description of the achievement.
- Earned Description: Enter a localized description of the achievement.
- Add a localized image by selecting Choose File.
- Click Save. To add additional language support for your achievements, repeat the above steps for each language.
Click Save.

Delete an achievement

The status of an achievement is displayed in the far-right column of the Achievements table. The possible status values are described in Achievement Statuses. A Delete button appears in this column when an achievement is eligible for deletion. After an achievement is available to players for any version of your app, it can’t be deleted and the point value can’t be changed.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
From the Achievements section, hold the pointer over the achievement you want to delete, then click the delete button.
Click Save.

Arrange leaderboards and achievements

Leaderboards and achievements are presented to players in the order they appear in App Store Connect. You can change the order of the leaderboards and achievements on the app’s Game Center page.

Arrange leaderboards

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
To arrange your leaderboards, click the reordering control on the left side of the Leaderboards row and drag it to a new position.
Click Save.

Set a default leaderboard

A default leaderboard is the first leaderboard presented to a user when using a Game Center-enabled app. The first leaderboard created for an app is automatically set as the default leaderboard; however, you can set any classic, recurring, or combined leaderboard as the default.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
Locate the Default column in the Leaderboards section, then hold the pointer over the leaderboard you would like to set as default.
Click Make Default.
Click Save.

Arrange achievements

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
In the Achievements section, find the achievement you want to reorder.
To arrange your achievements, click the reordering control on the left side of the Achievements row and drag it to a new position.
Click Save.

Enable challenges

Achievements and leaderboards allow players to measure and track their individual game progress; however, some players find it more satisfying to beat a friend’s score and test their progress against each other. Game Center embraces this idea in the form of challenges. Using challenges, players in Game Center can challenge each other to beat earned scores or achievements. Game Center supports two kinds of challenges:

A score challenge is issued based on a leaderboard score previously earned by the challenger. The challenge is completed when the challenged player earns a better score. When the challenged player beats a score challenge, Game Center automatically issues a new score challenge to the original challenger. Score challenges continue to pass back and forth between the two players as they work to beat each other’s scores.
An achievement challenge is issued from an achievement that the challenger has already completed. The challenge is completed when the challenged player completes the achievement.

For development information, see Challenges in GameKit.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
In the Challenges section, click the checkbox to “Allow challenges in this game.”
Click Save.

See alsoGameKit

Create Game Center groups

Game Center groups overview

In the context of Game Center, a group is two or more apps that share leaderboards and achievements. The purpose of adding an app to a Game Center group is to share data, specifically to share leaderboards and achievements. When you add an app with existing Game Center assets to a group, you decide which of the app’s leaderboards and achievements are retained as part of the group. App Store Connect guides you through this process by presenting only compatible assets and options at each step.

You can define leaderboards and achievements for a group in two ways:

Define leaderboards and achievements for an individual app; then, when you move the app to a group, you specify how the app leaderboards and achievements are merged with the group leaderboards and achievements.
Add an app to a group that already has leaderboards and achievements defined. The app uses the existing group leaderboards and achievements. Like apps, groups can organize leaderboards into sets. If a group uses leaderboard sets, apps you add to the group either already use leaderboard sets or can’t have any leaderboards defined.

While an app can only belong to one group, there’s no restriction on the type of apps that can belong to a group. For example, you can create a group containing iOS and macOS apps that share the same leaderboards and achievements. There’s no limit to the number of groups per account or to the number of apps that can belong to a group.

When you’re ready to release a version of an app that’s part of a group, you determine which of the group leaderboards and achievements go live with the app. In addition, you set the app’s multiplayer compatibility options to include the other apps from the group. See Distribute a Game Center app.

Create a group

A group can’t exist without containing at least one app, so you create a group by selecting an app and starting the group from the app.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
In the Move to Group section, select Move to Group.
Enter your group reference name and click Create Group in the Move to a New Group section.
- If your app does not have existing leaderboards or achievements, this is the final step for creating your Game Center group.
- If your app has existing leaderboards and achievements, their IDs are listed with a “grp.” prefix. You can keep the ID the same, or create a new ID in the New ID field.
Click Continue.
Select the “All changes are accurate” checkbox to confirm your changes, then click Save.

Add an app to a group

After you create a group, you can add other apps to the group. The purpose of adding an app is to share leaderboard and achievement data. When you add an app with existing Game Center assets to a group, you decide which of the app’s leaderboards and achievements are retained as part of the group.

If an app has existing leaderboards and achievements, you must decide whether to add or merge the app’s components with those in the group. Added leaderboards and achievements are defined in the group as they were in the app prior to being grouped. Merging your leaderboards and achievements will replace the version in the app with the one you choose from the group. App Store Connect simplifies this process by presenting only compatible assets and available options at each step. The options that App Store Connect presents to you are dependent on your app and group data. You won’t see options for types of assets (for example, leaderboard sets) that the app doesn’t have.

Important: If the group uses leaderboard sets, the app you add to the group must use leaderboard sets. See Configure leaderboard sets. Additionally, apps can only belong to one Game Center group. If you wish to add your app to a new group, it must be removed from any existing groups.

Guidelines for Moving Leaderboards

The choices available when merging leaderboards depend on the type of leaderboard, its property values, and your previous selections. The guidelines for merging leaderboards are:

Leaderboards can only merge with a compatible leaderboard. Leaderboards are compatible if the values of the score format type and sort order properties are the same.
Leaderboards must be moved in the order App Store Connect presents them.
A combined leaderboard can only merge with a combined leaderboard. If a compatible combined leaderboard isn’t available, it must be added to the group instead of merged.
An attached leaderboard can merge with an attached leaderboard only if their combined (parent) leaderboards are also being merged with each other.
An attached leaderboard can merge with a classic leaderboard. The classic leaderboard is attached to the corresponding group combined leaderboard.
A classic leaderboard can merge with a classic leaderboard.
A classic leaderboard can merge with an attached leaderboard.

After merging two leaderboards, all of the group’s leaderboard property values remain the same with the exception of these properties:

Score Range: If the app’s score range is larger than the group’s score range, the group’s score range expands to include the app’s score range. For example, if the range of the app’s leaderboard is 1–500 and the range of the group’s leaderboard is 1–250, the range of the group’s leaderboard is set to 1–500.
Languages: When merging a leaderboard that has more languages than a group, the additional leaderboard languages will be automatically applied to the merged leaderboard. For example, if a grouped leaderboard supports English and the leaderboard being merged supports English and French, the French language will be copied over to the merged leaderboard.

Guidelines for Moving Achievements

There are no restrictions for adding achievements to a group; however, the following remain true:

The maximum number of points for each achievement is 100.
The total maximum number of points for a single app's achievements is 1000.
There are no restrictions on the total points for all group achievements.

After the merge, all of the group’s achievement property values remain the same with the exception of the languages, which follow this rule:

When merging an achievement that has more languages than a group, the additional achievement languages will be automatically applied to the merged achievement. For example, if a grouped achievement supports English and the achievement being merged supports English and French, the French language will be copied over to the merged achievement.

Add an app to a group

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
In the Move to Group section, select Move to Group.
Under Move to an Existing Group, select the Game Center group that you’d like to merge with your app.
Review the IDs for your leaderboards and achievements that are being moved to the group. You must choose to add or merge your existing leaderboards and achievements.
Note: Your existing leaderboard and achievement IDs are listed with a “grp.” prefix. Leaderboards and achievements that aren't merged can keep same ID or be assigned a new one; however, the “grp.” prefix must be included when merging to a group.
- Add an app’s leaderboard to the leaderboards already defined for the group. The leaderboard appears in the group just as it did for the app.
- Merge an app’s leaderboard with an existing leaderboard in the group. If the app’s leaderboard ranks the same information as one of the group leaderboards, you can choose to use the group’s leaderboard for the app.
Click Continue.
Select the “All changes are accurate” checkbox to confirm your changes, then click Save.

Edit a group

After you create and add apps to a group, you can edit the group’s properties from the Game Center groups page. You follow the same steps to create and manage group leaderboards, leaderboard sets, combined leaderboards, and achievements as you would for a non-grouped app.

From My Apps, navigate to the ellipsis menu (...) at the top left of the page.
Click Game Center Groups.
After the Game Center Groups page opens, select the group you want to edit in the Manage Existing Groups section.

For more information, see Group properties.

Remove an app from a group

An app can only be removed from a group when a previous version of the app hasn’t been published to the App Store with a group leaderboard or achievement attached.

Convert an app from a group to single game

From My Apps, navigate to the ellipsis menu (...) at the top left of the page.
Click Game Center Groups.
In the “Apps in this Group” section, find the app you want to convert from a group game to a single game.
- If the app is the only app listed in the group, click Delete Group in the upper-left corner.
- If your app is one of multiple apps listed under “Apps in this Group,” navigate to the right-hand side of the row associated with the app you want to remove from the group, then click Delete. Be sure to remove any multiplayer compatibility settings defined for the app version.

Test a Game Center app

Test a Game Center app overview

Apple allows all prerelease development and testing to occur in exactly the same server environment as released games. This allows you to test how your app interacts with Game Center and brings several advantages including:

Simplifying the testing of version updates by allowing testers to play with the full player base, not just other testers
Removing implementation differences between the sandbox and production environments

By design, the achievements and high scores of a particular Game Center user are visible to that user's friends. This includes achievement and leaderboard scores that have not been formally released as part of a particular game version. Similarly, any game a Game Center player has played is visible to all of that player’s friends, even if that game has not yet been released.

If this data needs to be kept private as part of your release strategy, consider creating separate accounts for prerelease testing and carefully manage which Game Center users are allowed to become friends with those accounts.

Testing a Game Center-enabled app involves the following steps:

1. Configure Game Center.

2. Add leaderboards or achievements to the app version that you’d like to test. For information on adding leaderboards and achievements, see Enable your app version for Game Center.

3. Identify additional apps that you want to play with the app you’re testing, as described in Add multiplayer compatibility.

4. Test your Game Center components to ensure they work individually and together. For testing information, see Beta Testing Made Simple with TestFlight.

5. Once you’ve finished testing, Remove leaderboard test data.

Remove leaderboard test data

After testing your leaderboards, you should remove the leaderboard test data before submitting the app for review.

From My Apps, select your app.
In the toolbar, click Services. The page opens with the Game Center tab selected.
Click the More menu to the right of the Leaderboards section.
Click Delete Test Data.

Distribute a Game Center app

Enable your app version for Game Center

Once you’ve configured your Game Center components, enable Game Center in your app version before you submit your app for review. In the app’s Game Center section on the platform version page, you can enable Game Center functionality and select the components you want to apply to your app version:

Leaderboards to support in this app version
Achievements to support in this app version
Multiplayer compatibility: Select which apps and versions that you want your app to be compatible with

From My Apps, select your app.
In the sidebar, click the app version under the platform you wish to select, then go to the Game Center section of the app.
In the Game Center section, select the checkbox.
Once Game Center is enabled, you can add leaderboards, achievements, and multiplayer compatibility to the app version.

Add a leaderboard to your app version

Leaderboards can be added to your app version once configured. For information, see Configure leaderboards.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.
Click Select Leaderboards in the Leaderboards section, then choose the leaderboard(s) that you want to include in your app version.
Click Done.

Add leaderboard sets to a version

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.
Click Select Leaderboard Sets in the Leaderboard Sets section.
Choose the leaderboard set(s) that you want to include by clicking the add button (+).
Under New leaderboards, select the leaderboards that you want to include in your app version.
Click Done.

Add achievements to a version

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.
Click Select Achievements in the Achievements section.
Choose the achievement(s) that you want to include in your app version.
Click Done.

Add multiplayer compatibility

The Multiplayer Compatibility section of App Store Connect allows you to describe which versions of your Game Center-enabled apps can see each other during the matchmaking process. You can define the earliest multiplayer-compatible app version for iOS, macOS, and tvOS, and can even match games with different bundle identifiers against each other.

For more information about matchmaking, see the Player Invitations section of GameKit.

Select the earliest compatible version of an app

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version below your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.
Click the add button (+) to the right of Multiplayer Compatibility.
In the dialog that appears, select the app(s) that you want your app to be compatible with.
Select the earliest compatible version of your app from the menu. Only Game Center-enabled app versions will be available to select.
To add more compatible apps and versions, repeat the above steps for each app.
Note: Before you can test multiplayer compatibility for your app, you'll need to complete the steps above.

See alsoGameKit

Disable Game Center in your app

You can enable or disable Game Center for your app at the version level. Once an app version is approved with Game Center enabled, Game Center can no longer be disabled within that version. Instead, you’ll need to disable Game Center when submitting an updated app version to the App Store.

From My Apps, select your app. The page opens with the App Store tab selected.
In the sidebar, click the app version under your desired platform, then navigate to the Game Center section.
Deselect the Game Center checkbox to disable Game Center for the version.

See alsoCreate a new version

Reference

Upload tools

After you create an app record in App Store Connect, you can upload a build using Xcode, Transporter for macOS, or altool. If you use the App Store Connect API, you may wish to upload your binary using the Transporter command-line tool and JSON Web Tokens authentication. You can use the same JWTs you use for the API to upload your binary.

Upload your app binary files with Xcode

Xcode is Apple’s integrated development environment (IDE). You use Xcode to build apps for Apple products, including iPad, iPhone, Apple Watch, Apple TV, and Mac. Xcode provides tools to manage your entire development workflow — from creating your app to testing, optimizing, and submitting it to the App Store.

To learn how to upload your app binary using Xcode, visit Upload an app to App Store Connect, or in Xcode, choose Help > Xcode Help and search for “Upload an app.”

Download Xcode on the Mac App Store.

Supported Xcode Versions

App Store Connect supports the following versions of Xcode to upload your app for distribution on the App Store or to testers using TestFlight.

Target type	Built using Xcode	Uploaded using Xcode
iOS app iOS app extension	Xcode 12 or later	Xcode 6 or later
macOS app	Xcode 6 or later	Xcode 6 or later
tvOS app	Xcode 7.1 or later	Xcode 7.1 or later

Target type

Built using Xcode

Uploaded using Xcode

iOS app

iOS app extension

Xcode 12 or later

Xcode 6 or later

macOS app

Xcode 6 or later

tvOS app

Xcode 7.1 or later

Upload for all target types is supported for Transporter for macOS and altool.

Upload your app binary files with altool

You can use xcrun (included with Xcode) to invoke altool, a command-line tool that lets you notarize, validate, and upload your app binary files to the App Store. Specify one of the following in Terminal at the command-line:

$ xcrun altool --validate-app -f file -t platform -u username [-p password] [--output-format xml]$ xcrun altool --upload-app -f file -t platform -u username [-p password] [—output-format xml]

Note: If you use an automated build system, you can integrate the notarization process into your existing build scripts. The altool and stapler command-line tools (included within Xcode) allow you to upload your software to the Apple notary service, and to staple the resulting ticket to your executable. altool is located at /Applications/Xcode.app/Contents/Developer/usr/bin/altool.

See the Using altool guide for more information.

Upload your app binary files with the Transporter app

The Transporter app for macOS is a simple and easy way to upload an app to App Store Connect for distribution on the App Store. You can view delivery progress (including warnings, errors, and delivery logs), as well as a history of past deliveries.

You can download the Transporter app on the Mac App Store.

See the Transporter for macOS Help for more information.

My Apps

App information

App information refers to the set of properties of an app that are shared across the platforms added to an app. You set some of these properties when you add the app to your account, and later, you edit app information as required or depending on the app status.

For marketing guidelines on specifying this information, read Making the most of your product page on the App Store.

Property				Description
Name				The localized name of your app as it appears on the App Store. The name must be at least two characters and no more than 30 characters. It can be edited until you submit the app to App Review. Later, you can change the name when you create a new version or the status of the app version permits editing this property.
Subtitle				A summary of your app that will appear under your app’s name on the App Store. This can’t be longer than 30 characters.
Privacy Policy URL				A URL that links to your company’s privacy policy. This is required for all apps.
Bundle ID				A unique identifier for your app that is used throughout the system. (A build is uniquely identified by the combination of the bundle ID, version number, and build string.) You can’t change this property after you upload a build. Important: The Bundle ID property must match the bundle ID you set in the Xcode project.
SKU				A unique ID you give to your app for internal tracking that is not visible to customers. The SKU can contain letters, numbers, hyphens, periods, and underscores but not start with a hyphen, period, or underscore. You can’t change the SKU after you add the app to your account.
Apple ID				A unique identifier automatically generated for your app when you add the app to your account. You can view this property in the App Information section in App Store Connect. This identifier is also used in the URL for the App Store on desktop computers. You can’t edit this property. Note: This identifier is not the same as your Apple ID that you use to sign in to App Store Connect and your developer account.
Content Rights				Apps that contain, show, or access third-party content must have all the necessary rights to that content or be otherwise permitted to use it under the laws of each App Store country or region in which they’re available. Learn more about the App Store guidelines.
Age Rating				The age rating of your app for the purpose of parental controls on the App Store. Note that the rating is set at the app level in the App Information section and is applied across all platforms. For possible values, go to App ratings. This property is required.
Made for Kids				An indication that the app appears in the Kids category on the App Store. This property includes an age range set for the app. Once an app marked as Made for Kids is approved by App Review, this selection cannot be changed and all subsequent updates will need to follow the Kids category guidelines.
License Agreement				Apple provides a standard EULA (End-User License Agreement) that applies in all regions. You may provide a custom license agreement that supersedes the Apple EULA for one or more regions.
Primary language				The language that is the default for the metadata on the App Store when you don’t provide localized metadata for a given territory. You can change the primary language at any time.
Category (Primary and Secondary)				The categories that best describe your app. For macOS apps, you also set the app category in Xcode. The primary category you set in App Store Connect should match the category you set in Xcode. Apps that use NewsstandKit must set the app’s primary or secondary category to Magazines & Newspapers. For more information, see Choosing a Category.
Subcategory				If you select Games as the Primary or Secondary Category, you can also select one or two subcategories to help more accurately define your game.
Availability in the Republic of Korea - Rating Classification Number				If your app meets one or more of the following characteristics, a Rating Classification Number from the Game Rating and Administration Committee is required in order to offer it on the App Store in the Republic of Korea to users 19 years of age or older: Apps in the Casino subcategory with age rating 17+ Apps in the Games or Entertainment categories with a Frequent/Intense level of frequency in at least one of the following content descriptions: - Simulated Gambling - Sexual Content or Nudity - Alcohol, Tobacco, or Drug Use or Reference - Realistic Violence Please note that this field will display if your app is in the Games or Entertainment category with a rating of 17+, but is only required if your app meets the above criteria.
Availability in China mainland				Chinese law requires additional documentation for some apps to be available on the App Store in China mainland. Games must secure an approval number and apps with book and magazine content must secure an internet publishing permit from China’s National Press and Publication Administration (NPPA). Apps with religious content must secure an Internet Religious Information Permit from China’s National Religious Affairs Administration (NRAA). Apps with news content must obtain an Internet News Information Permit from the Cyberspace Administration of China (CAC). If you offer or plan to offer any of these on the App Store in China mainland, you provide the required information along with one or more supporting documents. To help verify your approval number, upload your game’s ISBN Issuing Letter or Approval Reply, and a copy of your latest Business License. Additionally, you can include an authorization agreement from the matching operator. To help verify your publishing permit, upload your internet publishing permit or other relevant permit from the NPPA, a publishing permit authorization letter from the authorizing party, a business license, an ICP license, or similar supporting documentation. To help verify your Internet Religious Information Permit, upload your Internet Religious Information Permit, a permit authorization letter from the authorizing party, a business license, an ICP license, or similar supporting documentation. To help verify your Internet News Information Permit, upload your Internet News Information Permit, a permit authorization letter from the authorizing party, a business license, an ICP license, or similar supporting documentation. Learn more about approval numbers from the NPPA. Learn more about internet publishing permits. Learn more about Internet Religious Information Permits. Learn more about Internet News Information Permits.
URL for App Store Server Notifications				If your app offers in-app purchases, you can receive server notifications from the App Store about key events by setting up an optional URL that links to your server. For more information, see Enable App Store Server Notifications.

Platform version information

Platform version information refers to the set of properties of an app version specific to each platform the app supports.

View product page marketing guidelines.

Property				Description
Language				The language you choose to localize your metadata. This property is editable depending on the app status.
Screenshots				Screenshots that show what your app looks like on a device. For details, visit Screenshot specifications. This property is required and can be localized.
App Preview				An app preview is an optional short video demonstrating your app. You may add up to three app previews for each localization, per device size. For details, visit App preview specifications.
Promotional Text				Promotional text lets you inform your App Store visitors of any current app features without requiring an updated submission. This text will appear above your description on the App Store for customers with devices running iOS 11 or later. This property can’t be longer than 170 characters.
Description				A description of the app, detailing the features and functionality. Limited to 4000 characters. The description should be in plain text, with line breaks as needed. HTML format is not supported. This property is required and can be localized.
Keywords				One or more keywords (each greater than two characters ) describing your app. Separate multiple keywords with commas. You can provide up to 100 bytes of content. Your app is searchable by app name and company name, so you don’t duplicate these values in the keyword list. Names of other apps or companies aren't allowed. This property is required and can be localized.
Support URL				The URL of the support website you plan to provide for users, which displays on the App Store for users who have downloaded your app. This URL must lead to actual contact information (legal address, email address, telephone number), as may be required by local law, so that users can reach you regarding app issues, general feedback, and feature enhancement requests. Specify the entire URL, including the protocol (for example, `http://support.example.com`). If you need to provide a Software Bill of Materials (SBOM), you can include it on your support site. This property is required and can be localized.
Marketing URL				The website where users get more information about the app. Specify the entire URL, including the protocol. This property can be localized.
Version Number				The version number that is provided for your app appears on the App Store.
Copyright				The name of the person or entity that owns the exclusive rights to the app, preceded by the year the rights were obtained (for example, 2014 Example, Inc.). The copyright symbol is added automatically. This property is required.
Routing App Coverage File				A routing app’s geographic coverage file (a file with a `.geojson` file extension) that specify the geographic regions supported by your app. The file can have only one MultiPolygon element. MultiPolygon elements consist of at least one Polygon. Polygons contain at least four coordinate points. The start and end coordinate points for a polygon must be the same. For file specifications, read “Specifying the Geographic Coverage File Contents” in Location and Maps Programming Guide.
Version Release Settings				Determines how the app version will be released. The following settings are allowed: Manual. When the app status changes to Pending Developer Release after approval and you must manually release the version. Automatic. The app goes live automatically after it is approved by App Review. Automatic, no earlier than. If the date has not passed when the app is approved, the app status changes to Pending Developer Release, but is automatically released at the date specified.
What’s New in this Version				A description of the changes in this version of the app such as new features, UI improvements, or bug fixes. Limited to 4000 characters. This property is not available for the first version of the app but required for all subsequent versions. This property can be localized.
Phased Release for Automatic Updates				When you release a version update of your app, you can choose to release your iOS app in stages. If you choose this option, your version update will be released over a 7-day period to a percentage of your users on iOS with automatic updates turned on. For details, visit Release a version update in phases.
Reset Summary Rating				You can reset your app’s summary rating when you release a new version. For details, visit Reset summary rating.

App privacy

Property				Description
Privacy Policy URL				A URL that links to your company’s privacy policy. This is required for all apps.
User Privacy Choices URL				A publicly accessible URL where users can learn more about their privacy choices for your app and how to manage them. For example, a webpage where users can access their data, request deletion, or make changes. This is optional.
Data Types				The types of data that you and/or your third-party partners collect from your app. For more information, see App privacy details on the App Store.

Age ratings

The age rating is a required app information property used by the parental controls on the App Store. Learn how to set an app age rating.

Possible values for the rating property are:

Rating				Definition
4+				Apps with this rating contain no objectionable material.
9+				Apps with this rating may contain instances of the following content that may not be suitable for children under the age of 9: Infrequent or mild cartoon or fantasy violence Infrequent or mild profanity or crude humor Infrequent or mild mature, suggestive, or horror or fear themed
12+				Apps with this rating may contain instances of the following content that may not be suitable for children under the age of 12: Infrequent or mild medical or treatment-focused content Infrequent or mild references to alcohol, tobacco, or drug use Infrequent or mild sexual content or nudity Frequent or intense contests Frequent or intense profanity or crude humor Frequent or intense horror or fear themed content Frequent or intense cartoon or fantasy violence Infrequent or mild occurrences of realistic violence Infrequent or mild simulated gambling
17+				Apps with this rating may contain instances of the following content that may not be suitable for children under the age of 17: Unrestricted web access, such as with an embedded browser Gambling Frequent or intense simulated gambling Frequent or intense mature or suggestive content Frequent or intense medical or treatment-focused content Frequent or intense references to alcohol, tobacco, or drug use Frequent or intense sexual content or nudity Frequent or intense realistic violence

The equivalent Entertainment Software Rating Board (ESRB) and Pan European Game Information (PEGI) ratings are:

Apple rating	ESRB	PEGI
4+	EC	3+
Not applicable	E	7+
9+	E10+	None
12+	T	12+
17+	Mature	16+
No Rating This content can’t be sold on the App Store.	Adults Only	18+

Brazil Age Pictograms (Brazil storefront only)

Requirements for the use of age pictograms for apps are published by the Brazilian Ministry of Justice (MOJ). The App Store displays a different set of pictographs for self-ratings than for ratings issued by the MOJ.

Official Brazil age pictograms apply to apps that were issued a rating by the MOJ. If a rating has been issued to your app by the MOJ, your membership Account Holder can contact us to provide it and the relevant pictogram will display on the App Store in iOS 16.2, iPadOS 16.2, macOS 13.1, and tvOS 16.2.

Self-rated Brazil age pictograms are automatically generated based on your app’s age rating that you set in App Store Connect and will display if you haven’t provided a rating issued by the MOJ.

Possible values for official Brazil age pictograms are:

Possible values for self-rated Brazil age pictograms are:

Required, localizable, and editable properties

The table below shows which app and version properties that are required for App Store submission, can be localized for a given language or territory, and can be edited at any time without requiring a version update of your app.

App information

Property	Localized	Editable
Name
Subtitle
Rating
Bundle ID
SKU
Content Rights
License Agreement	¹
Primary Language
Primary Category
Secondary Category
Availability in the Republic of Korea²
Availability in China mainland³		⁴
URL for App Store Server Notifications⁵

¹ Localized text may be included in the Custom License Agreement text box.

² Required for developers who enroll as a company and distribute their app for download in South Korea.

³ Required for apps that meet certain criteria to be available on the App Store in China mainland. See app information.

⁴ Can be entered at any time, but will go for review with the next version submission.

⁵ This property is only visible for apps that offer in-app purchases.

Platform version information

Property	Required	Editable
Screenshots
App Preview
Promotional Text
Description
Keywords
Support URL
Marketing URL
Version Number
Copyright
Routing App Coverage File
App Review Information
Version Release Settings
What’s New in this Version	¹
Phased Release for Automatic Updates	¹	²
Reset summary rating	¹

¹ Required for version updates only.

² Version release can be paused at any time within the seven day window, but once a version has been released to all users it cannot be changed.

Default App Clip properties

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Header Image
Subtitle
Action

Advanced App Clip properties

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Header Image
Default Display Title
Default Subtitle
Action

App pricing and availability information

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Availability
Price
Pricing Start Date
Pricing End Date
Make available for pre-order
Pre-Order Release Date
Distribution for Business and Education
Last-Compatible Version Setting
Tax Category

App privacy

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Privacy Policy URL
Privacy Choices URL
Data Types
Advertising Identifier

In-app purchase information

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Reference Name
Product ID
Availability
Price
Pricing Start Date
Pricing End Date
Content Hosing (non-consumables only)
Display Name
Description
App Store Promotional Image
App Review Screenshot
Review Notes

Auto-renewable subscription group information

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Subscription Levels
Subscription Group Reference Name
Subscription Group Display Name
App Name Display Options

Auto-renewable subscription information

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Reference Name
Product ID
Availability
Subscription Duration
Subscription Price
Subscription Price Start Date
Subscription Price End Date
Introductory Price
Introductory Price Start Date						¹
Introductory Price End Date						¹
Type of Introductory Price						¹
Introductory Price Duration						¹
Subscription Display Name
Description
App Store Promotional Image
App Review Screenshot
Review Notes

¹ Required if the subscription offers introductory pricing

Game Center leaderboard properties

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Leaderboard Reference Name
Leaderboard ID
Score Format Type
Score Submission Type
Sort Order
Score Range
Start Date and Time¹
Duration¹
Resets Every¹

¹ This property is only available for recurring leaderboards.

Game Center leaderboard language properties

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Language
Name
Score Format
Score Format Suffix (Singular)
Score Format Suffix (Plural)
Image

Game Center achievement properties

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Achievement Reference Name
Achievement ID
Point Value
Hidden
Achievable More Than Once

Game Center achievement language properties

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Language
Title
Pre-earned Description
Earned Description
Image

In-App Event properties

Property						Required		Localized		Editable
Event Name
Short Description
Long Description
Event Card Media
Event Details Page Media
Badge
Priority
Start Date and Time										*
End Date and Time
Publish Start Date and Time										*

* Start Date and Time and Publish Start Date and Time are only editable for dates in the future, per storefront.

App bundle information

App bundle information refers to the set of properties required to create an app bundle. Some information is specific to the app bundle, some is derived from the first app you add to the app bundle (called the primary app), and other information is derived from all of the apps in the bundle.

Bundle specific information

This information is required for the primary language of the app bundle. Additional localizations are optional.

Property				Description
App bundle name				The name of the app bundle as it appears on the App Store.
App bundle description				The descriptions of the app bundle as it appears on the App Store.
Marketing URL				(Optional). This can be the same URL as you use for the individual apps or a different one.
Price				The level that determines both the customer price and your proceeds. The price tiers are broken down to Compatible Price Tiers and Incompatible Price Tiers. Compatible Price Tiers represent the price tiers that have met the minimum and maximum bundle pricing rules listed in App Bundle Availability and Price. Selecting one of these tiers can ensure that your app bundle can be made available on the App Store as long as all other requirements have been met. Note that future price changes and intervals that have been set for your app could affect the list of compatible price tiers.
SKU				A unique ID for your bundle. The bundle SKU must be different from that of the SKU of the individual apps. You can use letters, numbers, hyphens, periods, and underscore. The SKU cannot start with a hyphen, period, or underscore.
Cleared for Sale				Check Cleared for Sale to make your app bundle available on the App Store. There are no bundle-specific territory settings. An app bundle will be live on the App Store only where all the member apps are available. For example, if some of the apps in the bundle are cleared for sale worldwide but some are live only in specific territories, the bundle will be available only in those territories. You will not be able to select the Cleared for Sale check box if you already have ten app bundles cleared for sale. If you wish to clear a new app bundle for sale, you must first remove the Cleared for Sale check box from a different live bundle.

Primary App Information

This information is derived from the first app you add to a bundle. You don’t need to provide this information separately for the app bundle.

Property				Description
Category				The app bundle category will be derived from the primary app’s category.
Primary language				The primary localization is the primary language of the first app in the bundle. Upon the initial creation of your app bundle, the bundle’s primary language will default to that of the primary app in the bundle. If another app is rearranged into the first position in the list of apps, it will become the primary app, but the primary language won’t change.
Privacy policy				The privacy policy of your primary app will be used for the app bundle’s privacy policy.
License Agreement				If your primary app has a custom license agreement, it will be used for the app bundle’s privacy policy.
Copyright				The app bundle copyright information will be derived from the primary app’s category.
Trade Representative Contact Information				If your primary app has a trade representative contact information, it will be used for the app bundle’s privacy policy.

Bundle Set Information

This information is derived from the set of apps in the bundle. You don’t need to provide this information separately for the app bundle.

Property				Description
Icon				The bundle icon is generated from the icons for the first four apps in the bundle. You can create a custom icon for your bundle in place of the icon generated automatically. A transparent overlay will be added in the bottom-right corner of your icon to let users know that the icon represents a bundle.
Screenshots				App bundles can display a maximum of ten screenshots, with an equal number of screenshots represented for each app. For example, if your app bundle contains five apps and each app has five screenshots, only two screenshots from each app will be displayed for your app bundle. The order of the screenshots is based on the order of the apps in the bundle. The screenshots can be rearranged only as the apps in the bundle are rearranged.
App previews				Apps that have an app preview will always display it in place of the first screenshot.
Ratings				The rating is determined by the highest rating among the apps in the bundle. For example: if the bundle consists of apps with 12+ rating and 9+ rating, the app bundle will have a rating of 12+.
Available localizations				Localizations will be derived from the common localizations across all of the apps.
Keywords				The app bundle gets every keyword from every app in the bundle. This is not displayed on the bundle page in App Store Connect.
Made for Kids				All the apps in the bundle have to be Made for Kids and have all the same age-band for the app bundle to be listed in the age-band categories on the App Store.

Pricing and availability

Pricing and availability properties determine where and when an app is available and at what price. You can set these properties when you add an app to your account, or you can edit the app information later.

Property				Description
Price				Determines both the customer price and your proceeds. Your proceeds are the price minus Apple’s commission and applicable taxes. If you choose a price other than free, you must have a Paid Applications Agreement in place before you can sell the app. You can set a price for your app or schedule price changes.
Start Date				The date when a new price will take effect on the App Store.
End Date				The date that a price will no longer be in effect and will return to the previously set price.
Make available for pre-order				Select this option to publish your app as a pre-order. The Pre-Orders section is only visible if your app has never been published on the App Store.
Release Date				If you publish your app as a pre-order, this is the date when your app will end as a pre-order and become available for download on the App Store. This property is visible only when you select Make available for pre-order.
Distribution for Education and Business				You may choose to distribute your app outside of the App Store to specific users as a custom app, or to business or educational institutions through Apple Business Manager or Apple School Manager, where your app can be offered at a discount.
Available at a reduced price for educational institutions				You can enable a 50% discount for educational institutions that purchase 20 or more copies of your iOS app or Mac app. For more information, see Building Apps for Education.
Available for education and business without a reduced price				Your app will be available for Apple Business Manager and Apple School Manager without a reduced price. For more information, see Distributing Custom Apps for Business or Building Apps for Education.
Available privately as a custom app (iOS only)				Select this option if you would like to distribute your app as a custom app. This option is only available if your app hasn’t been approved yet.
Availability				The storefronts where the app is available to purchase or download.
Tax category				The category of the app for tax purposes. If you choose not to make any changes, your app and in-app purchases will be assigned the App Store software category.
Last Compatible Version Settings				The versions of an app that are available for existing customers to download from iCloud. You need to exclude app versions from iCloud if the version includes legal or usability issues.

App and submission statuses

The app status indicates where an app is in the review and release process.

A red status indicator () means that you need to perform an action before the app can be published on the App Store.
A yellow status indicator () means that a process, controlled either by you or Apple, is still happening.
A green status indicator () means that the app is Ready for Sale.

If an app status is indicated as editable below, you can edit app metadata when the app has this status.

Status			Description						Editable
Prepare for Submission			You’ve created an app record in App Store Connect but are still preparing information for it.
Ready for Review			You’ve entered all of the required metadata for your app and indicated that you intend to submit it for review, but haven’t submitted it yet. You can submit the app by itself or include other items, such as in-app events or custom product pages. You can only send one submission at a time per platform.
Invalid Binary			You’ve submitted your app to App Review, but the build does not meet the current binary requirements. You must upload a new build, or select one that meets all the current build requirements.
Waiting for Review			You’ve submitted a new app or updated version. Apple received your submission, but hasn’t started review. While you are waiting for review, you can: Edit certain app information Delete app previews Remove the build from review However, you cannot upload or edit screenshots or app previews.
In Review			App Review is reviewing your app. You can remove the build from review.
Accepted			App Review accepted your app version, but one or more items in your submission were rejected. The app can only be published when all items in the submission are accepted. You can edit the rejected items and resubmit, or remove them from the submission to move forward with the currently accepted items.
Pending Agreement			Your app is ready for sale, but your agreements aren’t in effect yet. The Account Holder can accept the latest agreements in the Agreements, Tax, and Banking section.
Waiting for Export Compliance			Your CCATS file is in Apple’s export compliance review process.
Pending Developer Release			Your app was approved, but you still need to release it for sale.
Processing for App Store			Your app is being processed and will be ready for sale within 24 hours.
Pending Apple Release			Apple is holding your app version until the corresponding Apple operating system version is released to the public. If you think an app should be released on the existing operating system versions, review the deployment target set in your app build. If you rebuild your app with a different deployment target, reject the build for this version and submit the new version.
Pending App Transfer			An app transfer has been initiated, but not yet accepted by the recipient. The transferor and the recipient can each cancel the transfer. No changes can be made to the app except changes to pricing.
Processing App Transfer			The recipient has accepted the app transfer. The transfer cannot be canceled and no changes can be made to the app until the transfer is complete.
Ready for Sale			Your app is available on the App Store. When the app is in this state you can: Create a new version of an app Remove the app from the App Store
Pre-Order Ready for Sale			Your app is available for pre-order on the App Store. When the app is in this state you can: Edit your release date during the pre-order period Immediately release your app to customers Create a new version of an app Remove the app from the App Store
Rejected			App Review didn’t accept your app. App Store Connect users with the Admin, App Manager, or Developer role are notified about the issues. To learn more, visit Reply to App Review messages.
Metadata Rejected			App Review didn’t accept your metadata. Read the message from App Review, edit the metadata to resolve the issue, and reply to the message from App Review.
Removed from Sale			Your app was removed from the App Store. If you have questions, contact App Review.
Developer Rejected			You removed your app from review. When you’re ready, resubmit your build or submit a new build.
Developer Removed from Sale			You removed the app from the App Store. When you’re ready, you can restore the app to the App Store.

Submission statuses

These statuses are shown for submissions that use the updated submission experience. Once all items within the submission are accepted, the submission is moved from the In Progress section to the Completed section on the App Review page.

Status				Description
Waiting for Review				Apple received your submission, but hasn’t started review. While waiting for review, you can: Edit certain information Delete app previews Remove items from review However, you cannot: Upload or edit screenshots or app previews Edit in-app event metadata
In Review				App Review is reviewing your submission. You can cancel the submission to remove it from review.
Processing				You removed your submission from review and your action is being processed. When it is done processing the submission will be moved to Completed in the App Review section.
Unresolved Issues				App Review rejected one or more items in the submission. To learn more, visit Manage a submission with unresolved issues.
Rejected				App Review rejected your TestFlight submission. You must submit a new build for review before you can invite external testers.

Item Statuses

These statuses are shown for items within a submission that uses the updated submission experience. You can see the status of each item on the item’s page (for example, the app record or in-app event’s page), or when you click View or Resolve next to the submission. Once all items within the submission are accepted, the submission is moved from the In Progress section to the Completed section on the App Review page.

Status				Description
Ready for Review				The item has been added to the submission, but it hasn’t been submitted to App Review yet.
Waiting for Review				Apple received your submission, but hasn’t started review. While waiting for review, you can: Edit certain information Delete app previews Remove items from review However, you cannot: Upload or edit screenshots or app previews Edit in-app event metadata
In Review				App Review is reviewing your submission. You can cancel the submission to remove it from review.
Accepted				This status only appears in the updated submission experience. App Review accepted the item, but there are one or more rejected items in the submission. All items in the submission must be accepted before any can be published. You can edit the rejected items and resubmit, or you can remove them from the submission. To learn more, visit Reply to App Review messages.
Rejected				App Review didn’t accept your item. You can edit the item and resubmit, or you can remove the item from the submission. To learn more, visit Manage a submission with unresolved issues.

App build statuses

The build status tells you immediately whether your build needs attention. The status applies to the build only, not the entire app.

A red status indicator () means that you need to perform some action.
A yellow status indicator () means that some process is ongoing, controlled either by you or by Apple.
A green status indicator () means the build is being tested in TestFlight, or can be submitted for review..

You can view the builds you upload and their file sizes in the Activity area of your app. You can also view beta build status and metrics in the TestFlight area of your app.

Status	Description	Internal testing	External testing
Processing	Your build is still being processed. You will receive an email notification when your build is ready. If you upload a build and it remains in the Processing state for more than 24 hours, there may be an issue. To resolve the issue, Contact Us.
Invalid Binary	Apple received your build, but it didn’t meet all the upload requirements. Resolve any issues in the build, and redeliver. See Uploading builds overview.	Not visible in TestFlight	Not visible in TestFlight
Missing Compliance	Your build is missing export compliance documentation. Action is needed. See Provide export compliance for beta builds.
Waiting for Export Compliance Review	Documentation for export compliance has been submitted and is in review. No action is needed on your end.
In Compliance Review	Documentation for export compliance is in review. No action is needed on your end.
Ready to Submit	Your build can be distributed to internal testers, or can be submitted to TestFlight App Review for external testing or to App Review for release on the App Store.
Waiting for Review	Your build has been submitted to TestFlight App Review. It will need to be approved before you can begin external testing.
In Beta Review	Your build is currently being reviewed by TestFlight App Review. It will need to be approved before you can begin external testing.
Rejected	Your build was rejected by TestFlight App Review and can no longer be used in TestFlight. To begin testing, upload a new build.	Not visible in TestFlight	Not visible in TestFlight
Ready to Test	Your build can be tested by external and internal testers, but you haven’t added any testers yet. You may have opted to manually notify testers after your build is approved. You can also submit your app to App Review for release on the App Store.
Testing	Your build is being tested by at least one group or tester. Click on the build to see more details about who is testing your build. You can continue testing or submit your app to App Review for release on the App Store. Testers that have received an invite to test will still be able to test your build even after it goes live on the App Store.

See alsoApp and submission statuses

App Stores and localizations

Your app’s metadata appears on the App Store and can be localized in the following languages and locales:

Arabic, Catalan, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (Australia), English (Canada), English (U.K.), English (U.S.), Finnish, French, French (Canada), German, Greek, Hebrew, Hindi, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Malay, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Spanish (Mexico), Spanish (Spain), Swedish, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese.

If you add more than one language or locale for your app’s metadata in App Store Connect, keep in mind that the language in which the metadata is shown to each customer could be impacted by certain factors, such as the language of the App Store for their location, the language settings on their device, the languages you’ve added, and your primary language selection in App Store Connect.

ISO code	Country or region	Default language	Additional supported language(s)
AFG	Afghanistan	English (U.K.)
AE	United Arab Emirates	English (U.K.)	Arabic
AG	Antigua and Barbuda	English (U.K.)
AI	Anguilla	English (U.K.)
AL	Albania	English (U.K.)
AM	Armenia	English (U.K.)
AO	Angola	English (U.K.)
AR	Argentina	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
AT	Austria	German	English (U.K.)
AU	Australia	English (Australia)
AZ	Azerbaijan	English (U.K.)
BB	Barbados	English (U.K.)
BE	Belgium	English (U.K.)	Dutch, French
BIH	Bosnia and Herzegovina	English (U.K.)	Croatian
BF	Burkina Faso	English (U.K.)	French
BG	Bulgaria	English (U.K.)
BH	Bahrain	English (U.K.)
BJ	Benin	English (U.K.)	French
BM	Bermuda	English (U.K.)
BN	Brunei	English (U.K.)
BO	Bolivia	Spanish (Spain)	English (U.K.)
BR	Brazil	Portuguese (Brazil)	English (U.K.)
BS	Bahamas	English (U.K.)
BT	Bhutan	English (U.K.)
BW	Botswana	English (U.K.)
BY	Belarus	English (U.K.)
BZ	Belize	English (U.K.)	Spanish (Spain)
CMR	Cameroon	French	English (U.K.)
CA	Canada	English (Canada)	French (Canada)
CG	Congo, Republic of the	English (U.K.)	French
CH	Switzerland	German	English (U.K.), French, Italian
CIV	Cote d’Ivoire	French	English (U.K.)
CL	Chile	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
CN	China mainland	Simplified Chinese	English (U.K.)
CO	Colombia	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
COD	Congo, Democratic Republic of the	English (U.K.)	French
CR	Costa Rica	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
CV	Cape Verde	English (U.K.)
CY	Cyprus	English (U.K.)	Turkish
CZ	Czech Republic	English (U.K.)	Czech
DE	Germany	German	English (U.K.)
DK	Denmark	English (U.K.)	Danish
DM	Dominica	English (U.K.)
DO	Dominican Republic	Spanish (Mexico)	French
DZ	Algeria	English (U.K.)	Arabic, French
EC	Ecuador	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
EE	Estonia	English (U.K.)
EG	Egypt	English (U.K.)	Arabic, French
ES	Spain	Spanish (Spain)	Catalan, English (U.K.)
FI	Finland	English (U.K.)	Finnish
FJ	Fiji	English (U.K.)
FM	Micronesia	English (U.K.)
FR	France	French	English (U.K.)
GAB	Gabon	French	English (U.K.)
GB	United Kingdom	English (U.K.)
GD	Grenada	English (U.K.)
GEO	Georgia	English (U.K.)
GH	Ghana	English (U.K.)
GM	Gambia	English (U.K.)
GR	Greece	Greek	English (U.K.)
GT	Guatemala	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
GW	Guinea-Bissau	English (U.K.)	French
GY	Guyana	English (U.K.)
HK	Hong Kong	Chinese (Traditional)	English (U.K.)
HN	Honduras	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
HR	Croatia	English (U.K.)	Croatian
HU	Hungary	English (U.K.)	Hungarian
ID	Indonesia	English (U.K.)	Indonesian
IE	Ireland	English (U.K.)
IL	Israel	English (U.K.)	Hebrew
IN	India	English (U.K.)	Hindi
IRQ	Iraq	English (U.K.)	Arabic
IS	Iceland	English (U.K.)
IT	Italy	Italian	English (U.K.)
JM	Jamaica	English (U.K.)
JO	Jordan	English (U.K.)	Arabic
JP	Japan	Japanese	English (U.K.)
KE	Kenya	English (U.K.)
KG	Kyrgyzstan	English (U.K.)
KH	Cambodia	English (U.K.)	French
KN	St. Kitts and Nevis	English (U.K.)
KR	Republic of Korea	Korean	English (U.K.)
KW	Kuwait	English (U.K.)	Arabic
KY	Cayman Islands	English (U.K.)
KZ	Kazakhstan	English (U.K.)
LA	Laos	English (U.K.)	French
LB	Lebanon	English (U.K.)	Arabic, French
LBY	Libya	English (U.K.)	Arabic
LC	St. Lucia	English (U.K.)
LK	Sri Lanka	English (U.K.)
LR	Liberia	English (U.K.)
LT	Lithuania	English (U.K.)
LU	Luxembourg	English (U.K.)	French, German
LV	Latvia	English (U.K.)
MAR	Morocco	English (U.K.)	Arabic, French
MD	Moldova	English (U.K.)
MDV	Maldives	English (U.K.)
MG	Madagascar	English (U.K.)	French
MK	North Macedonia	English (U.K.)
ML	Mali	English (U.K.)	French
MMR	Myanmar	English (U.K.)
MN	Mongolia	English (U.K.)
MNE	Montenegro	English (U.K.)	Croatian
MO	Macau	Chinese (Traditional)	English (U.K.)
MR	Mauritania	English (U.K.)	Arabic, French
MS	Montserrat	English (U.K.)
MT	Malta	English (U.K.)
MU	Mauritius	English (U.K.)	French
MW	Malawi	English (U.K.)
MX	Mexico	Spanish (Mexico)
MY	Malaysia	English (U.K.)
MZ	Mozambique	English (U.K.)
NA	Namibia	English (U.K.)
NE	Niger	English (U.K.)
NG	Nigeria	English (U.K.)
NI	Nicaragua	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
NL	Netherlands	Dutch	English (U.K.)
NO	Norway	English (U.K.)	Norwegian
NP	Nepal	English (U.K.)
NRU	Nauru	English (U.K.)
NZ	New Zealand	English (U.K.)
OM	Oman	English (U.K.)	Arabic
PA	Panama	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
PE	Peru	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
PG	Papua New Guinea	English (U.K.)
PH	Philippines	English (U.K.)
PK	Pakistan	English (U.K.)
PL	Poland	English (U.K.)	Polish
PT	Portugal	Portuguese (Portugal)	English (U.K.)
PW	Palau	English (U.K.)
PY	Paraguay	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
QA	Qatar	English (U.K.)	Arabic
RO	Romania	English (U.K.)	Romanian
RU	Russia	Russian	English (U.K.), Ukrainian
RWA	Rwanda	English (U.K.)	French
SA	Saudi Arabia	English (U.K.)	Arabic
SB	Solomon Islands	English (U.K.)
SC	Seychelles	English (U.K.)	French
SE	Sweden	Swedish	English (U.K.)
SG	Singapore	English (U.K.)	Chinese (Simplified)
SI	Slovenia	English (U.K.)
SK	Slovakia	English (U.K.)	Slovak
SL	Sierra Leone	English (U.K.)
SN	Senegal	English (U.K.)	French
SR	Suriname	English (U.K.)	Dutch
SRB	Serbia	English (U.K.)	Croatian
ST	Sao Tome and Principe	English (U.K.)
SV	El Salvador	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
SZ	Eswatini	English (U.K.)
TC	Turks and Caicos Islands	English (U.K.)
TD	Chad	English (U.K.)	French
TH	Thailand	English (U.K.)	Thai
TJ	Tajikistan	English (U.K.)
TM	Turkmenistan	English (U.K.)
TN	Tunisia	English (U.K.)	Arabic, French
TON	Tonga	English (U.K.)
TR	Turkey	English (U.K.)	Turkish
TT	Trinidad and Tobago	English (U.K.)	French
TW	Taiwan	Chinese (Traditional)	English (U.K.)
TZ	Tanzania	English (U.K.)
UA	Ukraine	English (U.K.)	Russian, Ukrainian
UG	Uganda	English (U.K.)
US	United States	English (U.S.)	Arabic, Chinese (Simplified), Chinese (Traditional), French, Korean, Portuguese (Brazil), Russian, Spanish (Mexico), Vietnamese
UY	Uruguay	English (U.K.)	Spanish (Mexico)
UZ	Uzbekistan	English (U.K.)
VC	St. Vincent and the Grenadines	English (U.K.)
VE	Venezuela	Spanish (Mexico)	English (U.K.)
VG	British Virgin Islands	English (U.K.)
VN	Vietnam	English (U.K.)	Vietnamese
VUT	Vanuatu	English (U.K.)	French
XKS	Kosovo	English (U.K.)
YE	Yemen	English (U.K.)	Arabic
ZA	South Africa	English (U.K.)
ZMB	Zambia	English (U.K.)
ZW	Zimbabwe	English (U.K.)

App Store pricing & availability start times by region

When you set the availability of apps and in-app purchases, schedule introductory and promotional offers, or schedule price changes, the dates and times when the change is reflected on the App Store varies by region.

Times marked with an asterisk reflect the time in UTC minus 1 day from the scheduled date in App Store Connect. For example: A price change is scheduled in App Store Connect for January 1. In Afghanistan, the price change goes into effect December 31 at either 6:00 p.m. or 7:00 p.m., depending on whether the U.S. is observing daylight saving time.
If you schedule a price change in App Store Connect for a date and time in UTC that has already passed in some territories, your changes go into effect immediately.
The times in the table below represent the UTC time when the U.S. is not observing daylight saving time. Daylight savings time in the U.S. generally starts on the second Sunday of March and ends on the first Sunday of November. During U.S. daylight savings time, the UTC time is one hour earlier.

ISO code	Country or region	UTC time when changes go into effect
AFG	Afghanistan	7:00 pm*
AE	United Arab Emirates	7:00 pm*
AG	Antigua and Barbuda	4:00 am
AI	Anguilla	4:00 am
AL	Albania	12:00 am
AM	Armenia	7:00 pm*
AO	Angola	12:00 am
AR	Argentina	12:00 am
AT	Austria	12:00 am
AU	Australia	6:00 pm*
AZ	Azerbaijan	7:00 pm*
BB	Barbados	4:00 am
BE	Belgium	12:00 am
BIH	Bosnia and Herzegovina	12:00 am
BF	Burkina Faso	12:00 am
BG	Bulgaria	12:00 am
BH	Bahrain	7:00 pm*
BJ	Benin	12:00 am
BM	Bermuda	4:00 am
BN	Brunei	3:00 pm*
BO	Bolivia	12:00 am
BR	Brazil	12:00 am
BS	Bahamas	4:00 am
BT	Bhutan	7:00 pm*
BW	Botswana	12:00 am
BY	Belarus	7:00 pm*
BZ	Belize	4:00 am
CMR	Cameroon	12:00 am
CA	Canada	4:00 am
CG	Congo, Republic of the	12:00 am
CH	Switzerland	12:00 am
CIV	Cote d’Ivoire	12:00 am
CL	Chile	12:00 am
CN	China mainland	3:00 pm*
CO	Colombia	12:00 am
COD	Congo, Democratic Republic of the	12:00 am
CR	Costa Rica	12:00 am
CV	Cape Verde	12:00 am
CY	Cyprus	12:00 am
CZ	Czechia	12:00 am
DE	Germany	12:00 am
DK	Denmark	12:00 am
DM	Dominica	4:00 am
DO	Dominican Republic	12:00 am
DZ	Algeria	12:00 am
EC	Ecuador	12:00 am
EE	Estonia	12:00 am
EG	Egypt	7:00 pm*
ES	Spain	12:00 am
FI	Finland	12:00 am
FJ	Fiji	3:00 pm*
FM	Micronesia	3:00 pm*
FR	France	12:00 am
GAB	Gabon	12:00 am
GB	United Kingdom	12:00 am
GD	Grenada	4:00 am
GEO	Georgia	7:00 pm*
GH	Ghana	12:00 am
GM	Gambia	12:00 am
GR	Greece	12:00 am
GT	Guatemala	12:00 am
GW	Guinea-Bissau	12:00 am
GY	Guyana	12:00 am
HK	Hong Kong	3:00 pm*
HN	Honduras	12:00 am
HR	Croatia	12:00 am
HU	Hungary	12:00 am
ID	Indonesia	3:00 pm*
IE	Ireland	12:00 am
IL	Israel	12:00 am
IN	India	7:00 pm*
IRQ	Iraq	12:00 am
IS	Iceland	12:00 am
IT	Italy	12:00 am
JM	Jamaica	4:00 am
JO	Jordan	7:00 pm*
JP	Japan	3:00 pm*
KE	Kenya	7:00 pm*
KG	Kyrgyzstan	7:00 pm*
KH	Cambodia	3:00 pm*
KN	St. Kitts and Nevis	4:00 am
KR	Republic of Korea	3:00 pm*
KW	Kuwait	7:00 pm*
KY	Cayman Islands	4:00 am
KZ	Kazakhstan	7:00 pm*
LA	Laos	3:00 pm*
LB	Lebanon	7:00 pm*
LBY	Libya	12:00 am
LC	St. Lucia	4:00 am
LK	Sri Lanka	3:00 pm*
LR	Liberia	12:00 am
LT	Lithuania	12:00 am
LU	Luxembourg	12:00 am
LV	Latvia	12:00 am
MAR	Morocco	12:00 am
MD	Moldova	12:00 am
MDV	Maldives	7:00 pm*
MG	Madagascar	12:00 am
MK	North Macedonia	12:00 am
ML	Mali	12:00 am
MMR	Myanmar	7:00 pm*
MN	Mongolia	3:00 pm*
MNE	Montenegro	12:00 am
MO	Macau	3:00 pm*
MR	Mauritania	12:00 am
MS	Montserrat	4:00 am
MT	Malta	12:00 am
MU	Mauritius	7:00 pm*
MW	Malawi	12:00 am
MX	Mexico	4:00 am
MY	Malaysia	3:00 pm*
MZ	Mozambique	12:00 am
NA	Namibia	12:00 am
NE	Niger	12:00 am
NG	Nigeria	12:00 am
NI	Nicaragua	12:00 am
NL	Netherlands	12:00 am
NO	Norway	12:00 am
NP	Nepal	7:00 pm*
NRU	Nauru	3:00 pm*
NZ	New Zealand	3:00 pm*
OM	Oman	7:00 pm*
PA	Panama	12:00 am
PE	Peru	12:00 am
PG	Papua New Guinea	3:00 pm*
PH	Philippines	3:00 pm*
PK	Pakistan	7:00 pm*
PL	Poland	12:00 am
PT	Portugal	12:00 am
PW	Palau	3:00 pm*
PY	Paraguay	12:00 am
QA	Qatar	7:00 pm*
RO	Romania	12:00 am
RU	Russia	7:00 pm*
RWA	Rwanda	12:00 am
SA	Saudi Arabia	7:00 pm*
SB	Solomon Islands	3:00 pm*
SC	Seychelles	7:00 pm*
SE	Sweden	12:00 am
SG	Singapore	3:00 pm*
SI	Slovenia	12:00 am
SK	Slovakia	12:00 am
SL	Sierra Leone	12:00 am
SN	Senegal	12:00 am
SR	Suriname	12:00 am
SRB	Serbia	12:00 am
ST	Sao Tome and Principe	12:00 am
SV	El Salvador	12:00 am
SZ	Eswatini	12:00 am
TC	Turks and Caicos Islands	4:00 am
TD	Chad	12:00 am
TH	Thailand	3:00 pm*
TJ	Tajikistan	7:00 pm
TM	Turkmenistan	7:00 pm*
TN	Tunisia	12:00 am
TON	Tonga	3:00 pm*
TR	Turkey	12:00 am
TT	Trinidad and Tobago	4:00 am
TW	Taiwan	3:00 pm*
TZ	Tanzania	12:00 am
UA	Ukraine	12:00 am
UG	Uganda	7:00 pm*
US	United States	4:00 am
UY	Uruguay	12:00 am
UZ	Uzbekistan	7:00 pm*
VC	St. Vincent and the Grenadines	4:00 am
VE	Venezuela	12:00 am
VG	British Virgin Islands	4:00 am
VN	Vietnam	3:00 pm*
VUT	Vanuatu	3:00 pm*
XKS	Kosovo	12:00 am
YE	Yemen	7:00 pm*
ZA	South Africa	12:00 am
ZMB	Zambia	12:00 am
ZW	Zimbabwe	12:00 am

App sandbox information (macOS)

If you use App Sandbox entitlements, Apple needs information on each temporary exception entitlement included in the app. You add a temporary exception entitlement by editing the .entitlements property list file in the Xcode project. For more information, see App Sandbox Design Guide.

Property

Description

Entitlement Key

The entitlement key that corresponds to a temporary exception entitlement implemented in the app.

Usage Information

Information describing how to assess the entitlement and a description of the values in an array value used by the entitlement. If the entitlement works around a missing App Sandbox feature, file a bug report describing the exception using Feedback Assistant and include the bug ID in the usage information.

The description should include:

How the entitlement can be assessed
Why the entitlement is needed by the app
What functionality this entitlement enables
If the entitlement uses an array value, provide information on each value in the array
If the entitlement works around a missing App Sandbox feature, the ID of the bug you filed describing the exception

See alsoApp Sandbox Design Guide

App Review information

You must provide the following information to App Review. It isn’t visible on the App Store.

Property

Description

Required

Contact:

Name, email, phone number

Information for the contact person in your organization if the App Review team needs additional information.

Notes

Additional information about your app that can help during the review process. Include information that may be needed to test your app, such as app-specific settings and test registration or account details. If your app delivers streaming video over the cellular network, enter a test stream URL. The Notes field can contain up to 4000 bytes. You can write notes in any language.

Sign-in required:

Username and password

Sign-in information for a demo account. If your app uses a single sign-on service, such as Facebook or Twitter, include the demo account login information for it. The demo account is used during the App Review process and must not expire. Details for additional accounts should be included in the Notes field.

If your app requires a login to use it.

Maximum build file sizes

For iOS and tvOS apps, verify that your app doesn’t exceed the maximum file sizes on the supported operating systems. Your app’s total uncompressed size must be less than 4GB. Apple Watch apps must be less than 75MB. In addition, each Mach-O executable file—for example, app_name.app/app_name—must not exceed these maximum file sizes.

For how to compute the memory usage, read “Viewing Virtual Memory Usage” in Memory Usage Performance Guidelines.

For OS version

Maximum executable file size

Notes

iOS 9.0 and later

tvOS 9.0 and later

500 MB

For the total of all __TEXT sections in the binary.

iOS 7.X through iOS 8.X

60 MB

For the __TEXT sections in each architecture slice.¹

Earlier than iOS 7.0

80 MB

For the total of all __TEXT sections in the binary.

¹ An architecture slice is a part of the fat binary layout that targets a specific architecture. For example, a fat binary might include slices for 32-bit and 64-bit architectures.

Export compliance documentation for encryption

Depending on the kind of encryption algorithm your app uses, you may need to provide documentation in App Store Connect.

Encryption algorithm in use

Required documentation

Your app uses encryption limited to that within the Apple operating system

No documentation required in App Store Connect.

Your app uses an industry standard algorithm, not provided within the Apple operating system

Upload your French encryption declaration in App Store Connect.¹

Your app uses proprietary encryption algorithms not accepted by international standard bodies (such as IEEE, IETF, or ITU)

Upload your:

U.S. Commodity Classification Automated Tracking System (CCATS)
French encryption declaration in App Store Connect¹

¹French encryption declaration form is only required if you’re distributing your app on the App Store in France.

See alsoExport compliance overview

Beta tester feedback

The table below shows all of the information that is available in the detailed tester feedback view. You can view this information by clicking into each feedback item. See View tester feedback.

Data				Description
Tester				The name of the tester, if available.
Email				The email address of the tester, if available.
Group				The name of the tester group, or groups, the tester is added to.
App Version				The version and build a tester has installed on their device.
App Uptime				The length of time the app was open and running at the time the tester feedback was sent.
Device				The model of the tester’s device.
iOS Version				The version of iOS the tester’s device is running.
Battery				The tester’s battery level at the time the feedback was sent.
Carrier				The tester’s wireless service provider.
Time Zone				The time zone the tester’s device is set to.
Architecture				The type of Central Processing Unit (CPU) for the tester’s device.
Connection Type				Whether the tester was connected to WiFi, cellular, or not connected at the time that the feedback was sent and the tester’s mobile network type.
Paired Apple Watch				If the tester is testing on an Apple Watch app, the Apple Watch model and watchOS version is shared with you.
Disk Free				The amount of disk space the tester has available at the time the feedback was sent.
Screen Resolution				The screen resolution of the tester’s device.

App previews and screenshots

App preview specifications

You can provide app previews in tH.264 and ProRes 422 (HQ only) formats, with the following specifications.

Video Specifications

	H.264 format	ProRes 422 (HQ only) format
Target bit rate	10-12 Mbps	VBR ~220 Mbps
Video characteristics	Progressive, up to High Profile Level 4.0	Progressive, no external references
Max frame rate	30 frames per second	30 frames per second
Audio	Stereo Codec: 256kbps AAC Sample Rate: 44.1kHz or 48kHz All tracks should be enabled Stereo configuration: 1 track with 2-channel stereo (1st channel L and 2nd channel R) 2 tracks with 1-channel stereo (1st track L and 2nd track R)	Stereo Codec: PCM or 256kbps AAC Bit Depth (for PCM): 16-, 24-, or 32-bit Sample Rate: 44.1 or 48kHz All tracks should be enabled Stereo configuration: 1 track with 2-channel stereo (1st channel L and 2nd channel R) 2 tracks with 1-channel stereo (1st track L and 2nd track R)
Supported extensions	.mov, .m4v, .mp4	.mov

App Preview Resolutions

You can deliver app previews with the following resolutions.

Device size or platform	Original resolutions	Accepted resolutions	App Preview source
6.5-inch (iPhone 14 Plus, iPhone 13 Pro Max, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone 11, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR)	2688 x 1242 pixels (19.5:9 aspect ratio)	886 x 1920 pixels (portrait) 1920 x 886 pixels (landscape)	Upload 6.5-inch previews
6.7-inch (iPhone 14 Pro Max)	2796 x 1290 pixels (19.5:9 aspect ratio)	886 x 1920 pixels (portrait) 1920 x 886 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 6.5-inch previews Alternative: upload 6.7-inch previews
6.1-inch (iPhone 14 Pro)	2556 x 1179 pixels (19.5:9 aspect ratio)	886 x 1920 pixels (portrait) 1920 x 886 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 6.5-inch previews Alternative: upload 6.1-inch previews
5.8-inch Super Retina Display (iPhone 14, iPhone 13 Pro, iPhone 13, iPhone 13 mini, iPhone 12 Pro, iPhone 12, iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone XS, iPhone X)	2436 x 1125 pixels (19.5:9 aspect ratio)	886 x 1920 pixels (portrait) 1920 x 886 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 6.5-inch previews Alternative: upload 5.8-inch previews
5.5-inch (iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 6s Plus)	2208 x 1242 pixels (Rendered Pixels) 1920 x 1080 pixels (Physical Pixels) (16:9 aspect ratio)	1080 x 1920 pixels (portrait) 1920 x 1080 pixels (landscape)	Upload 5.5-inch previews
4.7-inch (iPhone SE (3rd generation, 2nd generation), iPhone 8, iPhone 7, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6)	1334 x 750 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)	750 x 1334 pixels (portrait) 1334 x 750 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 5.5-inch previews Alternative: upload 4.7-inch previews
4-inch (iPhone SE (1st generation))	1136 x 640 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)	1080 x 1920 pixels (portrait) 1920 x 1080 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 5.5 or 4.7-inch previews Alternative: upload 4-inch previews
12.9-inch (iPad Pro (6th generation, 5th generation, 4th generation, 3rd generation))	2732 x 2048 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)	1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait) 1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape)	Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) previews
12.9-inch (iPad Pro (2nd generation))	2732 x 2048 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)	1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait) 1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape) 900 x 1200 pixels (portrait) 1200 x 900 pixels (landscape)	Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) previews
11-inch (iPad Pro(4th generation, 3rd generation), iPad (10th generation), iPad Air (5th generation, 4th generation), iPad mini (6th generation))	2388 x 1668 pixels (4.3:3 aspect ratio)	1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait) 1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) preview Alternative: upload 11-inch previews
10.5-inch (iPad (9th generation, 8th generation, 7th generation) iPad Pro, iPad Air)	2224 x 1668 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)	1200 x 1600 pixels (portrait) 1600 x 1200 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) previews Alternative: upload 10.5-inch previews
9.7-inch (iPad, iPad mini)	2048 x 1536 pixels (4:3 aspect ratio)	900 x 1200 pixels (portrait) 1200 x 900 pixels (landscape)	Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) or 10.5-inch previews Alternative: upload 9.7-inch previews
Apple TV	1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)	1920 x 1080 pixels	Upload Apple TV previews
Mac	1920 x 1080 pixels (16:9 aspect ratio)	1920 x 1080 pixels	Upload Mac previews

App Preview Requirements

The following are required to create your app preview and upload it to App Store Connect.

Context	Description
Maximum file size	500MB
Minimum length	15 Seconds
Maximum length	30 Seconds
Default poster frame setting	5 Seconds (See Set an app preview poster frame.)
Orientation	Portrait or Landscape (Note: macOS app previews accept landscape only.)
OS device capture and play	iOS 8 or later
Upload and playback on App Store Connect	Safari 8 and macOS 10.10 or later

Screenshot specifications

Device size or platform	Screenshot size	Requirement	Screenshot source
6.5-inch (iPhone 14 Plus, iPhone 13 Pro Max, iPhone 12 Pro Max, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone 11, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR)	1284 x 2778 pixels (portrait) 2778 x 1284 pixels (landscape) 1242 x 2688 pixels (portrait) 2688 x 1242 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPhone	Upload 6.5-inch screenshots
6.7-inch (iPhone 14 Pro Max)	1290 x 2796 pixels (portrait) 2796 x 1290 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPhone and 6.5-inch screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 6.5-inch screenshots Alternative: upload 6.7-inch screenshots
6.1-inch (iPhone 14 Pro)	1179 x 2556 pixels (portrait) 2556 x 1179 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPhone and 6.5-inch screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 6.5-inch screenshots Alternative: upload 6.1-inch screenshots
5.8-inch (iPhone 14, iPhone 13 Pro, iPhone 13, iPhone 13 mini, iPhone 12 Pro, iPhone 12, iPhone 12 mini, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone XS, iPhone X)	1170 x 2532 pixels (portrait) 2532 x 1170 pixels (landscape) 1125 x 2436 pixels (portrait) 2436 x 1125 pixels (landscape) 1080 x 2340 (portrait) 2340 x 1080 (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPhone and 6.5-inch screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 6.5-inch screenshots Alternative: upload 5.8-inch screenshots
5.5-inch (iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 6s Plus)	1242 x 2208 pixels (portrait) 2208 x 1242 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPhone	Upload 5.5-inch screenshots
4.7-inch (iPhone SE (3rd generation, 2nd generation), iPhone 8, iPhone 7, iPhone 6s, iPhone 6)	750 x 1334 pixels (portrait) 1334 x 750 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPhone and 5.5-inch screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 5.5-inch screenshots Alternative: upload 4.7-inch screenshots
4-inch (iPhone SE (1st generation))	640 x 1096 pixels (portrait without status bar) 640 x 1136 pixels (portrait with status bar) 1136 x 600 pixels (landscape without status bar) 1136 x 640 pixels (landscape with status bar)	Required if app runs on iPhone and 5.5 or 4.7-inch screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 5.5 or 4.7-inch screenshots Alternative: upload 4-inch screenshots
3.5-inch (iPhone 4s)	640 x 920 pixels (portrait without status bar) 640 x 960 pixels (portrait with status bar) 960 x 600 pixels (landscape (without status bar) 960 x 640 pixels (landscape with status bar)	Required if app runs on iPhone and 5.5-inch iPhone screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 5.5-, 4.7-, or 4-inch screenshots Alternative: upload 3.5-inch screenshots
12.9-inch (iPad Pro (6th generation, 5th generation, 4th generation, 3rd generation))	2048 x 2732 pixels (portrait) 2732 x 2048 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPad	Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) screenshots
12.9-inch (iPad Pro (2nd generation))	2048 x 2732 pixels (portrait) 2732 x 2048 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPad	Upload 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots
11-inch (iPad Pro (4th generation, 3rd generation), iPad (10th generation), iPad Air (5th generation, 4th generation), iPad mini (6th generation))	1488 x 2266 pixels (portrait) 2266 x 1488 pixels (landscape) 1668 x 2388 pixels (portrait) 2388 x 1668 pixels (landscape) 1640 x 2360 pixels (portrait) 2360 x 1640 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPad and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (3rd generation) screenshots Alternative: upload 11-inch screenshots
10.5-inch (iPad (9th generation, 8th generation, 7th generation), iPad Pro, iPad Air)	1668 x 2224 pixels (portrait) 2224 x 1668 pixels (landscape)	Required if app runs on iPad and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) screenshots Alternative: upload 10.5-inch screenshots
9.7-inch (iPad, iPad mini)	1536 x 2008 pixels (portrait (without status bar) 1536 x 2048 pixels (portrait with status bar) 2048 x 1496 pixels (landscape without status bar) 2048 x 1536 pixels (landscape with status bar) 768 x 1004 pixels (portrait without status bar) 768 x 1024 pixels (portrait with status bar) 1024 x 748 pixels (landscape (without status bar) 1024 x 768 pixels (landscape with status bar)	Required if app runs on iPad and 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) or 10.5-inch screenshots aren't provided	Default: scaled 12.9-inch iPad Pro (2nd generation) or 10.5-inch screenshots Alternative: upload 9.7-inch screenshots
Mac	One of the following, with a 16:10 aspect ratio. 1280 x 800 pixels 1440 x 900 pixels 2560 x 1600 pixels 2880 x 1800 pixels	Required for Mac apps	Upload Mac screenshots in one of the listed sizes
Apple TV	1920 x 1080 pixels 3840 x 2160 pixels	Required for Apple TV apps	Upload Apple TV screenshot in one of the listed sizes
Apple Watch (Ultra, Series 8, Series 7, Series 6, Series 5, Series 4, Series 3, SE)	One of the following: 410 x 502 Pixels (Ultra) 396 x 484 pixels (Series 7, Series 8) 368 x 448 pixels (Series 6, Series 5, Series 4, and SE) 312 x 390 pixels (Series 3)	Required for Apple Watch apps	Upload Apple Watch screenshot in one of the listed sizes You must use the same screenshot size for Apple Watch consistently across all localizations for the app

Users and Access

Role permissions

The tasks you are able to perform depends on your user role. The Account Holder can access all aspects of App Store Connect and the Apple Developer website, and is the only user that can sign legal agreements, renew membership, remove auto-renewable subscriptions from sale, submit Safari Extensions, or create developer ID certificates.

Members of an organization’s team in the Apple Developer Program also have access to membership resources on the Apple Developer website and other membership benefits. Users who have been given access to App Store Connect by an individual enrolled in the Apple Developer Program only have access to App Store Connect.

Role	Description
Account Holder	The person who completes program enrollment is assigned the Account Holder role. This user is responsible for entering into legal agreements with Apple.
Admin	Serves as a secondary contact for teams and has many of the same responsibilities as the Account Holder. Admins have access to all apps. If the Admin is part of an organization team, they have Certificates, Identifiers & Profiles by default.
Finance	Manages financial information, including downloading reports and uploading tax forms. They can view all apps in Payments and Financial Reports, Sales and Trends, and App Analytics.
App Manager	Manages all aspects of an app, such as pricing, App Store information, and app development and delivery.
Developer	Manages development and delivery of an app.
Marketing	Manages marketing materials and promotional artwork. They’ll be contacted by Apple if your app is considered for featuring on the App Store.
Sales	Analyzes sales, downloads, and other analytics for an app.
Customer Support	Analyzes and responds to customer reviews on the App Store. If a user has the Customer Support role only, when they click on an app in My Apps, they’ll go straight to the Ratings and Reviews section.

To see which roles have access to specific functionality within App Store Connect, see Program Roles.

User notifications

Users may receive a user notification for events that happen in their App Store Connect account such as an app being approved for sale or an agreement expiring. The types of user notifications are:

Type	Description	Applicable user roles
App Status Reports	Provides email alerts when an app changes state.	Account Holder, Admin, App Manager, Developer, Marketing
App Analytics Weekly Email Summary	Provides an email summarizing App Analytics data for the week for the top apps.	Account Holder, Admin, Sales, Finance
Agreements	Provides email alerts with agreement status updates. Examples are agreement expiration warnings or requests for more information from you to complete your agreement setup.	Account Holder
Developer Response	Provides email alerts when a customer edits a review you’ve responded to.	Account Holder, Admin, Customer Support
Financial Report	Provides email alerts when finance reports are available for download in App Store Connect.	Account Holder, Admin, Finance
Payments	Provides email alerts when a payment to your bank is returned. See Resolve a returned payment error.	Account Holder, Admin, Finance

Catalog reports

App catalog report

The app catalog report includes a row for each version of each app in your account. Each column shows metadata you entered or other properties that appear in the My Apps section.

For full property descriptions, visit App information and Platform version information.

Column				Description
APPLE_ID				The Apple ID (an app identifier).
APP_NAME				The name of the app.
APP_TYPE				The app type or platform: iOS, tvOS, or Mac.
PRIMARY_LANGUAGE				The default language for the metadata on the App Store (see App information).
SKU				The SKU.
VERSION_STRING				The version number.
ITC_STATUS				The app status.
LATEST_STATUS_CHANGE_DATE				The date the app status last changed.
RATING				The app rating.
PRIMARY_GENRE				The primary category.
SECONDARY_GENRE				The secondary category.
COUNT_IN_APP_APPROVED				The number of in-app purchase products that have been approved for sale.
BUNDLE_IDENTIFIER				The bundle ID.
BUNDLE_VERSION				The build string.
BUNDLE_DEVICE_FAMILY				The devices that this app supports that is specified in the build. If the app status is Prepare for Submission, this is empty.
MINIMUM_OS_VERSION				The minimum operating system required for this app that is specified in the build.
BUNDLE_LOCALIZATIONS				The localizations supported by your app that are derived from the `.lproj` folders in the build.
PRE_RENDERED_ICON				For iOS apps only, indicates whether the app has a prerendered icon. If `Y`, it is enabled; otherwise, it is not.
CURRENT_PRICE_TIER				The price of the app.
GAME_CENTER_ENABLED				Indicates whether Game Center is enabled. `Y` if it is enabled.
NEWSSTAND_ENABLED				Indicates whether Newsstand is enabled. `Y` if it is enabled.
APPROVED_LEADERBOARD_COUNT				Number of approved Game Center leaderboards.
APPROVED_ACHIEVEMENT_COUNT				Number of approved Game Center achievements.
LOCALE				Localizations that you added to your app. The languages are separated by vertical bar (\|) symbols. Two-character IETF language tags are used, including the country code if it applies (for example, en-US).
List of country codes				The territory availability. The App Stores and localizations where the app is available. `Y` indicates that the app is available for sale in that territory; otherwise, it is not. The report includes a column with the two-letter code for each possible territory.

See alsoGenerate catalog reports

Game Center achievement catalog report

The Game Center achievement catalog report contains a row for each of the achievements associated with Game Center apps in your account. Each column shows metadata or a setting for your app in My Apps.

For full descriptions of the properties, visit “Game Center Properties” in Game Center Configuration Guide for App Store Connect.

Column				Description
APP_APPLE_ID				The Apple ID (an app identifier) of the associated app.
REFERENCE_NAME				The achievement reference name.
APP_NAME				The name of the app. If the achievement is for an app that’s in a group, this column lists the names of all apps in the group.
ACHIEVEMENT_ID				The achievement ID.
Display_Order				The position in which this achievement appears in the list of achievements for the app.
POINTS_VALUE				The number of points that the achievement is worth.
IS_HIDDEN				Indicates whether the achievement is hidden from the player until the player meets the achievement’s requirements.
IS_RECYCLABLE				Indicates whether the achievement can be earned multiple times.
GROUP				The name of the group that the app belongs to, if any.
ACHIEVEMENT_STATUS				The current status of the achievement.
LOCALIZATIONS				A comma–separated list of the languages that you added to the achievement.

See alsoGenerate catalog reports

Game Center leaderboard catalog report

The Game Center leaderboard catalog report contains a row for each of the leaderboards associated with Game Center apps in your account. Each column shows metadata you entered or a setting for your app in My Apps.

For full descriptions of the properties, visit “Game Center Properties” in Game Center Configuration Guide for App Store Connect.

Column				Description
APP_APPLE_ID				The Apple ID (an app identifier) of the associated app.
REFERENCE_NAME				The leaderboard reference name.
APP_NAME				The name of the app. If the leaderboard is for an app that’s in a group, this column lists the names of all apps in the group.
LEADERBOARD_ID				The leaderboard ID.
SCORE_FORMAT_TYPE				The score format type.
Display_Order				The position in which this leaderboard appears in the list of leaderboards for the app.
SORT_ORDER				The leaderboard sort order. Scores can display from low to high or high to low.
MIN_SCORE_RANGE				The minimum allowable score for the leaderboard.
MAX_SCORE_RANGE				The maximum allowable score for the leaderboard.
PARENT_LEADERBOARD				If this leaderboard is a child in a combined leaderboard, the leaderboard reference name of the parent leaderboard.
LEADERBOARD_STATUS				The current status of the leaderboard.
IS_DEFAULT				Indicates that this leaderboard is the first leaderboard that users see in Game Center.
GROUP				The name of the group that the app belongs to, if any.
LEADERBOARD_TYPE				The leaderboard type.
LOCALIZATIONS				A comma–separated list of the languages that you added to the leaderboard.

See alsoGenerate catalog reports

In-app purchases catalog report

The in-app purchases catalog report contains a row for each of the in-app purchase products associated with apps in your account. Each column shows metadata you entered or a setting for the in-app purchase.

For full descriptions of the properties, see in-app purchase information.

Column				Description
Apple_ID				The unique Apple ID for the in-app purchase.
REFERENCE_NAME				The reference name.
PRODUCT_ID				The Product ID.
ADDON_TYPE				The type of in-app purchase product.
ADDON_ITC_STATUS				The status of the product in App Store Connect.
AUTO_RENEWABLE_DURATION				The duration for an auto-renewable subscription.
FREE_TRIAL_DURATION				The free trial duration set for an auto-renewable subscription.
MARKETING_OPTIN_INCENTIVE_DURATION				Indicates whether there’s a free subscription extension if users opt in to share their contact information. `Y` if it is enabled.
CLEARED_FOR_SALE				Indicates whether the product is ready for sale. `Y` indicates the product is available for purchase within the app.
APP_NAME				The name of the app.
APP_APPLE_ID				The Apple ID (an app identifier) of the associated app.
LOCALE				Localizations that you added to your in-app purchase. The languages are separated by vertical bar (\|) symbols. Two-character IETF language tags are used, including the country code if it applies (for example, en-US).

See alsoGenerate catalog reports

In-app purchases

In-app purchase types

In-app purchase types refer to the different types of in-app purchase options available.

Column				Description
Consumable				A product that is used once, after which it becomes depleted and must be purchased again. Example: fish food in a fishing app.
Non-Consumable				A product that is purchased once and does not expire or decrease with use. Example: Race track for a game app.
Auto-Renewable Subscription				A product that allows users to purchase dynamic content for a set period. This type of Subscription renews automatically unless cancelled by the user. Example: Monthly subscriptions for an app offering streaming services.
Non-Renewing Subscription				A product that allows users to purchase a service with a limited duration. The content of this in-app purchase can be static. This type of Subscription does not renew automatically. Example: One year subscription to a catalog of archived articles.

In-app purchase information

General Information

The main in-app purchase properties identify the product in App Store Connect and in the app.

Property				Description
Apple ID				A unique identifier automatically generated for your in-app purchase when you add the in-app purchase to your account. Note: This identifier is not the same as your Apple ID that you use to sign in to App Store Connect and your developer account.
Reference Name				A unique name you give to your in-app purchase for internal tracking that is not visible to customers, but used in App Store Connect and Sales and Trends reports. The reference name can include any characters and can be as long as 64 characters. The reference name can be edited at any time without review.
Product ID				A unique ID you give to your in-app purchase to identify the product. The product ID can contain letters, numbers, hyphens, periods, and underscores can be as long as 255 characters. You need separate identifiers for in-app purchases in your macOS app and your iOS app. When your app uses StoreKit to communicate with the App Store, it uses product identifiers to retrieve the configuration data you provided for the in-app purchase. Later, when a user wants to make a purchase, your app identifies the in-app purchase using its product identifier. The Product ID is not editable after you save the in-app purchase. After you use a Product ID for one product, it can’t be used again, even if the product is deleted.
Review Notes				Additional information about the in-app purchase that might help Apple review the submission, such as test user accounts and passwords. Review notes should not exceed 4000 characters.
Promotional Image				A promotional image is required if you want to promote your in-app purchase on your App Store product page. This image will represent your in-app purchase in all territories where your app is available for devices running iOS 11 or later. If you’re also using offer codes for auto-renewable subscriptions, your promotional image will appear on the App Store page when customers redeem their codes on iOS 14 or later. You can submit up to 20 in-app purchases with a promotional image for review at a time. Your promotional image must meet the following requirements: JPG or PNG. Dimensions of 1024 x 1024 pixels. 72 dpi, RGB, flattened and no rounded corners.
Show to all App Store users, even those who don’t have the app installed				An indication that you would like all customers to see your promoted in-app purchases, which is based on the user device information. By default, this is selected. If you deselect the checkbox, but haven’t implemented the SKProductStorePromotionController API, your in-app purchase will not be visible on the App Store. See Promote in-app purchases to relevant customers only. Note that a customer needs to have opened your app on their device at least once to see your order and visibility settings inside your app.
App Review Screenshot				A screenshot of the in-app purchase that clearly shows the item or service being offered. This screenshot is used for review only and isn't displayed on the App Store. Upload a screenshot that meets any of the screenshot specifications your app supports. Once you’ve uploaded a screenshot, you can update it but not remove it.

Localizable information

Add localizable in-app purchases information used in the product display. You must include these properties for at least one language. For a list of languages, see App Stores and localizations.

Changes to the localized information require review. The existing text displays on the store until the new text is approved. The change has its own status separate from the overall status of the in-app purchase. Before your changes are reviewed, you can revert the change.

Property				Description
Display Name				The name of the in-app purchase that is displayed to customers. The display name must be at least two characters and no more than 30 characters.
Description				A description of the in-app purchase that potentially displays to users. If you make your in-app purchase available for promotion, this displays under your in-app purchase name on the App Store. The description must be no more than 45 characters.

Auto-renewable subscription information

Property				Description
Subscription Group				A set of subscription products with varying levels and durations. Users can subscribe to one subscription product per group at a time.
Subscription Group Reference Name				An internal name you choose for a subscription group. This name will only appear on App Store Connect and in Sales and Trends reports, and won’t be visible to users.
Subscription Group Display Name				A user-facing name you choose for a subscription group. This is the name that appears on the App Store, and it can be localized.
App Name Display Options				A set of options that let you choose between using your app’s name or providing a custom name to display above the Subscription Group Display Name on the Manage Subscriptions page on user devices.
Auto-Renewable Subscription				A product that allows users to purchase dynamic content for a set period. This type of subscription renews automatically unless cancelled by the user. Subscription duration and price is configured in App Store Connect.
Auto-Renewable Subscription Levels				A ranking system of subscriptions within a subscription group that determines the upgrade, downgrade, and crossgrade path available to subscribers. Levels make it possible to offer varying access (basic, premium) of the same service. If you offer only one subscription product in your app, the subscription defaults to a single level within the subscription group. If you have multiple subscription products, arrange them in order from the one that offers the most (level 1) to the one that offers the least. You can stack subscriptions with equal content but different durations and other similar variables at the same level. Each level can have multiple subscription products, allowing for multiple durations and prices for people to choose from. This lets them upgrade, downgrade, and crossgrade within the subscription group without impacting their days of paid service.
Upgrade				When someone switches to a subscription that you’ve ranked at a higher level. The customer’s prorated payment from lower level subscription is refunded to the original payment method. They’re charged for the higher level subscription, which goes into effect immediately. The date of upgrade is the renewal date for the higher level subscription.
Downgrade				When someone switches to a subscription that you’ve ranked at a lower level. They’re charged for the lower level subscription on their next renewal date.
Crossgrade				When someone switches between subscriptions that you’ve ranked at the same level. If the subscriptions are different durations, the crossgrade goes into effect on the customer’s next renewal date. If the subscriptions are the same duration, the customer’s prorated payment from the previous subscription is refunded to the original payment method. Then they’re charged for the new subscription, which goes into effect immediately. The date of cross grade is the renewal date for the new subscription.
Auto-Renewable Subscription Duration				The length of time before the subscription renews and the subscriber is charged. Possible durations are 1 week, 1 month, 2 months, 3 months, 6 months, and 1 year. The duration can’t be changed after you submit for review. Auto-renewable subscriptions renew on the same day as the calendar date of the original purchase. If a one month free trial starts on January 7, the trial ends on February 7. If a one-month duration starts on a date that doesn’t occur in the next month, the trial ends on the last day of the next month, and reverts to the original date the next time that date occurs. For example, if someone subscribes on January 30, the next renewal date is February 28 (or February 29 in a leap year), and then March 30.